’06–’07

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters

These materials are printed on ECF pulp.

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters ’06–’07
These materials are printed with earth-friendly vegetable-based (soybean oil) ink.
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

Please contact ..........

Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.
Automation Controls Business Unit
Head Office: 1048, Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8686, Japan
Telephone: +81-6-6908-1050 Facsimile: +81-6-6908-5781
http://www.nais-e.com/

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters

All Rights Reserved © 2006 COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. ARCT1B274E ’06.10
ARCT1B274E 200610-3YT Specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan.

Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
TIMERS
TIMERS CHART ...........................................................2
TIMERS SELECTOR CHART.......................................3
ON-DELAY TIMER BASIC CIRCUIT ............................7
TIMER-RELATED TERMINOLOGY .............................8
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE TIMERS ..................10
PM4S Timers ..............................................................13
PM4H-A/S/M Timers ...................................................17
PM4H-SD/SDM Timers...............................................23
PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R Timers.....................................25
PM4H-W Timers .........................................................29
PM4H SERIES MODES AND TIME SETTING...........31
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE PM4H SERIES........32
LT4H/-L Timers ...........................................................34
LT4H-W Timers...........................................................41
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LT4H SERIES.........47
QM4H Timers..............................................................50
DIN SIZE TIMERS COMMON OPTIONS ...................54
INSTALLING DIN SIZE TIMER...................................56
S1DXM-A/M Timers ....................................................57
S1DX Timers...............................................................63
S1DXM-A/M/S1DX COMMON OPTIONS...................69
PM5S-A/S/M ...............................................................73
PMH Timers ................................................................80
MHP·MHP-M Timers...................................................82
COMPACT SIZE TIMER COMMON OPTIONS..........84
TIME SWITCHES
TIME SWITCHES CHART ..........................................87
TIME SWITCHES SELECTOR CHART......................87
A-TB72·72Q Time Switches........................................88
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE
A-TB TIME SWITCHES...........................................91
A-TB TIME SWITCHES COMMON OPTIONS ...........92
Page
COUNTERS
COUNTERS SELECTOR CHART ..............................93
TYPICAL COUNTER APPLICATIONS .......................94
COUNTER-RELATED TERMINOLOGY.....................95
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE COUNTER ..............96
LC2H Counters ...........................................................98
LC2H Preset Counters..............................................106
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC2H SERIES ......113
LC4H/-L Counters .....................................................115
LC4H-S Counters......................................................123
LC4H-W Counters.....................................................132
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC4H SERIES ......140
DIN SIZE COUNTERS COMMON OPTIONS...........143
INSTALLING DIN SIZE COUNTER ..........................145
HOUR METERS
HOUR METERS SELECTOR CHART......................146
LH2H Hour Meters ....................................................148
LH2H Preset Hour Meters.........................................156
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LH2H SERIES ......163
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE HOUR METERS ...165
TH13·TH23 Hour Meters...........................................166
TH14·TH24 Hour Meters...........................................168
TH40 Hour Meters ....................................................170
TH50 Hour Meters ....................................................172
TH63·TH64 Hour Meters...........................................174
TH70 Hour Meters ....................................................176
TH8 Hour Meters ......................................................178
DISCONTINUED MODELS AND
RECOMMENDED SUBSTITUTES........................180
FOREIGN SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW ..............183
FOREIGN SPECIFICATIONS...................................185
CE MARKINGS OVERVIEW ....................................187
INDEX .......................................................................188
1
TIMERS CHART
Multiple
ON-delay OFF-delay Twin Flicker One-shot Star delta One-cycle Integration
operation
Digital quartz timer

LT4H
LT4H-L

LT4H LT4H (Signal) LT4H-W LT4H LT4H LT4H

Surface mount/Flush mount

LT4H-L LT4H-L LT4H-L LT4H-L LT4H-L

LT4H-W

QM4H

PM4H-W PM4H-SD/SDM S1DX

Multi-range analog timer (CR oscillation)

S1DX PM4S PM4H-A (Signal) PM4H-A PM4H-A

PM4H-S PMH PM4H-F PM5S-A PM5S-A
PM4H-M PM5S-A (Signal) PM5S-M PM5S-M
PM4H-A PM5S-S PM5S-M (Signal) S1DX S1DX
PM5S-A S1DXM-A/M S1DXM-M S1DXM-M
Relay terminal socket

S1DX S1DX S1DX

S1DX
S1DXM-A/M S1DXM-M S1DXM-M
PC board mount

S1DX
Surface mount/Flush mount
Motor drive timer

MHP
MHP-M

2
TIMERS SELECTOR CHART
Pulse ON-delay
Power ON-delay
Pulse Flicker
Power Flicker
Pulse ON-Flicker
Power ON-flicker
Power ON-delay Differential ON/OFF-delay (1)(2) Power ON-delay Star-Delta Power OFF-delay
Operation mode Power One-shot
Signal OFF-delay
Power One-cycle
Pulse One-shot
(with instantaneous contact)
Pulse One-cycle

CR oscillation counting timer

For time control for short For time control for short For time control for short For all uses of power
Major uses For self holding circuit For SD motor start-up
or long time or long time or long time OFF-delay
1000h
100h 500h
30h
10h
1h
Time range 30m
10m 16 time 10min
Each model has various 5m ranges
time ranges. See the 2m selectable 3 time
100s
product lists before 1m ranges
ordering. 30s 4 time 4 time selectable
10s ranges ranges 10s
5s selectable selectable 0.04min
1s 3 time ranges selectable
0.1s 0.1s 0.2s
0.04s
0.01s

Model/Product Name

PM4S PM4H-A PM4H-S PM4H-M PM4H-SD/SDM PM4H-F8/-F8R/-F11R

Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer Star-Delta timer OFF-delay timer
16 time ranges are selectable.
4 time ranges are selectable.
16 time ranges are selectable. 1s to 500h (Max. range) is Multiple time ranges are
16 time ranges are selectable. 2s to 100s (Max. range) is
An affordable new series 1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. selectable.
Features 1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit.
timers controlled. 5 operation modes (with Power-OFF delay of max. 10
controlled in one unit. 5 time ranges selectable for
8 operation modes available. instantaneous contact) min. is controlled.
the - switching times.
available.

7A
Control 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A
Current 5A
output 3A
(resistive) 3A

Voltage 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC

Mounting method

Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel
Terminal block, cap
Mounting parts cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting
frame frame frame frame frame
100 to 120 V AC, 100 to 240 V AC, 100 to 240 V AC, 100 to 240 V AC, 100 to 120 V AC,
100 to 240 V AC,
200 to 240 V AC, 48 to 125V DC, 24 V AC/DC, 48 to 125V DC, 24 V AC/DC, 48 to 125V DC, 24 V AC/DC, 200 to 240 V AC,
Rated operating voltage 24 V AC
12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V AC
(other models)
24 V DC (other models) (other models) (other models) (other models)
T.D: Timed-out 2 Form C Selected side: Timed-out 1 Form A Timed-out 2 Form C
Timed-out Timed-out Timed-out 1 Form C
Arrangement INST: Timed-out 1 Form C, by front side: Timed-out 1 Form A Timed-out 1 Form C
2 Form C 2 Form C Instantaneous 1 Form C
instantaneous 1 Form C switch Instantaneous: 1 Form A [F8R type]
±1%
Operation time fluctuation (power off time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h) ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3%
±2%
Time Temperature error (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C) ±2% ±2% ±2% ±2% ±2%
±1%
accuracy Voltage error (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%) ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5%
Setting error ±5% ±5% ±5% ±5% ±5% ±5%
Min. power off time 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 500 ms —
Life (Min. Mechanical 107 2 × 107 2 × 107 2 × 107 2 × 107 107
operation) Electrical 105 105 105 105 105 105
Pin type Pin type Pin type Pin type Pin type Pin type
No instantaneous contact
Reset input
N.C. N.C.
NC NC Start input N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
Stop input N.C. N.O.
NO NO N.O.
4 5 N.O.
N.C.
5 6 7 N.O.
N.O.
4 5
N.O. N.O.
4 5
N.O.
4 5 4 5
3 6 4 8 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6
MODE
3 9
2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 7
2 10
1 8 1 11 1 8 1 8 1 8
COM COM 1 8
Operating voltage Operating voltage Operating voltage Operating voltage
POWER (–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+) Operating voltage
(–) (+) (–) (+)

Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams T.D. INST.

Screw terminal type Screw terminal type Screw terminal type Pin type Screw terminal type
3 3
4 4 With instantaneous contact
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.

1 1 11 N.C. N.O. 6 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 11 11 4 5 11
T.D: Timed-out 2 Form C Stop
3 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
INST: Timed-out 1 Form C, input
2 7
Reset
instantaneous 1 Form C input
1 8 Reset input
Operating Operating Operating
* Selected by front switch Start
(+) voltage (–) (+) voltage (–) Operating voltage (+) voltage (–)
input
Operating
(+) voltage (–)

Available standards UL/c-UL, CE UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD
Page P. 13 P. 17 P. 17 P. 17 P. 23 P. 25

3
TIMERS SELECTOR CHART

Power ON delay (1) Power ON delay (1)

Power ON delay (2) Power ON delay (2)
Signal ON delay Signal ON delay Power ON-delay
ON-start flicker Power flicker
Signal OFF delay Signal OFF delay
Power OFF-start cyclic OFF-start flicker Power ON-delay Power One-shot
Operation mode Pulse One-shot Pulse One-shot
Delay one-shot
Pulse ON-delay Pulse ON-delay
Signal Flicker Signal Flicker
Totalizing ON-delay Totalizing ON-delay Output with contact
CR oscillation counting timer Quartz oscillation counting timer CR oscillation counting timer
For repetitive ON/OFF For highly accurate time
Major uses Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting
operation setting
1000h 999.9h 999.9h 9999h 9990h
100h 500h
30h
10h
10h
1h 60min
Time range 30min
30m
8 time 8 time 8 time 10min
10m 16 time ranges ranges ranges
Each model has various 5m ranges selectable selectable selectable
time ranges. See the 2m selectable
product lists before 1m
ordering. 30s
10s
5s
1s
3s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.08s 0.01s 0.2s 0.5s
0.01s
0.05s

Model/Product Name

PM4H-W Analog multi-range

cyclic twin timer LT4H Digital timer LT4H-L Digital timer LT4H-W Digital timer QM4H Timer S1DXM-A/M Timer
Possible to set and change the
time with front digit switches With a large transparent dial.
16 time ranges are selectable. Bright and easy-to-read display Economically price. Bright and easy-to-read display
easily during the power off. This timer can be attached
Features 1s to 500h (Max. range) is Simple operation Display is a bright reflective- Simple operation
Furthermore single unit has a both on the DIN rails and
controlled in one unit. Short body type LCD. Wide time setting range
time range of 0.01s to panel.
9990hrs!!
(Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) 7A
7A
Control 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A
Current 5A 2 Form C
output 4 Form C
3A type
(resistive) 100mA 100mA 100mA type

Voltage 250 V AC 250 V AC 30 V DC 250 V AC 30 V DC 250 V AC 30 V DC 250 V AC 250 V AC

Mounting method

Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap block,
Mounting parts cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting mounting frame, fitting
frame frame frame frame frame sockets, protective cover
100 to 240 V AC, 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 120 V AC,
100 to 240 V AC/DC
48 to 125V DC, 24 V AC/DC, 24 V AC 24 V AC 24 V AC 200 to 220 V AC,
Rated operating voltage 12 to 48 V AC/DC
12 V DC 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC 12 V DC, 24 V DC
(other models)
(other models) (other models) (other models) (other models) (other models)
(Relay output (Transistor out- (Relay output (Transistor out- (Relay output (Transistor out- T.D. mode: Time delay 2C
Timed-out INST. mode: Time delay 1C Timed-out 2 Form C
Arrangement type) Timed- put type) Timed- type) Timed- put type) Timed- type) Timed- put type) Timed- and instantaneous 1C
2 Form C Timed-out 4 Form C
out 1 Form C out 1 Form A out 1 Form C out 1 Form A out 1 Form C out 1 Form A (Use MODE switch on front)
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3% ±(0.005% + 50 ms) ±(0.005% + 50 ms) ±(0.005% + 80 ms) ±1%
±(0.01% + 0.05 s)
Temperature error ±2% in case of power on start in case of power on start in case of power on start ±5%
Time in case of power on start
±(0.005% + 20 ms) ±(0.005% + 20 ms) ±(0.005% + 20 ms)
accuracy Voltage error ±0.5% ±0.005% ±0.03 s ±1%
in case of reset or input in case of reset or input in case of reset or input
(G type only)
Setting error ±5% signal start signal start signal start ±10%
Min. power off time 300 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 100 ms 100 ms
Life (Min. Mechanical 2 × 107 2 × 107 — 2 × 107 — 2 × 107 — 2 × 107 107
operation) Electrical 105 105 107 105 107 105 107 105 2 × 105
Pin type 11-Pin type 11-Pin type QM4H-S type
NC NC
Timed-out 2 Form C type
Reset Reset
NO NO
Start N.C. Start N.C.
N.C. N.C. 4 5 1 4
Stop Stop
N.O.
5 6 7 N.O. 5 6 7 N.O.
3 6
N.O. Lock Lock
4 5 4 8 4 8 MODE 5 8
3 6 3 9 3 9 2 7
2 7 2 10 2 10 1 8 9 12
1 11 NC 1 11
1 8 Start COM COM 13 14
Operating NO Operating
Operating voltage – voltage + Reset 4 5 – voltage + Operating
(–) (+)
voltage Operating
3 6 voltage
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams 7
Screw terminal type Screw terminal type 2 Screw terminal type QM4H-G type Timed-out 4 Form C type
1 8 STOP NC
Reset Reset
Start Start
Stop
Lock
– Operating
voltage + Stop
RESET
4 5
NO
1 2 3 4
N.O. Lock N.O.
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
6 7 8 9 10
N.C. 6 7 8 9 10 3 6
11 N.C. 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 2 7
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 8
9 10 11 12
Operating COM COM 13 14
Operating
(+) voltage (–) + voltage – Operating
+ voltage – Operating Operating
voltage voltage

Available standards UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE
Page P. 29 P. 34 P. 34 P. 41 P. 50 P. 57

4
 TIMERS SELECTOR CHART

Pulse ON-delay
Power ON-delay Pulse ON-delay
Pulse Flicker
Power flicker Pulse Flicker
Pulse ON-flicker
Power One-shot Pulse ON-Flicker
Power ON-delay Signal OFF-delay Power ON-delay
Operation mode Power One-cycle Signal OFF-delay
Pulse One-shot
Pulse One-shot
Pulse One-cycle
Pulse One-cycle
(with instantaneous contact)
Output with contact
CR oscillation counting timer CR oscillation counting timer CR oscillation counting timer CR oscillation counting timer
For time control for short For time control for short
Major uses For highly accurate time setting For self holding circuit For time ranges selection
or long time or long time
1000h
100h 500h 500h
30h
30h
10h
10h
60min 3h 1h 3h
1h 1.5h
Time range 30min 30min 30min
30m 30min
10min 10min 10min
10m 16 time 16 time
Each model has various 5m 3min ranges ranges 3min 3min 9min
0.1h
time ranges. See the 2m 3min selectable selectable 1min 3min
60s 1min 1.5 1.5min
product lists before 1m 1min
30s 30s min 30s
ordering. 30s 0.5min 30s
10s 10s
10s 0.1min
5s 9s 9s
5s 3s 3s
1s 3s 1.0s 3s 3s
1s 0.5s 1s 1.5s
0.1s 0.5s 0.5s 4 time ranges
0.1s 0.1s 0.2s 0.1s 0.1s 0.15s selectable
0.01s 0.05s 0.05s

Model/Product Name

PM5S-A PM5S-S PM5S-M

S1DX Timer Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer PMH Timer
16 time ranges are selectable.
A multitimer is provided with the front
With a large transparent dial. 16 time ranges are selectable. 16 time ranges are selectable. 1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled
operation slide switch by using the
Features This timer can be attached both on 1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled. 1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit.
special C-MOSIC inside pulse
the DIN rails and panel. 6 operation modes available. in one unit. 6 operation modes (with
oscillation counting method.
instantaneous contact) available.

7A 7A
7A
Control 5A 5A 5A 5A
Current 5A 2 Form C
output 4 Form C
3A type
(resistive) type

Voltage 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC 250 V AC

Mounting method

Terminal block, cap block, mounting Terminal block, cap, panel cover, Terminal block, cap, panel cover, Terminal block, cap, panel cover, Terminal block, socket, cap, mounting
Mounting parts
frame, fitting sockets, protective cover rubber gasket, mounting frame rubber gasket, mounting frame rubber gasket, mounting frame frame, protective cover

100 to 120 V AC, 200 to 220 V AC, 100 to 120 V AC, 200 to 240 V AC
12 V DC, 24 V DC, 12 V DC, 24 V DC,
Rated operating voltage 24 to 240V AC/DC 24 to 240V AC/DC 24 to 240V AC/DC
48 V DC, 100 to 110 V DC 48 V DC, 100 to 110 V DC
(other models) (other models)

Timed-out 2 Form C Timed-out Timed-out Timed-out 1 Form C

Arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C
Timed-out 4 Form C 2 Form C 2 Form C Instantaneous 1 Form C

Operation time fluctuation ±1% ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.3% ±0.5%

Time Temperature error ±5% ±2% ±2% ±2% ±5%
accuracy Voltage error  ±1% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5%

Setting error  ±10% ±10% ±10% ±10% ±10%
Min. power off time 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
Life (Min. Mechanical 107 2 × 107 2 × 107 2 × 107 5 × 107
operation) Electrical (resistive) 2 × 105 105 105 105 2 × 105

Timed-out 2 Form C type

1 4

5 8

9 12
13 14
NC NO NC
Operating
voltage 4 5
Wiring diagrams NO 3 6
Timed-out 4 Form C type 2 7
1 8
COM COM
1 2 3 4
(
) Operating ()
5 6 7 8 voltage
9 10 11 12
13 14

Operating
voltage

Available standards UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/CSA, LLOYD
Page P. 63 P. 73 P. 73 P. 73 P. 80

5
TIMERS SELECTOR CHART

Power ON-delay
Operation mode

Motor timer

Major uses Suitable for high accurate, long time uses

1000h
100h
30h 24h
12h
10h 6h
60min 3h
1h
Time range 30min
30m 12min
10m 6min
Each model has various 5m 3min 6min
time ranges. See the 2m 2min
60s
product lists before 1m 1min
30s
ordering. 30s
10s
10s
5s 0.2min 0.3min
5s 0.1min
1s 1s 2s MHP MHP-M
0.1s 0.2s 0.3s
0.01s

Model/Product Name

MHP Timer MHP-M Timer

A motor timer with high accuracy.

Features With a movable point and instantaneous contact
(for the MHP-M)

7A
Control 5A 5A
Current 5A
output
(resistive) 3A

Voltage 250 V AC 250 V AC

Mounting method

Mounting parts Terminal block, socket, cap, mounting frame, protective cover

Rated operating voltage 100 V AC, 200 V AC (other models)

Timed-out 1 Form C
Arrangement Timed-out 1 Form C
Instantaneous 1 Form A

Operation time fluctuation ±2%

Time Temperature error —
accuracy Voltage error —
Setting error —
Min. power off time 300 ms
Life (Min. Mechanical 107
operation) Electrical (resistive) 4 × 105

NO NC NO NC

4 5 4 5
Wiring diagrams 3 6 3 6
2 7 2 7
1 8 1 8
COM COM

Operating Operating
voltage voltage

Available standards UL/CSA, LLOYD UL/CSA, LLOYD

Page P. 82 P. 82

6
ON-DELAY TIMER BASIC CIRCUIT
(Symbols) 4. Fixed Time Operation (Continuous 7. Fixed Time Operation after Delay
Self-resetting switch Relay NO contact input) Time is Set (Continuous input)
Holding switch Relay NC contact When switch A is closed, load L is turned When switch A is pressed, load L is
R Relay Timer delay NO contact ON and after t-time elapses, the load is turned ON after t1-time elapses and load
T Timer Timer delay NC contact turned OFF. When switch A is opened, L is turned OFF after t2-time elapses.
L Load Timer instantaneous NO contact
timer T is reset and load L is turned OFF.
Timer in work Timer instantaneous NC contact
A T1
1. Delay Operation (Instantaneous A
T T2
input)
When control switch A is pressed, timer T L T1 T2 L
T starts immediately and after t-time
elapses, load L is turned ON. When B is ON
pressed, timer T is reset and load L is
OFF
turned OFF. A
t ON ON
OFF
T
ON A
A R T A T T ON
OFF t1
L
T1
ON
5. Delay Reset Operation t2

L B L When contact A is reversed, load L is T2

ON
B
immediately turned ON. When contact A
L OFF
R T T is returned to normal state, load L is
turned OFF after t-time elapses. 8. Repetitive Operation
(In the case of timer
ON w/instantaneous contact) This circuit is used when the power sup- When switch A is pressed, load L is
A
OFF ply is kept ON at all times or used for off- turned ON after t1-time elapses and load
ON delay-like application.
OFF
L is turned OFF after t2-time elapses,
B
t ON However, it can not be used as off-delay and thereafter the t1 and t2 operations
T
OFF timer at the time of power failure. are repeated. This repetitive operation
ON
L OFF stops when switch A is turned OFF.
R R
A
2. Delay Operation (Continuous input)
A
When switch A is pressed, after t-time T
R1 R2 T1 R2

elapsed, the timer contact closes and L

load L is turned ON. When switch A is T R T2
opened, the timer is reset and the load is
turned OFF. ON T1 L R1 T2 R2

OFF
A
t
A T
T ON
ON
L OFF
T L OFF
A
t1 t1
6. Fixed Time Operation after Delay
ON T1
Time is Set (Instantaneous input) t2 t2
OFF
A
t ON When control switch A is pressed, load L T2
ON ON
T
OFF is turned ON after t1-time elapses, and
ON OFF OFF
OFF
load L is turned OFF after t2-time elapses. L
L
This circuit is used for the case of instan-
3. Fixed Time Operation taneous input (one pulse).
(Instantaneous input)
When control switch A is pressed, load L A R
is immediately turned ON, and after t-
T1
time elapses, load L is turned OFF.
T2 L

A R A T R T1 T2

T T ON
L L
A T1
OFF
A
R T T t1 ON

T2 T1 OFF
T1
(In the case of timer t2
ON
w/instantaneous contact)
OFF T2
A ON T1 T2 ON
t L
OFF OFF
T L
ON (In the case of timer
L OFF w/instantaneous contact)

7
TIMER-RELATED TERMINOLOGY
• What is the timer? • Star ( )/Delta (
) Operation to expect the normal operation.
The timer is a relay having such an out- This operation controls the time in the Therefore, be sure to set the timer pause
put (with or without contact) which elec- star connection used for star-delta start- time longer than the specified reset time.
trically closes (turns ON) or opens (turns ing which is conducted for starting a Power application time
(Input signal
OFF) the circuit after a preset time elaps- cage induction motor and the time for application time) Pause
es when electrical or mechanical input is switching the star connection over to time

given. delta connection. Power supply

(Input signal)
• On-delay Operation (Time delay ON

operation) Power supply

OFF Time delay contact
ON
The on-delay operation is an operation to
OFF
give output when preset time expires Star side contact
ON Internal mechanism
after a predetermined input is given to Internal circuit
Operating
OFF Reset time
the power supply circuit or input circuit. Delta side contact time

Hold time
On-delay operation includes power sup- t1 t2 t3
ply on-delay operation and signal on- • Minimum Power Application Time
delay operation. t1 : Star operation time
It means the minimum time during which
t2 : - Star/Delta switching time
Example of power supply on-delay operation
t3 : Delta operation time power must be supplied in order to oper-
ate timer normally, in the case of power
ON • Preset Time
supply off-delay timer.
Power supply
OFF The preset time is the control time set by
setting time-variable timer. • Fluctuation of Operating Time
(In time delay ON
operation)
It means the irregularity in operating time
Output signal OFF • Operating Time
caused when timer is set at specified
(Time delay contact)
Operating time The operating time means the time
time and the operation is repeated under
which elapses between the addition of
the same conditions. It is also referred
• Off-delay Operation (Time delay predetermined input to the power supply
to as repetitive error.
resetting) circuit and input circuit and the comple-
tion of operation for preset time. • Voltage Error
The off-delay operation is an operation to
It means the difference between the
turn OFF output when preset time • Hold Time
operating time at the rated voltage and
expires after a predetermined input is It means the time which elapses
that within the allowable voltage range.
given to the power supply circuit or input between the completion of operation for
circuit, and at the same time output sig- preset time and the start of resetting. • Temperature Error
nal is given and predetermined input is It means the difference between the
• Pause Time
turned OFF. Off-delay operation operating time at the temperature of
It means the time elapses between the
includes power supply off-delay opera- 20±2°C and that within the allowable
start of operation for preset time and the
tion and signal off-delay operation. temperature range.
addition of input required again for the
Example of power supply off-delay operation power supply circuit or input circuit. • Set Error
ON Timer does not perform normal function It means the difference between the set
OFF unless this pause time is set longer than time and the time which actually elapses.
Power supply
(In time delay the timer reset time. It is also referred to as setting error.
ON operation)
The set error of an analog timer is the
• Resetting
Output signal OFF rate to the full-scale value. If the set error
(Time delay contact) It means that the operation returns to the
Operating time is ±5%, it becomes equivalent to an error
state before starting while the timer is in
of maximum ±5 hours on the assumption
operation for preset time or after it com-
• Flicker Operation that 100 hours is set in the range of 100
pletes the operation for preset time.
The flicker operation is an operation to hours. The error produced when 10
Resetting during the operation for preset
repeat output ON/OFF action according hours is set is also equivalent to an error
time is referred to as halfway resetting.
to preset ON time and OFF time while a of maximum ±5 hours. As far as the set
predetermined input is given to the • Reset Time error is concerned, digital timer is by far
power supply circuit or input circuit. It means the time elapses between shut- exact. Select a digital timer for the case
Flicker operation includes OFF-start flick- off of input to the power supply circuit or when accuracy is required.
er operation and ON-start flicker opera- input of reset signal and the completion When using an analog type multi-range
tion. of resetting. timer for setting of long time, the setting
Timer resetting function shares the reset procedure stated as follows minimizes
Example of OFF-start flicker operation t < t1
of contact, reset of mechanical parts the error. For example, if you want to set
ON such as pointer etc., reset of parts in 8 hours in the range of 10 hours, first set
Power supply OFF internal circuit such as capacitor etc., the pointer to such a graduation where
or signal
ON ON
and the value at which all of these parts the actual operating time should become
OFF OFF
complete their resetting operation is as close to 8 seconds as possible in the
Output signal regarded as reset time. If timer is used
(Time delay contact) range of 10 seconds. Then, reset the
for a pause time shorter than specified range to 10 hours, leaving the pointer set
t1 t2 t1 t2 t reset time, the operation time expires at the graduation as it is.
earlier than preset, unexpected instanta-
t1 : Output OFF time neous operation takes place or the oper-
t2 : Output ON time
ation is failed, thus making it impossible

8
 TIMER-RELATED TERMINOLOGY
• Pause Time Error
It means the difference between the operating time to a fixed pause time and the operating time to a pause time that varies.
The pause time characteristics are the main characteristics of CR timer (timer exploiting charge and discharge of capacitor C and
resistance R).
If the oscillation count timer (timer which comprises an oscillation circuit composed of CR and quartz and is operated by a counting
circuit inside IC or micro-computer which counts the reference signal) is used, the pause time error becomes almost negligible owing
to its principles of operation. Accordingly, the description about these characteristics may be omitted for the oscillation count timer.
• Equation for Each Error and Measurement Conditions
The operation time shall be measured, in principle, for retention time of 0.5 second and halt time of 1 second.
The measurement shall be repeated five times except for the initial test. The equation for each error and the measurement condi-
tions are shown in the table below:
Measurement conditions
Item Equation
Set value Ts (Note 1) Supply voltage Ambient temperature
(1) Fluctuation in 1 Tmax. – Tmin.
± — × ——————— × 100 (%) Rated voltage
operation time 2 TMs 20±2°C 68±36°F
Fluctuation range of (Note 2)
TMx1 – TM
(2) Voltage error —————— × 100 (%) Full-scale value allowable voltage of
TMs power supply (Note 3)
(3) Temperature TMx2 – TM –10 to 50°C +14 to 122°F
—————— × 100 (%)
error TMs (Note 4)

TM – Ts 1/3 or more of
(4) Set error —————— × 100 (%) Rated voltage
TMs full-scale value
20±2°C 68±36°F
(Note 2)
(5) Pause time TMx3 – TM
—————— × 100 (%) Full-scale value
error TMs
Note 1: For digital timers, the set value Ts shall be optional.
Note 2: If no question arises from evaluation results, 13-35°C is acceptable.
Note 3: The measurement may be performed in other specified voltage ranges.
Note 4: The measurement may be performed in other specified temperature ranges.
TM: Average of measured values for operation time
Ts: Set value
TMs: Full-scale value. For digital timers, any arbitrary scale-value may be used.
Tmax: Maximum of measured values for operation time
Tmin: Minimum of measured values for operation time
TMx1: Average of operation time at such voltage as maximizes deviation from TM in allowable voltage range.
TMx2: Average of operation time at such temperature as maximizes deviation from TM in allowable temperature range.
TMx3: Average of operation time at such pause time (in the range from the specified reset time to 1 hour) as maximizes deviation from TM.

• Functional Vibration Resistance • Electrical life • Contact resistance

Means such a vibration as occurs in the
range where the contact closed with that
vibration during the use of the timer
remains closed for the specified time (3
or 1 msec.) minimum.
• Destructive Vibration Resistance
Means such a vibration as occurs in the
range where no part is damage with that
vibration during the transportation or use
of the timer and the operation character-
istics are maintained.
• Functional Shock Resistance
Means such a shock as occurs in the
range where the contact closed with that
shock during the use of the timer
remains closed for the specified time (1
ms) minimum.
• Destructive Shock Resistance
Means such a shock as occurs in the
range where no part is damaged with
that shock during the transportation or
use of the timer and the operation char-
acteristics are maintained.
• Mechanical life
Means the durability that is achieved
when the control output is performed in
the no-load state.
Means the durability that is achieved
when the specified voltage and current
loads are individually applied to the con-
trol output while being turned ON and
OFF. Generally, the life of the timer is
represented by the number of times the
control output is performed. When a
load is connected to the control output,
the term of "electrical life" is used. When
no load is connected to the control out-
put, the term of "mechanical life" is used.
The electrical life is shorter than the
mechanical life, and becomes longer as
the load decreases. The life of the timer
is made longer by connecting a relay or
a similar part rather than directly switch-
ing a large load with the control output.
• Rated power consumption
Means the power that is consumed when
the rated operation voltage is applied to
the power circuit.
(Rated power consumption = rated volt-
age × current consumption)
• Rated control capacity
Means the reference value that is used
to determine the performance of the
switching part of the load. This value is
represented by the combination of volt-
age and current.
Means the combined resistance that
consists of the contact resistance
between contacts, and the conductor
resistance of pins and contact springs.
• Insulation resistance
Means the resistance between a contact
or a conductive pin like the pin to which
the operation voltage is applied, and a
dead pin or a non-conductive metallic
part like the time case, the base, or a
retaining screw; or the resistance
between contacts.
• Withstand voltage
Means the limit value that does not
cause breakdown when high voltage is
applied for one minute to the same loca-
tion as measured for insulation resis-
tance. The detectable leak current is
normally 10 mA. In special cases, how-
ever, it may be 1mA or 3 mA.
• Withstand surge voltage
Means the limit value that shows the
durability against momentary abnormal
voltage resulting from lightning or switch-
ing a conductive load. The surge wave-
form is represented by the standard
impulsive voltage waveform at ±(1.2 ×
50) µs or ±(1 × 40) µs.
9
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE TIMERS
Cautions for circuits
1. Protective circuit for timer contact
In the circuit that switches an inductive load, a contact failure may occur at a contact point due to surge or inrush current resulting
from that switching. Therefore, it is recommended that the following protective circuit be used to protect the contact point.
CR circuit (r: resistor c: capacitor) Diode circuit Varistor circuit
Timer contact Timer contact Timer contact Timer contact

Inductive load

Inductive load
Inductive load
Inductive load
Circuit
r
r c Diode ZNR varistor
c

AC (see note.) Available Not available Available

Application
DC Available Available Available Available
If the load is a relay or solenoid, the release time lengthens. The diode connected in parallel caus-
Effective when connected to both contacts if the power supply voltage is es the energy stored in the coil to
24 or 48 V and the voltage across the load is 100 to 200 V. flow to the coil in the form of current Using the rated voltage characteris-
and dissipates it as joule heat at the tics of the varistor, this circuit pre-
If the load is a timer, leakage current resistance component of the induc- vents excessively high voltages
Features/Notes flows through the CR circuit causing tive load. from being applied across the con-
faulty operation. This circuit further delays the release tacts. This circuit also slightly
—
Note: If used with AC voltage, be sure time compared to the CR circuit. delays the release time.
the impedance of the load is sufficiently (2 to 5 times the release time listed in
smaller than that of the c and r. the catalog)
As a guide in selecting r and c, Use a diode with a reverse break-
c: 0.5 to 1 µF per 1 A contact current down voltage at least 10 times the
r: 0.5 to 1 Ω per 1 V contact voltage circuit voltage and a forward cur-
Values vary depending on the properties of the load and variations in timer character- rent at least as large as the load
Device Selection istics. current. —
Capacitor c acts to suppress the discharge the moment the contacts open. Resistor r In electronic circuits where the cir-
acts to limit the current when the power is turned on the next time. Test to confirm. cuit voltages reverse breakdown
Use a capacitor with a breakdown voltage of 200 to 300 V. Use AC type capacitors voltage of about 2 to 3 times the
(non-polarized) for AC circuits. power supply voltage.

2. Type of Load and Inrush Current (Fig. A) Good example (1) When using contact output
The type of load and its inrush current AC power supply

Insulation transformer
characteristics, together with the switch- (+)
Input device
R T R

ing frequency are important factors (–)

(e.g., sensor)

which cause contact welding.

(–)
R T
Particularly for loads with inrush cur- Timer

rents, measure the steady state current

and inrush current and use a relay or (Fig. B) Bad example
(2) When using non-contact output
magnet switch which provides an ample AC power supply

margin of safety. The table below shows Insulation transformer R RT R

(+)
Input device
the relationship between typical loads (–)
(e.g., sensor)

RT
and their inrush currents.
(–) R T
Type of load Inrush current Timer

Resistive load Steady state current

Solenoid load 10 to 20 times the steady state current AC power supply
5. Leakage current
Motor load 5 to 10 times the steady state current Single coil transformer 1) For connecting and disconnecting
(+)
Incandescent lamp load 10 to 15 times the steady state current (–)
Input device
(e.g., sensor) operating voltage to the timer, a circuit
Mercury lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current should be used, which will prevent the
Sodium vapor lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current (–)
Alternative
flow of leakage current. For example, a
Capacitive load 20 to 40 times the steady state current Timer current flow
circuit for contact protection as shown in
Transformer load 5 to 15 times the steady state current Fig A. will permit leakage current flow
When you want large load and long life Do not use a single coil transformer through R and C, causing erroneous
of the timer, do not control the load direct (e.g., Sly-Duck). Otherwise, the internal operation of the timer. Instead, the cir-
with a timer. When the timer is designed circuit of the timer will be short-circuited cuit shown in Fig. B should be used.
to use a relay or a magnet switch, you as shown in Fig. B resulting in break- (Fig. A)
can acquire the longer life of the timer. down. Leak current
3. Connection of input 4. Long Continuous Current Flow
The PM4H and LT4H series use power Long continuous current flow through the Operating voltage R C T
supply without a transformer (power and timer (approx. one month or longer) Timer

input terminals are not insulated). In cause generation of heat internally,

connecting various kinds of input signals, which degrade the electronic parts. Use
(Fig. B)
therefore, use a power transformer in the timer in combination with a relay and
which the primary side is separated from avoid long continuous current flow
R
the ungrounded secondary side as through the timer. Operating voltage T
shown in Fig. A, for the power supply for Timer
C
a sensor and other input devices so that
short-circuiting can be prevented.
10

2) If the timer is directly switched with a
non-contact element, leak current may
flow into the timer and cause it to mal-
function.
6. Power off time
If the operation voltage for the timer is
turned ON after the limit time operation is
completed or before the limit time is
reached, the Power off time longer than
the timer restoration time must be
secured.
7. Suicide circuit
If the timer is restored immediately after
the specified time is reached, the circuit
must be configured so that the restora-
tion time of the timer can be secured suf-
ficiently.
If the power circuit for the timer is turned
OFF with the timer contact, a suicide cir-
Cautions for use
(common for all models)
1. Pin connections
Correctly connect the pins while seeing
the terminal layout/wiring diagram. In
particular, the DC type, which has polari-
ties, does not operate with the polarities
connected reverse. Any incorrect con-
nection can cause abnormal heating or
ignition.
2. Connection to operation power supply
1) Supply voltage must be applied at a
time through a switch, a relay, and other
parts. If the voltage is applied gradually,
the specified time may be reached
regardless of its value or the power sup-
ply may not be reset.
2) The operation voltage for the DC type
must be at the specified ripple percent-
age or less. The average voltage must
fall within the allowable operation voltage
range.
Rectification type Ripple percentage
Single-phase, full-wave Approx. 48%
Three-phase, full-wave Approx. 4%
Three-phase, half-wave Approx. 17%
Note: Refer to the ripple percentage of each timer.
3) Make sure that no induced voltage
and residual voltage are applied between
the power pins on the timer after the
power switch is turned OFF.
(If the power line is wired in parallel with
the high-voltage and motor lines,
induced voltage may be produced
between the power pins.)
3. Control output
1) The load for the control output must
be used within the load capacity speci-
fied in the rated control capacity. If it is
used exceeding the rated value, the life
is greatly shortened.
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE TIMERS
cuit may be configured (Fig. A). In order tion:
to settle the problem with this potential (1) If an AC load is switched in synchro-
suicide circuit, the circuit must be nized phases:
designed so that the timer is turned OFF Locking or welding is liable to occur due
after the self-retention circuit is com- to contact transposition. Check this with
pletely released (Fig. B). the actual system.
(2)If a load is switched very frequently:
If a load which generates arcs when a
R R
A A contact is switched is turned ON and
OFF very frequently, nitrogen and oxy-
T T
gen in air are combined due to arc ener-
R T R T gy and then HNO3 is produced. This
may corrode metallic materials.
(Fig. A) (Fig. B)
The effective countermeasures include:
8. Electrical life 1. Using an arc-extinguishing circuit;
The electrical life varies depending on 2. Decreasing the switching frequency;
the load type, the switching phase, and and
the ambient atmosphere. In particular, 3. Decreasing the humidity in the ambi-
the following cases require careful atten- ent atmosphere.
2) The following connection might result • Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1 × 40) µs]
in short circuit between the heteropolar
contacts in the timer.
Bad example Good example
100
90
Crest value (%)
Crest value
L2 50
30
0
L1 L1 L2 0 1 40
Time (µs)
• PMH [±(1 × 40) µs]
4. Installing the timer
1) To install the timer, use the dedicated Voltage type Surge voltage
AC type (Except for 24V AC) 4,000V
pin bracket or socket (cap). Avoid con-
12V DC, 24V DC, 24V AC 500V
necting the pins on the timer by directly
48V DC 1,000V
soldering them.
100 to 110V DC 2,000V
2) In order to maintain the characteris-
tics, do not remove the timer cover If external surge occurs exceeding the
(case). specified value, the internal circuit may
5. Superimposed surge of power sup- break down. In this case, use a surge
ply absorption element. The typical surge
For the superimposed surge of power absorption elements include a varistor, a
supply, the standard waveform (±1.2 × capacitor, and a diode. If a surge
50µs or ±1 × 40µs) is taken as the stan- absorption element is used, use an oscil-
dard value for surge-proof voltage. (The loscope to see whether or not the foreign
positive and negative voltages are surge exceeding the specified value
applied each three or five times between appears.
the power pins.) 6. Changing the set time
For the standard values for the PM4H, Do not change the set time when the
LT4H and S1DX type timers, see the limit time operation is in progress.
respective items in "Cautions for use." However, this is possible only with the
motor-driven type timer if the set time is
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1.2 × 50) µs]
shorter than the remaining time. For
changing the set time on the digital timer
(LT4H series), see the relevant item in
100
90 "Cautions for use."
Crest value (%)
Crest value
50
30
0
0 1.2 50
Time (µs)
11
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE TIMERS
7. Operating environment
1) Use the timer within the ambient tem-
perature range from –10°C to +50°C
+14°F to +122°F (+55°C +131°F for the
LT4H series) and at ambient humidity of
85% RH maximum.
2) Avoid using the timer in a location
where inflammable or corrosive gas is
generated, the timer is exposed to much
dust and other foreign matter water or oil
is splashed on the timer or vibrations or
shocks are given to the timer.
3) The timer cover (case), the knobs,
and the dials are made of polycarbonat-
ed resin. Therefore, prevent the timer
from being exposed to organic solvents
such as methyl alcohol, benzine, and
thinner, strong acid substances such as
12
caustic soda, and ammonia and avoid specified limit, abnormal heat, smoke, or
using the timer in atmosphere containing ignition may occur.
any of those substances. 2) If any malfunction of the timer is likely
4) If the timer is used where noises are to affect human life and properties, give
emitted frequently, separate the input allowance to the rated values and perfor-
signal elements (such as a sensor), the mance values. In addition, take appro-
wiring for the input signal line, and the priate safety measures such as a duplex
timer as far as possible from the noise circuit from the viewpoint of product lia-
source and the high power line contain- bilities.
ing noises.
8. Checking the actual load
In order to increase the reliability in the
actual use, check the quality of the timer
in the actual usage.
9. Others
1) If the timer is used exceeding the rat-
ings (operation voltage and control
capacity), the contact life, or any other
 PM4S

MULTI-RANGE PM4S
ANALOG TIMER
Timers

RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/
Features
1. Economic pricing that promptly 4. Equipped with zero-setting
reflects market demands instantaneous output
Remarkable economic pricing is Set the dial all the way to “0” for
implemented in pursuit of cost instantaneous operation, so circuit
performance. testing can be easily accomplished.
2. Output contacts switchable 5. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
between timed out 2C and timed out
1C/Instantaneous 1C
The timed out 1C/Instantaneous 1C
output contact enables the efficient
addition of self-maintenance circuits.
3. 4 different time ranges selectable
on a single unit
Five types of timers cover the full range of
time settings from 1 second to 30 hours.

Product types
Type /////// Contact arrangement Time range Operating voltage Part No.
100 to 120V AC PM4S-A2C10M-AC120V
PM4S 200 to 240V AC PM4S-A2C10M-AC240V
1s/10s/1min/10min
Multi-range Timer
(4 time ranges selectable) 12V DC PM4S-A2C10M-DC12V
A type
24V DC PM4S-A2C10M-DC24V
100 to 120V AC PM4S-A2C30M-AC120V
PM4S 200 to 240V AC PM4S-A2C30M-AC240V
3s/30s/3min/30min
Multi-range Timer
(4 time ranges selectable) 12V DC PM4S-A2C30M-DC12V
B type
24V DC PM4S-A2C30M-DC24V
T.D.:
Timed-out 2C 100 to 120V AC PM4S-A2C60M-AC120V
PM4S 200 to 240V AC PM4S-A2C60M-AC240V
Power INST.: 6s/60s/6min/60min
Multi-range Ttimer
ON-delay Timed-out 1C (4 time ranges selectable) 12V DC PM4S-A2C60M-DC12V
C type
Instantaneous 1C 24V DC PM4S-A2C60M-DC24V
(Selected by front switch)
100 to 120V AC PM4S-A2C10H-AC120V
PM4S 200 to 240V AC PM4S-A2C10H-AC240V
1min/10min/1h/10h
Multi-range Timer
(4 time ranges selectable) 12V DC PM4S-A2C10H-DC12V
D type
24V DC PM4S-A2C10H-DC24V
100 to 120V AC PM4S-A2C30H-AC120V
PM4S 200 to 240V AC PM4S-A2C30H-AC240V
3min/30min/3h/30h
Multi-range Timer
(4 time ranges selectable) 12V DC PM4S-A2C30H-DC12V
E type
24V DC PM4S-A2C30H-DC24V

Parts name
• The PM4S Multi-Range timer allows time units and output contacts to be selected via front switches.

Output contact selector

Time range selector

Time unit selector

13
PM4S
Specifications
Type
PM4S Multi-range Timer
Item
Rated operating voltage 100 to 120V AC 200 to 240V AC 12V DC 24V DC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz —
Approx. 3.0VA/3.6VA Approx. 5.6VA/6.8VA
(at 100V AC) (at 200V AC)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.3W Approx. 1.7W
Approx. 4.5VA/5.25VA Approx. 7.5VA/9.8VA
(at 120V AC) (at 240V AC)
Rating Output rating 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operating mode Power ON-delay
A type 1s/10s/1min/10min (4 time ranges selectable)
B type 3s/30s/3min/30min (4 time ranges selectable)
Time range C type 6s/60s/6min/60min (4 time ranges selectable)
D type 1min/10min/1h/10h (4 time ranges selectable)
E type 3min/30min/3h/30h (4 time ranges selectable)
Operating time fluctuation ±1% (power off time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h)
Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
Time accuracy Note)
Voltage error ±1% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F)
T.D.: Timed-out 2 Form C
Contact arrangement
INST.: Timed-out 1 Form C, instantaneous 1 Form C (Selected by front switch)
Contact
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) Min. 107
Life
Electrical (contact) Min. 105 (at raed control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Min. 100MΩ Between live and dead metal parts (At 500V DC)
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value)
Between contacts of different poles
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical function 2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 100 ms
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
Mechanical function
Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (non-condensing)
Operating condition
Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC type) 20%
Others Weight Approximately 110 g 3.880 oz
Notes) 1. Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% ripple factor
for DC), 20°C 68°F ambient temperature, and 1s power off time.
2. For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category III
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)

Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)

Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

14
 PM4S
Dimension (Unit: mm inch) Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020
• Surface mount dimensions
14.5
.571 102.2

48 4.024

1.890 5.5 63.7 14.2 DIN rail terminal block
.217 2.508 .559 AT8-DF8K
(Sold separately)

44.5

1.752
Device installation rail
AT8-DLA1
(Sold separately)

• Panel mount dimensions (with mounting frame) • Panel cut out dimensions
Standard cut out dimensions are shown below.
Use mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and rubber gasket (ATC18002).
Mounting frame
AT8-DA4 (Sold separately) Min. 80
45+0.6
0 3.150
1.772+.024
0

45+0.6
0
1.772+.024
0
50
1.969 Min. 80
3.150

84.7 • Adjacent mounting

3.335 Rear terminal socket
AT78041 (Sold separately)
Panel (Thickness 1 to 3.5 mm .039 to .138 inch) 45+0.6
0
1.772+.024
0

A = (48×n–2.5)+0.6
0
A = (1.890×n–.098)+.024
0

• Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams

NC NC
T. D. I N S T. NO NO
3 3 4 5
4 4
3 6 Notes:
MODE 1. Operating voltage signs in parentheses ( ) indicate the polarity
1 1 2 7 of the DC type.
1 8
COM COM 2. is a time delay contact.
T.D.: Timed-out 2 Form C Operating
voltage
INST.: Timed-out 1 Form C,
instantaneous 1 Form C is an instantaneous contact.
* Selected by front switch

Operation mode
1. T.D. mode 2. INST. mode
ON OFF
ON
OFF
Power supply Power supply
T T OFF
ON ON
Time out OFF Time out
(N.O. contact) (N.O. contact) 6–8 OFF
ON

1–3 or 6–8 Time out

OP.LED (N.O. contact) 1–3

OP.LED
Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.

15
PM4S
Precautions during usage
1. Avoid locations subject to
flammable or corrosive gases,
excessive dust, oil, vibrations, or
excessive shocks.
2. Since the main-unit is made of
polycarbonate resin, avoid contact
with or use in environments
containing methyl alcohol, benzene,
thinners, and other organic solvents;
and ammonia, caustic sodas, and
other alkaline substances.
3. Power supply superimposed surge
protector
Although a surge protector will withstand
standard-waveform voltage with the
values in the next table, anything above
this will destroy the internal circuit. You
should therefore use a surge absorber.
12 V DC 100 to 120 V AC
24 V DC 200 to 240 V AC
500 V 4,000 V
• Surge waveform
[±(1.2×50) µs uni-polar full wave voltage]
Acquisition of CE marking
Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that
comply with EN61812-1.
1. Overvoltage category III,
pollution level 2
2. The load connected to the output
contact should have basic insulation.
This timer is protected with basic
insulation and can be double-
insulated to meet EN/IEC
requirements by using basic
insulation on the load.
16
4. In order to maintain the 8. The timer setting dial should only be
characteristics, do not remove the turned within the range indicated on
timer case. the dial face. Turning it too far may
5. When installing the panel, use the break the stopper and cause damage
ATA4811 mounting frame (Sold to internal components.
separately).
6. If you change the operating voltage,
be sure not to allow leak current into
the timer.
7. Avoid leaving the unit powered
continuously. Leaving the unit
powered up with output set to ON
continuously for a long period of time
(about 1 month or more) will wear out
the electronic components. If you will
be keeping it powered continuously,
combine with a relay to create the
circuit shown below:
R T
R
R T
3. Please use a power supply that is 5. Do not use this timer as a safety
protected by an overcurrent protection circuit. For example when using a
device which complies with the EN/ timer in a heater circuit, etc., provide a
IEC standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, protection circuit on the machine side.
etc.).
4. You must use a terminal socket or
socket for the installation. Do not
touch the terminals or other parts of
the timer when it is powered. When
installing or un-installing, make sure
that no voltage is being applied to any
of the terminals.
 PM4H-A/S/M
DIN48 SIZE PM4H-A
MULTI-RANGE PM4H-S
ANALOG TIMER
PM4H-M
UL File No.: E122222
CSA File No.: LR39291
Features
48 1. 100-240V AC free-voltage input, 48-125V DC type available
1.890
2. Short body — 62.5mm 2.461 inch (screw terminal type)
3. Front panel of IP65 type is protected against water-splash and dust
4. Built-in Screw terminals
62.5 Screw terminal type is used for easy wiring and reducing additional cost for
48 2.461
1.890 mm inch accessories.
5. 0 setting instantaneous output operation
6. Multiple time ranges — 1 s to 500 h (Max.)
Screw
Pin type terminal type
7. 8 different operation modes: (PM4H-A)
8. Compliant with UL/CSA, CE and LLOYD

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Product types
Contact Protective Rated
Type Operation mode Time range Terminal type Part number
arrangement construction operating voltage
11 pins PM4HA-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-AC240VSW
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC125VSW
IP65
11 pins PM4HA-H-24VW
8 operation modes 24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-24VSW
• Pulse ON-delay
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC12VW
• Pulse Flicker 12V DC
• Pulse ON-flicker Relay Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC12VSW
PM4H-A Timed-out
• Differential ON/OFF-delay (1) (2) 11 pins PM4HA-H-AC240V
• Signal OFF-delay 2 Form C 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-AC240VS
• Pulse One-shot
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC125V
• Pulse One-cycle 48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC125VS
IP50
11 pins PM4HA-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-24VS
11 pins PM4HA-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HA-H-DC12VS
8 pins PM4HS-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-AC240VSW
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC125VSW
IP65
8 pins PM4HS-H-24VW
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-24VSW
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC12VW
Relay 16 selectable 12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC12VSW
PM4H-S Power ON-delay Timed-out ranges
2 Form C 8 pins PM4HS-H-AC240V
1s to 500h 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-AC240VS
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC125V
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC125VS
IP50
8 pins PM4HS-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-24VS
8 pins PM4HS-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HS-H-DC12VS
8 pins PM4HM-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-AC240VSW
8 pins PM4HM-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC125VSW
IP65
8 pins PM4HM-H-24VW
24V AC/DC
5 operation modes Screw terminal PM4HM-H-24VSW
(With instantaneous contact) Relay 8 pins PM4HM-H-DC12VW
• Power ON-delay Timed-out 12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC12VSW
PM4H-M • Power Flicker 1 Form C
Instantaneous 8 pins PM4HM-H-AC240V
• Power ON-flicker 100 to 240V AC
• Power One-shot 1 Form C Screw terminal PM4HM-H-AC240VS
• Power One-cycle 8 pins PM4HM-H-DC125V
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC125VS
IP50
8 pins PM4HM-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-24VS
8 pins PM4HM-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HM-H-DC12VS
If you use this timer under harsh environment, please order above sealed type (IP65 type). IP65 type — Protection dust and water jet splay on the front face.
17
PM4H-A/S/M
Time range
Time unit PM4H-A/PM4H-S/PM4H-M
sec min hrs 10h All types of PM4H timer have multi-time
Scale
1 0.1s to 1s 0.1 min to 1 min 0.1h to 1h 1.0h to 10h range.
16 time ranges are selectable.
5 Control 0.5s to 5s 0.5 min to 5 min 0.5h to 5h 5h to 50h
time range
1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled.
10 1.0s to 10s 1.0 min to 10 min 1.0h to 10h 10h to 100h
50 5s to 50s 5 min to 50 min 5h to 50h 50h to 500h
Note: 0 setting is for instantaneous output operation.

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-A PM4H-S PM4H-M
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240V AC, 48 to 125V DC, 12V DC, 24V AC/DC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common (AC operating type)
Approx. 10VA (100 to 240V AC)
Rated power consumption Approx. 2.5VA (24V AC)
Approx. 1.5W (12V DC, 24V DC, 48 to 125V DC)
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Rating Pulse ON-delay
Power ON-delay
Pulse Flicker
Power Flicker
Pulse ON-Flicker
Power ON-flicker
Operating mode Differential ON/OFF-delay (1) (2) Power ON-delay
Power One-shot
Signal OFF-delay
Power One-cycle
Pulse One-shot
(with instantaneous contact)
Pulse One-cycle
Time range 1s to 500h (Max.) 16 time ranges switchable
Operating time fluctuation ±0.3% (power off time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h)
Time Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy
Note:) Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F)
Timed-out 1 Form C
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C
Instantaneous 1 Form C
Contact
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Silver alloy Au flash on Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 2×107
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
function
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 100ms
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F 65°C 149°F
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Operating Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (at 20°C 68°F, non-condensing)
condition Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC type) 20%
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others 100g 3.527 oz (Pin type)
Weight
110g 3.880 oz (Screw terminal type)
Note: 1) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% ripple
factor for DC), 20°C 68°F ambient temperature, and 1s power off time.
2) For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.

18
 PM4H-A/S/M
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams
PM4H-A PM4H-S
Pin type Screw terminal type Pin type Screw terminal type
• Timed-out 2 Form C • Timed-out 2 Form C • Timed-out 2 Form C • Timed-out 2 Form C
Reset input
Start input N.C. N.C.
N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O.
Stop input N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10
N.C. N.O. N.O.
N.C. 11 4 5
N.O. 5 6 7 N.O. 11
4 8 1 2 3 4 5 3 6
1 2 3 4 5
3 9 Stop
input
2 7
2 10 1 8
1 11 Reset Operating
input Operating voltage (+) voltage (–)
Operating voltage Start (–) (+)
(–) (+) input
Operating
(+) voltage (–)
1) DC Type
PM4H-M Type Pin Screw terminal
Pin type Screw terminal type Connect the terminal
to negative
PM4H-A
• Timed-out 1 Form C • Timed-out 1 Form C (–), and the terminal  to positive (+). Connect the terminal x to
negative (–), and the terminal
• Instantaneous 1 Form C • Instantaneous 1 Form C PM4H-S Connect the terminal
to negative z to positive (+).
PM4H-M (–), and the terminal  to positive (+).
N.C. N.C.

N.O.
4 5
N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.
2) Contact
11
3 6
1 2 3 4 5
2 7 Timed-out contact Instantaneous contact
1 8
Operating
(–)
Operating voltage
(+)
(+) voltage (–) 3) Voltage should not be applied to the various inputs (reset, start, and stop) of
the PM4H-A multi-range timer. These inputs should be input without voltage.

Parts name
PM4H-S PM4H-A PM4H-M
Power indicator LED Output indicator LED Operation mode selector
Selectable from
Hand
Time indicator window 5 operation modes
Set dial ON : Power ON-delay
FL : Power flicker
Time unit indicator FO : Power ON-flicker
Operation mode indicator OS : Power One-shot
OC : Power One-cycle

Time range selector Operation mode selector

16 time settings selectable Selectable from 8 operation modes
(1 s to 500 h) ON : Pulse ON-delay
1s 5s 10s 50s FL : Pulse Flicker
1min 5min 10min 50min Instantaneous output area FO : Pulse ON-flicker
1h 5h 10h 50h When the hand is in this area, OF1 : Differential ON/OFF-delay (1)
10h 50h 100h 500h instantaneous operation starts. SF : Signal OFF-delay
OS : Pulse One-shot
OF2 : Differential ON/OFF-delay (2)
OC : Pulse One-cycle

19
PM4H-A/S/M
Dimensions mm inch
Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020
• PM4H-

Screw terminal type Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
6.0 6.0
48 12.0 .236 62.5 48 12.0 .236 66.5
1.890 .472 2.461 1.890 .472 2.618 14.5

1.614 dia.
1.614 dia.

41 dia.
41 dia.

48
44.5 48
44.5
1.890
1.752 1.890
1.752

• Panel mount dimensions (with mounting frame)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Rubber gasket Rubber gasket
ATC 18002 (attached) Panel ATC18002 Panel
Mounting frame
Mounting frame AT8-DA4
AT8-DA4 (attached) (Sold separately)

1.969
1.969

48 66
44.5 48 66

50
50

1.890 2.598
1.752 1.890 2.598

48 1 61.5 48 72.5 2.854 (8-pin)

1.890 .039 2.421 1.890 78 3.071 (11-pin)

Rear terminal socket

AT78041 (8-pin: sold separately)
AT78051 (11-pin: sold separately)

• Surface mount dimensions • Panel cut out dimensions • Adjacent mounting

Pin type Standard cut out dimensions are shown
below.
Din rail socket Use mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and rubber 45+0.6
0
AT8-DF8K gasket (ATC18002). 1.772+.024
(8-pin: sold separately) 0
AT8-DF11K
(11-pin: sold separately)
45+0.6 Min. 80
0 3.150 A
1.772+.024
0
Mounting rail 45+0.6 A = (48×n–2.5)+0.6
0
0
AT8-DLA1 1.772+.024 A = (1.890×n–.098)+.024
0
0

97.3 (8-pin) Note) 1. The proper thickness of mounting

3.831 Min. 80 3.150 panel is between 1 to 5mm.
104.0 (11-pin) 2. Adjacent mount is less water-resis-
4.094
tant.

20
 PM4H-A/S/M
Operation mode  LED lighting LED flickering 
PM4H-A T: Setting time t1, t2, ta, tb<T t1+t2=T
Operation type Explanation Time chart
• If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when ON
OFF
Power supply
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c)
ON ON ON
should be shorted ahead of time. Start
– OFF OFF
• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the ON position.
ON
If pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start input Reset
– OFF

Pulse is turned on) with the power supply on, the output will go on after the set ON

ON-delay time has elapsed. Stop
– OFF

If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins x to T t1 t2

ON v) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out.
ON ON
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF
while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation OP. LED
resumes. POWER LED

Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting

ON
• If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when OFF
Power supply
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c)
ON ON ON
should be shorted ahead of time. Start
– OFF OFF OFF
• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the FL position.
ON
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start Reset
– OFF

Pulse input is turned on) with the power supply on, the limited time interval begins, ON

Flicker and the output goes on after the set time has elapsed. After the output has Stop
– OFF

gone on, it goes off when the set time has elapsed, and this process is sub- T T ta t1 t2 tb
FL sequently repeated.
ON ON
If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins x to Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF
v) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out.
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped OP. LED
while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted POWER LED
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation
resumes. Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
• If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when ON
OFF
Power supply
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c)
ON ON ON
should be shorted ahead of time. Start
– OFF OFF OFF
• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the FO position.
ON
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start Reset
– OFF

Pulse input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and after ON

ON-flicker the set time has elapsed, it goes off. This process is subsequently repeated. Stop
– OFF

If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins x to T T ta t1 t2 T tb

FO v) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out.
ON
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF
while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation OP. LED
resumes. POWER LED

• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OF1 position. ON

OFF
Power supply
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start
ON ON
input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and after Start
– OFF OFF
the set time has elapsed, it goes off.
ON
Also, when pins 2 to 6 are released (the start input goes off), the output Reset
– OFF

Differential goes on, and after the set time has elapsed, it goes off. ON

ON/OFF-delay (1) If the status of pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) changes dur- Stop
– OFF

ing the time-limit interval (the start input goes from on to off, or from off to T t1 t2 ta tb
OF1 on), the time-limit interval is restarted from the point at which the change
ON ON ON
took place. Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF OFF
If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins x to
v) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. OP. LED Restart
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while POWER LED
the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted (the stop
input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the SF position. ON
OFF
Power supply
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start
ON ON
input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and when Start
– OFF OFF
pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are released (the start input
ON
is turned off), the time limit interval begins. After the set time has elapsed, Reset
– OFF

Signal the output goes off. If start input is entered at any point during the time limit ON

OFF-delay interval, the time limit interval is reset. Stop
– OFF

Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped T ta tb

SF while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted
ON
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation Time out (N.O. contact) OFF
resumes.
OP. LED

POWER LED

Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting

Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.
Keep 0.05s or more for start, stop, reset input time.

21
PM4H-A/S/M
Operation type Explanation Time chart
ON
• If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when Power supply OFF
the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c)
ON ON
should be shorted ahead of time. Start
– OFF OFF
• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OS position. ON
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start Reset
– OFF

Pulse input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on for the set ON

One-shot time limit interval. Stop
– OFF

If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins x to T T t1 t2 ta

OS v) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. ON
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped Time out (N.O. contact) OFF

while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted

(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation OP. LED
resumes. POWER LED

Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting

• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OF2 position. ON
Power supply OFF
When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start
input is turned on) with the power supply on, the time limit interval begins, ON ON
Start
– OFF OFF
and after the set time interval has elapsed, the output goes on.
ON
Also, when pins 2 to 6 are released (the start input goes off), the time limit Reset
– OFF

Differential interval begins, and after it has elapsed, the output goes off.
ON
If the status of pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) changes dur- Stop
– OFF
ON/OFF-delay (2) ing the time-limit interval (the start input goes from on to off, or from off to T t1 t2 ta tb
OF2 on), the time limit interval is restarted from the point at which the change
ON ON
took place. Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF
If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins x to
v) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. OP. LED Restart
Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while
POWER LED
the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted (the stop
input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
ON
• If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when Power supply OFF

the power is turned off, pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) ON ON ON

should be shorted ahead of time. Start
– OFF OFF OFF

• Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OC position. ON ON

When pins 2 to 6 (screw-tightening pins x and c) are shorted (the start Reset
– OFF OFF

Pulse input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on after the ON
Stop
– OFF
One-cycle set time limit interval has elapsed. After it has gone on, it goes off after
one pulse (approximately 0.8 seconds). T t ta t1 t2 t tb

OC If the power supply is turned off, or pins 2 to 7 (screw-tightening pins x ON ON

to v) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Time out (N.O. contact) OFF OFF

Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped

OP. LED
while the pins 2 to 5 (screw-tightening pins x to b) are being shorted
POWER LED
(the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation
resumes. One pulse time (t): Approx. 0.8s
Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting
Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.
Keep 0.05s or more for start, stop, reset input time.
 LED lighting LED flickering
PM4H-S T: Setting time 
Operation type Explanation Time chart
Time limit contact relay
When the power supply is turned on, the output goes on after the set Power supply
ON
OFF
time interval has elapsed. ON
T
When the power supply is turned off, a reset is carried out. Time out (N.O. contact) OFF
Power ON-delay
OP. LED

POWER LED

PM4H-M
Operation type Explanation Time chart
Power ON-delay Turn the operation mode selector switch to display the various opera- Power ON-delay
ON tions. ON

Power Flicker When the power supply is turned on, the time limit interval begins, Power supply OFF

and operation is carried out. ON

FL When the power supply is turned off, a reset is carried out.
Time out (N.O. contact) OFF

Power ON-flicker T

FO Instantaneous contact (N.O. contact)

ON
OFF

Power One-shot
OP. LED
OS
POWER LED
Power One-cycle
OC
Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time. PM4H-M timers do not have each input which is start, reset and stop.

22
 PM4H-SD/SDM

DIN48 SIZE ANALOG

STAR ( )-DELTA (
) TIMERS PM4H-SD/SDM

UL File No.: E122222

CSA File No.: LR39291
Features
48
1. Select four types of time ranges between 0.2 s and 100 s on a single unit.
1.890 2. Select between five types of time ranges between 0.04 s and 0.7 s for the -

switching times.
3. There is a -
switching indicator so you can check the operation at a
glance.
66.5
48 2.618 4. The AC free power supply and shorter body make it easier to use.
1.890
5. Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD.
mm inch

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-SD/SDM
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240V AC, 24V AC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common
Rated power consumption Approx. 6VA (100 to 240V AC), Approx. 1.4VA (24V AC)
Rating
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operation mode -
star-delta switching (Power ON-delay)
operation control time range 2s to 100s, 4 time ranges switchable
-
switching time 0.04, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 0.7s (5 time range selectable)
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3% (power off time change at the range of 0.5s to 1h)
Time Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy
Note:) Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F)
Star ( ) side: Timed-out 1 Form A, Delta (
) side: Timed-out 1 Form A
Contact arrangement
Instantaneous: 1 Form A (Instantaneous for PM4H-SDM type only)
Contact
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Au flash on Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 2×107
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles (*3)
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
function
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles (*3)
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 500ms
Max. temperature rise 65°C 131°F
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 294m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85%RH (non-condensing)
condition
Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others
Weight 100g 3.527 oz (Pin type), 110g 3.880 oz (Screw terminal type)
Notes: 1) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage, 20°C 68°F ambient
temperature, and 1s power off time.
2) For the 2s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.
3) Between contacts of different poles for PM4H-SDM type only.

23
PM4H-SD/SDM
Time range
Time range
unit Operating (s) -
switching time (s)
Time range
2 0.2 to 2 0.04
10 1 to 10 0.1
0.3
20 2 to 20 0.5
100 10 to 100 0.7

Product types
Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal
Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode construction voltage type
8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC240VW
PM4H-SD Relay Timed-out 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC240VSW
Star ( )-Delta side: 1 Form A
(
) switching
side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC24VW
24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC24VSW
IP65
PM4H-SDM Relay Timed-out 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC240VW
Star ( )-Delta 100 to 240V AC
side: 1 Form A Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC240VSW
(
) switching
(Instantaneous
side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC24VW
4 selectable ranges over 24V AC
contact) Star ( )- Instantaneous: 1 Form A Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC24VSW
2s to 100s
Delta (
)
( -
switching time: 8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC240V
switching 100 to 240V AC
PM4H-SD Relay Timed-out 0.04, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 0.7s) Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC240VS
Star ( )-Delta side: 1 Form A
(
) switching
side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSD-S-AC24V
24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HSD-S-AC24VS
IP50
PM4H-SDM Relay Timed-out 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC240V
Star ( )-Delta 100 to 240V AC
side: 1 Form A Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC240VS
(
) switching
(Instantaneous
side: 1 Form A 8 pins PM4HSDM-S-AC24V
Instantaneous: 1 Form A 24V AC
contact) Screw terminal PM4HSDM-S-AC24VS

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

Pin type Screw terminal type
• No instantaneous contact • With instantaneous contact • No instantaneous contact • With instantaneous contact

6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6 11 11

2 7 2 7 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 8 1 8
Operating voltage Operating voltage
Operating Operating
voltage voltage

side time-delay contact side time-delay contact

side time-delay contact side time-delay contact
Instantaneous contact Instantaneous contact
(PM4H-SDM type) (PM4H-SDM type)

Dimensions mm inch

6.0
48 12.0 .236 66.5
1.890 .472 2.618 14.5
.571

48 41 dia.
44.5
1.890 1.614 dia.
1.752

Operation
Power
supply
Instantaneous
contact

side Contact
t1: operation time
( indicator LED lights)
side Contact t2: – switching time
t3: operation time
t1 t2 t3 ( indicator LED lights)

24
 PM4H-F
DIN48 SIZE ANALOG
MULTIRANGE POWER
OFF-DELAY TIMERS
PM4H-F

UL File No.: E122222

CSA File No.: LR39291
Features
1. Switch operation times between three types of time ranges of 1 s to 10 s and 1
48
1.890 min to 10 min.
2. Instantaneous reset available.
3. The shorter body makes it easier to use.
4. Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD.
62.5
48 2.461
1.890

mm inch

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-F8 PM4H-F8R PM4H-F11R
Rated operating voltage 100 to 120V AC, 200 to 240V AC, 24V AC, 12V DC, 24V DC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common (AC operating type)
Approx. 1.6VA (100 to 120V AC, 200 to 240V AC), Approx. 2.3VA (24V AC)
Rated power consumption
Rating Approx. 1.1W (12V DC, 24V DC)
Rated control capacity 3A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operation mode Power OFF-delay Power OFF-delay (with reset)
Time range 1s to 10s: 3 range switchable 1 min to 10 min: 3 range selectable
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3%
Time Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy *1 Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F)
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 2 Form C
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Au flash on Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 107
Life 5
Electrical (contact) 10 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.), 90 to 110% (DC Type)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles (*3)
Between contacts of same pole
1,500Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
Electrical 1,500Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
function Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles (*3)
750Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
s range type: 100ms
Min. power supply width
min range type: 2s
Min. reset time 50ms
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1hr on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Operating Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (non-condensing)
condition Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC type) 20%
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others
Weight 100g 3.527 oz (Pin type), 110g 3.880 oz (Screw terminal type)
*Notes: 1) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% ripple
factor for DC), 20°C 68°F ambient temperature.
2) For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms. When the power goes on, in rush current (0.3A) flows. Cautions should be taken. The
minimum power supplying time after forced reset input is 2s or more.
3) Between contacts of different pools for PM4H-F8, PM4H-F11R types only.

25
PM4H-F
Time range
Time range
unit s range type min range type
Time range
1 0.04s to 1s 0.04 min to 1 min
5 0.2s to 5s 0.2 min to 5 min
10 0.4s to 10s 0.4 min to 10 min

Product types
Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal
Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode construction voltage type
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC24VW
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC12VW
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC24VW
IP65
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC24VW
over 1 min to 10 min
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC12VW
Power 24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC24VW
Relay Timed-out
PM4H-F8 OFF-delay
2 Form C 100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC120V
(without reset)
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-AC24V
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-S-DC24V
IP50
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC120V
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-AC24V
over 1 min to 10 min
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8-M-DC24V
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC24VW
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC12VW
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC24VW
IP65
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC120VW
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC240VW
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC24VW
over 1 min to 10 min
Power 12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC12VW
OFF-delay 24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC24VW
Relay Timed-out
PM4H-F8R (with
1 Form C 100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC120V
instantaneous
reset) 200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-AC24V
over 1s to 10s
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-S-DC24V
IP50
100 to 120V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC120V
200 to 240V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC240V
3 selectable time ranges 24V AC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-AC24V
over 1 min to 10 min
12V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC12V
24V DC 8 pins PM4HF8R-M-DC24V

26
 PM4H-F
Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal
Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode construction voltage type
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC120VW
100 to 120V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC120VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC240VW
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC240VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC24VW
IP65 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC24VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC12VW
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC12VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC24VW
24V DC
3 selectable time ranges Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC24VSW
over 1s to 10s 11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC120VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC240V
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC240VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-AC24V
IP50 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-AC24VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC12VS
Power 11 pins PM4HF11R-S-DC24V
OFF-delay 24V DC
Relay Timed-out Screw terminal PM4HF11R-S-DC24VS
PM4H-F11R (with
2 Form C 11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC120VW
instantaneous 100 to 120V AC
reset) Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC120VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC240VW
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC240VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC24VW
IP65 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC24VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC12VW
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC12VSW
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC24VW
24V DC
3 selectable time ranges Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC24VSW
over 1 min to 10 min 11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC120VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC240V
200 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC240VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-AC24V
IP50 24V AC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-AC24VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC12VS
11 pins PM4HF11R-M-DC24V
24V DC
Screw terminal PM4HF11R-M-DC24VS

Dimensions mm inch
Toletance: ±0.5 ±.020
• Screw terminal type (Flush mount) • Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount)

6.0 6.0
48 12.0 .236 62.5 48 12.0 .236 66.5
1.890 .472 2.461 1.890 .472 2.618 14.5
.571
1.614 dia.

1.614 dia.
41 dia.

41 dia.

48
44.5 48
44.5
1.890
1.752 1.890
1.752

27
PM4H-F
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams
• PM4H-F8 (without reset input) • PM4H-F8R (with reset input) • PM4H-F11R (with reset input)
Pin type Pin type Pin type
Time-out 2 Form C Time-out 1 Form C, with reset input Time-out 2 Form C, with reset input

N.C. N.C. N.C.

Reset input

N.O. N.O. N.O.

4 5 4 5 N.C. N.C.

6 5 6 7 N.O.
3 Reset 3 6 N.O.
4 8
input
2 7 2 7 3
2 10
9

1 8 1 8 1 11

Operating voltage Operating voltage Operating voltage

(–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+)

Screw-tightening pin type Screw-tightening pin type

The PM4H-F11R should be used for the time- The PM4H-F11R should be used for the time- Screw terminal type
limit 2C. limit 1C and to connect reset input. Time-out 2 Form C, with reset input

N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.

11

1 2 3 4 5

Reset input
Operating
(+) voltage (–)

PM4H-F (with reset) input conditions

1. Contact input (pin type example) 2. Non-contact input (pin type example)

PM4H-F8R PM4H-F11R PM4H-F11R

PM4H-F8R
Photo-coupler
Reset input Use a contact with good contact relia- Reset input
bility for the input. Contact bounce can Reset input Be sure to use a photo-
Reset input
lead to erroneous operation of the coupler for non-contact
timer, so use a contact with short input.
bounce time. Make the resistance
between terminals for a short circuit Photo-coupler Check that Vce = 0.6V
less than 1k-ohms. Make the resis- Max. when ON.
tance between terminals for an open
circuit greater than 100k-ohms.

Operation
• PM4H-F8 (without reset input) • PM4H-F8R/F11R (with reset input)
Note: Note:
Tr Tr Ts Tr Ts

Power Power
supply supply
T
Time-delay Reset
contact N.O. input
T t
Time-delay Time-delay
contact N.C. contact N.O.

Time-delay
contact N.C.

t<T: Time setting

Tr: Minimum power supply application time
Note: Ts: Min. 2s (Time to restart operation after reset input is set
to OFF: both second type and minute type)

28
 PM4H-W
DIN48 SIZE
ANALOG MULTI-LANGE
CYCLIC TWIN TIMERS
PM4H-W

UL File No.: E122222

CSA File No.: LR39291
Features
1. A single twin timer unit that repeats (variable) ON/OFF.
48
1.890 2. Multiple ranges with a 0.1 s to 500 h time specification on a single unit.
3. The output ON/OFF operation is indicated by red and green LED’s.
It’s easy to check the operation at a glance.
4. The AC free power supply and shorter body make it easier to use.
48
62.5
2.461
5. A new screw terminal type has been added to the conventional pin type.
1.890
Wiring can be done easily with a screwdriver.
mm inch 6. Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD.

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Item Type PM4H-W
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240V AC, 48 to 125V DC, 12V DC, 24V AC/DC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common (AC operating type)
Approx. 10VA (100 to 240V AC)
Rated power consumption Approx. 2.5VA (24V AC)
Rating
Approx. 1.5W (12V DC, 24V DC, 48 to 125V DC)
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operation mode Cyclic (OFF-start/Twin operation)
Time range 1s to 500h 16 time ranges switchable (T1, T2 time setting individually)
Operation time fluctuation ±0.3% (power off time change at the range of 0.3s to 1h)
Time Setting error ±5% (Full-scale value)
accuracy
Note:) Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C +14 to 122°F)
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 2×107
Life 5
Electrical (contact) 10 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and metal parts
function
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 300ms
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Mechanical Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
function Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Operating Ambient humidity 30 to 85%RH (non-condensing)
condition Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC type) 20%
Protective construction IP65 on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC18002) <only for IP65 type>
Others
Weight 120g 4.233 oz (Pin type), 130g 4.586 oz (Screw terminal type)
Notes: 1) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% ripple
factor for DC), 20°C 68°F ambient temperature, and 1s power off time.
2) For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.
3) As internal components may become worn when using continuous conduction, the product should be replaced periodically.

29
PM4H-W
Time range
All types of PM4H-W timer have multi-time range.
16 time ranges are selectable.
1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled.
Time unit
sec min hrs 10h
Scale
1 0.1s to 1s 0.1 min to 1 min 0.1h to 1h 1.0h to 10h
5 Control 0.5s to 5s 0.5 min to 5 min 0.5h to 5h 5h to 50h
10 time range 1.0s to 10s 1.0 min to 10 min 1.0h to 10h 10h to 100h
50 5s to 50s 5 min to 50 min 5h to 50h 50h to 500h

Product types
Operating Protective Rated Operating Terminal
Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number
mode structure voltage type
8 pins PM4HW-H-AC240VW
100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-AC240VSW
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC125VW
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC125VSW
IP65
8 pins PM4HW-H-24VW
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-24VSW
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC12VW
Cyclic Relay 12V DC
PM4H-W 16 selectable ranges Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC12VSW
(OFF-start, Timed-out
Twin timer (1s to 500h) 8 pins PM4HW-H-AC240V
Twin) 2 Form C 100 to 240V AC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-AC240VS
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC125V
48 to 125V DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC125VS
IP50
8 pins PM4HW-H-24V
24V AC/DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-24VS
8 pins PM4HW-H-DC12V
12V DC
Screw terminal PM4HW-H-DC12VS

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

Pin Type Screw terminal type
Cyclic timed-out relay contact: 2C Cyclic timed-out relay contact: 2C

N.C. N.C.

N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. 6 7 8 9 10 N.C. N.O.

4 5
11
3 6
1 2 3 4 5
2 7
1 8
Operating
Operating voltage (+) voltage (–)
(–) (+)

Dimensions mm inch
Toletance: ±0.5 ±.020
• Screw terminal type: M3.5 • Pin type
6.0 6.0
48 17.0 .236 62.5 48 17.0 .236 66.5
1.890 .670 2.461 1.890 .670 2.618 14.5
.571
∅1.614
∅1.614

44.5
44.5
∅41
∅41

48 48
1.890 1.752 1.890
1.752

Operation
Power supply
T1 T2 T1
Time-delay contact
(N.O. contact)

Time-delay contact : Output OFF indicator (green)

(N.C. contact) : Output ON indicator (orange)
Output ON-OFF T1: OFF set time
indicator T2: ON set time

30
PM4H SERIES MODES AND TIME SETTING
1. Operation method
1) Operation mode setting
[PM4H-A type]
8 operation modes are selectable with
operation mode selector.
Turn the operation mode selector with
screw driver.
Operation mode is shown up through the
window above the mode selector. The
marks are ON , FL , FO , OF1 , SF , OS , OF2 , OC .
Turn the mode selector to the mark until
you can check by clicking sound.
Confirm the mode selector position if it is
correct.
If the position is not stable, the timer
might mis-operate.
2) Time range setting 3) Time setting [common]
[PM4H series common] To set the time, turn the set dial to a
16 time ranges are selectable between desired time within the range.
1s to 500h. Instantaneous output will be on when the
Turn the time range selector with the dial is set to “0”.
screw driver. When the instantaneous output is used,
Clockwise turning increases the time the dial should be set under “0” range.
range, and Counter-clockwise turning (Instantaneous output area)
decrease the time range. When power supply is on, the time
Confirm the range selector position if it is range, setting time and operation mode
correct. cannot be changed.
If the position is not stable, the timer Turn off the power supply or a reset sig-
might mis-operate. nal is applied to set the new operation
mode.
If the position is not stable, the timer
might mis-operate.

2. How to use “Set ring” [PM4H series common]

1) Fixed time setting 2) Time range setting
Set the desired time and put 2 set rings Example: Time range 20s to 30s.
together.
Shorter time value setting  Longer time value setting
Insert the rings into stopper to fix the Set the dial to 20s. Set the dial to 30s.
time. Place the stop ring at the right side of Place the stop ring at the left side of
Stopper Stopper boss stopper. stopper.
Set range

Shorter time value Longer time value

Stopper boss

Set ring (2 pcs) 20 Stop ring 30

ATC18001 (sold separately) Set dial

0 0
SEC SEC

Note) The stoppers for the lower limit setting set ring and the upper limit setting set ring face the opposite directions.

Applicable standard (PM4H series common)

Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category III
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

31
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE PM4H SERIES
1. Input connections (PM4H-A type) 3) Terminal - (screw terminal x-c) 3) Connection of non-contact input (Pin
1) Be sure not to use terminal  as the should be connected as the start input. type example)
common terminal of the input signal as Connect terminals - (screw terminal (voltage input)
shown in Fig. A. Otherwise, the internal x-v) for reset signal input. Connect ter-
circuit of the timer may be damaged. minals - (screw terminal x-b) for Internal circuit 1mA (The start input
is turned on.)
Use terminal  as the common terminal stop signal input. Be sure not to connect with photoelectric
5
6
7
sensor, etc.
as shown in Fig. B. with other terminals and apply excessive
Q
Contact input
voltage. The internal circuit will be dam- 2
Fig. A
(or non-contact aged. [Example of
6 input) start input]
5 7
4) The input wiring other than the power
No good supply circuit should avoid these condi- Even if the open collector is not used,
2 10
tions, high-voltage wiring and parallel input is also possible from the non-con-
Operating wiring with power wire. Wire in short with tact circuit of 6 to 30V DC. In this case,
voltage
using the shielding wire or metal wiring the start input is turned on when the sig-
Fig. B Contact input tube. nal is turned from H to L.
6
(or non-contact 5) For start, reset and stop input, use The residual voltage must be 0.6V or
5 7 input)
gold-plated contact with high reliability. less when Q is on. On the AC type, an
Good
2 10 Since contact bouncing causes errors in insulated transformer is required as the
the start, use an input contact less power supply for the photoelectric sen-
Operating
voltage bounce time. sor, etc. (power supply for the input
6) Keep the minimum signal input time devices).
If the circuits is connected as in Fig. C, over 0.05 s. Note: Keep the minimum input signal time of
the internal circuits must be broken. Be each signal to 0.05s or more.
sure to connect the circuit as in Fig. D. 2. Input signal conditions
(PM4H-A type) 3. Checking the contacts before use
Fig. C
10 1) Connection of contact input (Pin type (PM4H-F only)
6
T example When the power ON time is less than the
No good 2
minimum power application time, the
contacts may remain in an ON state, so
6
the state of the contacts should be
Reset input

5 7
Start input
Stop input

checked before use. When the contacts

2 are in an ON state, activating them once
Fig. D
10 will return them to their normal state (the
6
T Use gold-plated contacts with high-relia- OFF state after time-out). (Be aware that
Good 2
bility. The bounce time at the contacts relay characteristics may result in the
causes errors in the timer operation time. contacts being in that same ON state if
Accordingly, use start input contact exposed to excessive vibration and
whose bounce time is short. The resis- impact during transport.)
2) When one input signal is simultane- tance when shorted should be less than
ously applied to more than one timer, be 1kΩ, and when open resistance should 4. Time setting
sure to avoid the wiring shown in Fig. E. be more than 100kΩ. To set the time, turn the set dial to a
Otherwise, the short-circuit current will For the screw terminal type, connect the desired time within the range.
flow and cause damage. Be sure to align terminal x to the each input signal. Instantaneous output will be on when the
the polarity of the power supply as 2) Connection of non-contact input (Pin dial is set to “0”.
shown in Fig. F. type example) When the instantaneous output is used,
(open-collector) the dial should be set under “0” range.
Fig. E (Instantaneous output area)
Input Note) When power supply is on, the time
terminal
2 10
range, setting time and operation mode
Reset input

Power
Start input

6
Stop input

supply 5 7
No good
cannot be changed.
Input
terminal
Turn off the power supply or a reset sig-
2 10
2
nal is applied to set the new operation
mode.
Fig. F If the position is not stable, the timer
Contact or Apply the open-collector connection. The
non-contact input
characteristics of the transistor used might mis-operate.
Input

2
terminal
10
must be VCEO=10V or more, IC=10mA or
Power
supply more, and ICBO=6µA or less. Additionally,
Good
Input the input impedance must be 1kΩ or
terminal
2 10 less, and the residual voltage must be
0.6V or less.
For the screw terminal type, connect the
terminal x to the each input signal.

32

5. Superimposed surge of power
supply (PM4H series common)
For the superimposed surge of power
supply, the standard waveform is taken
as the standard value for surge-proof
voltage.
If external surge occurs exceeding the
specified value, the internal circuit may
break down. In this case, use a surge
absorption element.
Operation voltage Surge voltage
100 to 240V AC
100 to 120V AC 4,000V
200 to 240V AC
48 to 125V DC
12V DC, 24V DC 500V
24V AC/DC
The positive and negative voltages are
applied each five times between the
power pins.
The typical surge absorption elements
include a varistor, a capacitor, and a
diode. If a surge absorption element is
used, use an oscilloscope to see
whether or not the foreign surge exceed-
ing the specified value appears.
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE PM4H SERIES
6. Acquisition of CE marking 5) You must use a terminal socket or
Please abide by the conditions below socket for the installation. Do not touch
when using in applications that comply the terminals or other parts of the timer
with EN61812-1. when it is powered. When installing or
1) Overvoltage category III, pollution un-installing, make sure that no voltage
level 2 is being applied to any of the terminals.
2) This timer employs a power supply 6) Do not use this timer as a safety cir-
without a transformer, so the power and cuit. For example when using a timer in a
input signal terminals are not insulated. heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
(PM4H-A only) circuit on the machine side.
(1) When a sensor is connected to the
input circuit, install double insulation on
the sensor side.
(2) In the case of contact input, use dual-
insulated relays, etc.
3) The load connected to the output con-
tact should have basic insulation.
This timer is protected with basic insula-
tion and can be double-insulated to meet
EN/IEC requirements by using basic
insulation on the load.
4) Please use a power supply that is pro-
tected by an overcurrent protection
device which complies with the EN/IEC
standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, etc.).
33
 DIN 48 SIZE LT4H/-L
DIGITAL TIMER
Timers
LT4H Timers UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features
1. Bright and Easy-to-Read Display 5. Screw terminal (M3.5) and Pin
A brand new bright 2-color back light Types are Both Standard Options
LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in The two terminal types are standard
48
1.890 any location makes checking and setting options to support either front panel
procedures a cinch. installation or embedded installation.
2. Simple Operation 6. Changeable Panel Cover
Seesaw buttons make operating the unit Also offers a black panel cover to meet
64.5
48 2.539 even easier than before. your design considerations.
1.890
mm inch 3. Short Body of only 64.5 mm 2.539 7. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
inch (screw terminal type) or 70.1 mm
2.760 inch (pin type)
With a short body, it is easy to install in
even narrow control panels.
4. Conforms to IP66’s Weather
Pin type Screw terminal type Resistant Standards
The water-proof panel keeps out water
and dirt for reliable operation even in
RoHS Directive compatibility information poor environments.
http://www.nais-e.com/

Product types
Time range Operating mode Output Operating voltage Power down insurance Terminal type Part number
8 pins LT4H8-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4H-AC240V
Screw terminal LT4H-AC240VS
8 pins LT4H8-AC24V
Relay
24 V AC 11 pins LT4H-AC24V
(1 c)
Screw terminal LT4H-AC24VS
Power ON delay (1) 8 pins LT4H8-DC24V
9.999 s (0.001 s~)
Power ON delay (2)
99.99 s (0.01 s~) 12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4H-DC24V
Signal ON delay
999.9 s (0.1 s~)
Signal OFF delay Screw terminal LT4H-DC24VS
9999 s (1 s~)
Pulse One-shot Available
99 min 59 s (1 s~) 8 pins LT4HT8-AC240V
Pulse ON-delay
999.9 min (0.1 min~)
Signal Flicker 100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4HT-AC240V
99 h 59 min (1 min~)
Totalizing ON-delay
999.9 h (0.1 h~) Screw terminal LT4HT-AC240VS
(8 modes)
8 pins LT4HT8-AC24V
Transistor
24 V AC 11 pins LT4HT-AC24V
(1 a)
Screw terminal LT4HT-AC24VS
8 pins LT4HT8-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4HT-DC24V
Screw terminal LT4HT-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.

34
 LT4H/-L
LT4H-L Timers UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features
1. Economically priced in anticipation 4. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
of market needs.
• Economically priced to provide
excellent cost performance.
2. Display is a bright reflective-type
48
1.890 LCD.
3. Inherits all of the characteristics of
the LT4H digital timer.
• Seesaw switches ensure easy
64.5
48 2.539 operation.
1.890
mm inch • IP66 environmental protection.
• Shortened body (70.1 mm 2.760 inch
underhead).

Product types
Power down
Product name Time range Operating mode Output Operating voltage Terminal type Part number
insurance
Power ON delay (1) 100 to 240 V AC LT4HL8-AC240V
9.999 s (0.001 s~)
Power ON delay (2) Relay
99.99 s (0.01 s~) 24 V AC/DC LT4HL8-AC24V
Signal ON delay (1 c)
999.9 s (0.1 s~)
Signal OFF delay 12 to 24 V DC LT4HL8-DC24V
LT4H-L 9999 s (1 s~)
Pulse One-shot Available 8 pins
digital timer 99 min 59 s (1 s~) 100 to 240 V AC LT4HLT8-AC240V
Pulse ON-delay
999.9 min (0.1 min~)
Signal Flicker Transistor
99 h 59 min (1 min~) 24 V AC/DC LT4HLT8-AC24V
Totalizing ON-delay (1 a)
999.9 h (0.1 h~)
(8 modes) 12 to 24 V DC LT4HLT8-DC24V

Part names
Time delay indicator (Countdown time display) DIP switches
TIMER
Elapsed time display

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Controlled output indicator

Set time display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK h m s

Lock indicator Time units display

UP
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch LOCK
Down keys
Lock switch LT4H DOWN
(Same for screw terminal type and 8-pin type)

35
LT4H/-L
Specifications
Type Ralay output type Transistor output type
Item AC type AC/DC type DC type AC type AC/DC type DC type
100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC, 100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC,
Rated operating voltage 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC
24 V AC/DC 24 V AC/DC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common — 50/60 Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A, 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA, 30 V DC
Time range 9.999 s, 99.99 s, 999.9 s, 9999 s, 99 min 59 s, 999.9 min, 99 h 59 min, 999.9 h (selected by DIP switch)
Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)
Time counting direction
(2 directions selectable by DIP switch)
Rating A (Power ON delay 1), A2 (Power ON delay 2), B (Signal ON delay), C (Signal OFF delay), D (Pulse one-shot),
Operation mode
E (Pulse ON delay), F (Signal Flicker), G (Totalizing ON delay) (selectable by DIP switch)
Start/Reset/Stop input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (2 directions by selected by DIP switch) (The 8-pin type does not have a stop input.)
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms (The 8-pin type does not have a lock input.)
Open collector input Input impedance: Max. 1 kΩ; Residual voltage: Max. 2 V
Input signal
Open impedance: 100kΩ or less, Max. energized voltage: 40V DC
Indication 7-segment LCD (LT4H, LT4H-L common), Elapsed value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
Power failure memory
EEP-ROM (Min. 105 overwriting)
method
Operating time fluctuation
Time
accuracy
(max.)
Temperature error
Voltage error
Setting error
± (0.005 % + 50 ms) in case of power on start
± (0.005 % + 20 ms) in case of input signal start [ Operating voltage: 85 to 110%
Temperature: –10 to +55°C +14 to +131°F
Min. input signal width: 1ms
]
Contact arrangement Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) 100 mΩ (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flash —
Mechanical (contact) Min. 2 × 107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts) —
Life
Electrical (contact) 1.0 × 10 ope. (At rated control voltage)
5
Min. 10 ope. (At rated control voltage)
7

Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage

2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (11-pin)
Breakdown voltage 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (Pin type)
2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
(Initial value) 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
1,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between contacts
Between live and dead metal parts Min. 100 MΩ: Between live and dead metal parts
Insulation resistance (At 500V DC)
Electrical Min. 100 MΩ: Between input and output (At 500V DC) Between input and output
(Initial value)
Between contacts
Operating voltage reset
Max. 0.5 s
time
Max. 65° C
Temperature rise —
(under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min single amplitude of 0.35 mm .014 inch (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min single amplitude of 0.75 mm .030 inch (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m 321.522 ft./s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m 964.567 ft./s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C +14° F to +131° F
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less — 20 % or less
Connection 8-pin/11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with rubber gasket)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

36
 LT4H/-L
Dimensions (units: mm inch)
Tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
• LT4H digital timer
Screw terminal type Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)

48 5.5 64.5 5.5 55.6 14.5

1.890 .217 2.539 .217 2.189 .571

TIMER

OP.
RST
44.5
44.5
LOCK h m s
1.752
1.752
RESET UP

LOCK

LT4H DOWN

7.5 7.5
.295 .295

• Dimensions for embedded installation (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Rubber gasket Panel Mounting frame Rubber gasket Panel Mounting frame 8-pin type
for flush mount for flush mount (8p cap AD8-RC
ATC18002 (supplied) ATC18002 (supplied)
AT8-DA4 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied) sold separately)
11-pin type
TIMER TIMER (11p cap AT8-DP11
sold separately)

OP. OP.
48 RST 50 66
44.5 48 RST 50 66
1.890 LOCK h m s 1.969 2.598
1.752 1.890 LOCK h m s 1.969 2.598
RESET UP RESET UP

LOCK LOCK

LT4H DOWN LT4H DOWN

48 1 63.5 48 1 90
1.890 .039 2.500 1.890 .039 3.543

• Dimensions for front panel installations • Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
DIN rail terminal block below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and rub-
45+0.6
0
(8-pin type AT8-DF8K ber gasket (ATC18002). 1.772+.024
0
sold separately)
(11-pin type AT8-DF11K 80 min.
sold separately) 3.150
45+0.6
0 1.772+.024
0 A
+0.6
A = (48 × n – 2.5) 0
+0.6
Device installation rail 45 0
+.024
AT8-DLA1 1.772 0

(sold separately) Note) 1: The installation panel thickness should be between 1

80 min.
3.150 and 5 mm .039 and .197 inch.
95.5
(90.0) Note) 2: For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
3.760 between the unit and installation panel is lost.
(3.543) ( ) dimension is for 8-pin type.

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

• 8-pin type • 11-pin type
Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
N.C. Reset Reset
Start
Start Start N.C. Start
N.O.
Stop Stop
Reset 4 5 Reset 4 5 5 6 7 N.O. 5 6 7
6 Lock Lock
3 6 3 4 8 4 8
3 9 3 9
2 7 2 7 2 10 2 10
1 8 1 8 1 11 1 11
Operating Operating Operating Operating
– voltage + – voltage + –
– voltage + voltage +

• Screw terminal type

Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Start Start
Stop Stop
Lock N.O. Lock
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
N.C.

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to
Operating Operating 5) Transistor output on page 48.
+ voltage – + voltage –

37
LT4H/-L
Setting the operation mode, time range, and time
Setting procedure 1) Setting the operation mode and time range
Set the operation mode and time range with the DIP switches on the side of the LT4H timer.
DIP switches Table 1: Setting the operation mode
DIP switch DIP switch No.
Item Operation mode
OFF ON 1 2 3
1 ON ON ON A: Power on delay 1
2 Operation mode Refer to table 1 OFF OFF OFF A2: Power on delay 2
3 ON OFF OFF B: Signal on delay
Minimum input reset, start, and OFF ON OFF C: Signal off delay
*4 20 ms 1 ms
stop signal width ON ON OFF D: Pulse One shot
5 Time delay direction Addition Subtraction OFF OFF ON E: Pulse On delay
6 ON OFF ON F: Signal Flicker
7 Time range Refer to table 2 OFF ON ON G: Totalizing On delay
8
* The 8-pin type does not have the stop input, so that the dip
Table 2: Setting the time range
switch can be changed over between reset and start inputs. DIP switch No.
Time range
The signal range of the lock input is fixed (minimum 20 ms). 6 7 8
ON ON ON 0.001 s to 9.999 s
DIP switches OFF OFF OFF 0.01 s to 99.99 s
ON OFF OFF 0.1 s to 999.9 s
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF ON OFF 1 s to 9999 s

ON ON OFF 0 min 01 s to 99 min 59 s
OFF OFF ON 0.1 min to 999.9 min
ON OFF ON 0 h 01 min to 99 h 59 min
OFF ON ON 0.1 h to 999.9 h
(Same for screw terminal type) Notes: 1) Set the DIP switches before installing the timer.
2) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
3) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.

Setting procedure 2) Setting the time

Set the set time with the keys (UP and DOWN keys) on the front of the LT4H timer.
Front display section
Q Elapsed time display 3 I UP keys
W Set time display TIMER Changes the corresponding digit of the
1
E Time delay indicator set time in the addition direction
4 2
R Controlled output indicator (upwards)
OP.
T Reset indicator 5 RST O DOWN keys
LOCK h m s
Y Lock indicator Changes the corresponding digit of the
6 7
UP set time in the subtraction direction
U Time units display 10
RESET
8
LOCK
(downwards)
11 9 P RESET switch
LT4H DOWN
Resets the elapsed time and the output
{ LOCK switch
Locks the operation of all keys on the unit
• Changing the set time
1. It is possible to change the set time is changed to a time above the elapsed delay 2), the output will turn on when the
with the up and down keys even dur- time, the time delay will continue until the power supply is turned on. However, the
ing time delay with the timer. elapsed time reaches the new set time. output will be off while reset is being
However, be aware of the following 2) If the time delay is set to the subtrac- input.
points. tion direction, time delay will continue 2) In the other modes, the output turns
1) If the set time is changed to less than until “0” regardless of the new set time. on when the start is input. When the
the elapsed time with the time delay set 2. If the set time is changed to “0,” the operation mode is C (signal off delay), D
to the addition direction, time delay will unit will operate differently depending (Pulse one shot), or F (Signal flicker),
continue until the elapsed time reaches on the operation mode. only when the start input is on does the
full scale, returns to zero, and then 1) If the operation mode is set to A output turn on. Also, when the reset is
reaches the new set time. If the set time (power on delay 1) or A2 (power on being input, the output is off.
• Power failure memory
The EEPROM is used for power failure memory. It has a life of Min. 105 over-writings.
The EEPROM is overwriting with the following timing.
Output mode Overwrite timing
Power ON delay (2) A2 When power is OFF
Addition G Change of preset value or start, reset input
When power is OFF after being ON
Other modes When power is OFF after changing preset value
* Be aware that the contents of EEPROM for all modes will be overwritten when power is turned OFF during input to external lock terminals R to E and 7 to 6 .
Such an action does not exist by doing lock operation from the front.

38
 LT4H/-L
Operation mode T: Set time t1, t2, t3, ta<T

Operation type Explanation Time chart

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3
section of the DIP switches
ON ON ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value and starts time
ON
delay at power ON. Power supply OFF

• After timer completion, stops at the display of ON

T t1 t2 t1+t2=T

Power on delay (1) the set value (addition), or stops at “0” (sub- Output OFF

traction).
A • Ignores start input.
Reset
ON
OFF

• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. Stop

ON
OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF OFF OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Elapsed time value does not clear at power
ON
ON. (power outage countermeasure func- Power supply OFF

tion) ON
T t1 t2 t1+t2=T

Power on delay (2) • The output remains ON even after the power Output OFF

is cut and restarted.

A2 • After timer completion, stops at the display of
Reset
ON
OFF

the set value (addition), or stops at “0” (sub- Stop

ON
OFF
traction).
• Ignores start input.
• Stops delay time operation at stop ON.
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
ON OFF OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. Power supply
ON
OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON and elapsed T t1 t2 t1+t2=T
ON
time value or output resets at start OFF. Output OFF

Signal on delay • Instantaneous time delay start at reset OFF ON

and power ON while start is ON. Reset OFF

B • Stops delay time operation at stop ON. ON

Stop OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.
ON
• In order to have the time delay start at power Start OFF

ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start

input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF ON OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the ON
side of the timer as shown. Power supply OFF
T>ta+tb T>t
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. Output
ON
OFF

Signal off delay • Output control ON at start ON and time delay T ta tb t

ON
start at start OFF. Reset OFF

C • Elapsed time value clears when start goes ON Stop

ON
OFF
again during time delay. ON
Start
• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. OFF

Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

Notes: 1) Each signal input (start, reset, stop, and lock) is applied by shorting their input terminal to the common terminal (terminal Q for the 8-pin type, terminal E for
the 11-pin type, and terminal 6 for the screw terminal type).
2) The 8-pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.

39
LT4H/-L
T: Set time t1, t2, t3, ta<T

Operation type Explanation Time chart

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3
section of the DIP switches
ON ON OFF
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. Power supply
ON
OFF
• Time delay starts and output control ON at T>ta T=t1+t2
ON
start ON. Output OFF
T ta T t1 t2 t
Pulse One-shot • Turns output control OFF and clears elapsed Reset
ON
OFF
time value at time-up.
D • Ignores start input during time delay.
Stop
ON
OFF

ON
• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. Start OFF

Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.

• In order to have the time delay start at power
ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start
input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF OFF ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. ON
Power supply OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON. T=t1+t2
• Ignores start input during time delay. Output
ON
OFF

Pulse On delay • Stops delay time operation at stop ON. ON

T t1 t2 T T
Reset OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.
E • In order to have the time delay start at power Stop
ON
OFF

ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start Start

ON
OFF
input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
ON OFF ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the
side of the timer as shown.
• Clears elapsed time value at power ON. ON
Power supply OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON. T=t1+t2 T>ta T=t1+t2
• Ignores start input during time delay. Output
ON
OFF

Signal Flicker • Output control reverses, elapsed time value ON

T T t1 t2 ta T t1 t2
Reset OFF
clears, and timer delay starts at timer comple-
F tion. Stop
ON
OFF

• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. Start

ON
OFF
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF.
• In order to have the time delay start at power
ON or reset at power OFF, short out the start
input beforehand.

• Set the operation mode 1 2 3

section of the DIP switches
OFF ON ON
(no.’s 1, 2, and 3) on the ON
side of the timer as shown. Power supply OFF

T=t1+t2+t3 T>ta
• Elapsed time value does not clear at power Output
ON
OFF

Totalizing On delay ON. (power outage countermeasure function) T t1 t2 t3 ta

ON
• The output remains ON even after the power Reset OFF

G is off and restarted. Stop

ON
OFF
• Stops delay time operation at stop ON. ON
Start
Restarts delay time operation at stop OFF. OFF

Notes: 1) Each signal input (start, reset, stop, and lock) is applied by shorting their input terminal to the common terminal (terminal Q for the 8-pin type, terminal E for
the 11-pin type, and terminal 6 for the screw terminal type).
2) The 8-pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.

40
 LT4H-W

DIN 48 SIZE LT4H-W

DIGITAL TIMER
Timers
UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features
1. Wide time range 5. Conforms to IP66’s Weather
The operation time range covers from Resistant Standards
0.01 sec. to 9999 hours. The water-proof panel keeps out water
48 The individual setting can be performed and dirt for reliable operation even in
1.890
on each of 1 and 2 timers. poor environments.
99.99s 99min59s 99h59min 6. Screw terminal (M3.5) and Pin
999.9s 999.9min 999.9h Types are Both Standard Options
64.5 9999s 9999h The two terminal types are standard
48 2.539
1.890 2. Bright and Easy-to-Read Display options to support either front panel
mm inch A brand new bright 2-color back light installation or embedded installation.
LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in 7. Changeable Panel Cover
any location makes checking and setting Also offers a black panel cover to meet
procedures a cinch. your design considerations.
3. Simple Operation 8. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
Seesaw buttons make operating the unit 9. Low Price
even easier than before. All this at an affordable price to provide
8-pin type 11-pin type Screw terminal 4. Short Body of only 64.5 mm 2.539 you with unmatched cost performance.
type inch (screw terminal type) or 70.1 mm
2.760 inch (pin type)
With a short body, it is easy to install in
RoHS Directive compatibility information even narrow control panels.
http://www.nais-e.com/

Product types
Time range Operating mode Output Operating voltage Power down insurance Terminal type Part number
8 pins LT4HW8-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4HW-AC240V
Screw terminal LT4HW-AC240VS
8 pins LT4HW8-AC24V
Relay
24 V AC 11 pins LT4HW-AC24V
(1 c)
Screw terminal LT4HW-AC24VS
Pulse input: 8 pins LT4HW8-DC24V
99.99s
• Delayed one shot
999.9s 12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4HW-DC24V
• OFF-start flicker
9999s
• ON-start flicker Screw terminal LT4HW-DC24VS
99min59s
Available
999.9min 8 pins LT4HWT8-AC240V
Integrating input:
99h59min
• Delayed one shot 100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LT4HWT-AC240V
999.9h
• OFF-start flicker
9999h Screw terminal LT4HWT-AC240VS
• ON-start flicker
8 pins LT4HWT8-AC24V
Transistor
24 V AC 11 pins LT4HWT-AC24V
(1 a)
Screw terminal LT4HWT-AC24VS
8 pins LT4HWT8-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LT4HWT-DC24V
Screw terminal LT4HWT-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.

41
LT4H-W
Part names
T1/T2 Operation display
(Subtraction elapsed DIP switches
TIMER time display)

Display for change-over Elapsed time display

T1

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

between T1/T2 settings T2

T1 Set time display
Controlled output indicator OP. T2
LOCK h m s

Lock indicator UP
Time units display
RESET
Reset switch Up keys
SET/LOCK
Set/Lock switch Down keys
LT4H-W DOWN

Fourth digit First digit (Same for 8-pin and screw terminal type)

Specifications
Type Ralay output type Transistor output type
Item AC type DC type AC type DC type
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC 12 to 24 V DC 100 to 240V AC, 24V AC 12 to 24 V DC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common — 50/60 Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A, 250 V AC 100 mA, 30 V DC
Time range 99.99s, 999.9s, 9999s, 99min59s, 999.9min, 99h59min, 999.9h, 9999h (selected by DIP switch)
Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)
Time counting direction
(2 directions selectable by DIP switch)
Rating Pulse input: Delayed one shot, OFF-start flicker or ON-start flicker
Operation mode
Integrating input: Delayed one shot, OFF-start flicker or ON-start flicker
Start/Reset/Stop input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (2 directions by selected by DIP switch) (The 8 pin type does not have a stop input.)
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms (The 8-pin type does not have a lock input.)
Open collector input Input impedance: Max. 1 kΩ; Residual voltage: Max. 2V
Input signal
Open impedance: 100 kΩ or less, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Indication 7-segment LCD, Elapsed value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
Power failure memory
EEP-ROM (Min. 105 overwriting)
method
Operating time fluctuation
Time
accuracy
(max.)
Temperature error
Voltage error
Setting error
± (0.005% + 50 ms) in case of power on start
± (0.005% + 20 ms) in case of input signal start [ Operating voltage: 85% to 110%
Temperature: –10°C to +55°C +14°F to +131°F
Min. input signal width: 1ms ]
Contact arrangement Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Contact resistance (Initial value) 100 mΩ (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flash —
Mechanical (contact) Min. 2 × 107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts) —
Life
Electrical (contact) Min. 10 ope. (At rated control voltage)
5
Min. 10 ope. (At rated control voltage)
7

Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage

2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (11-pin type only)
Breakdown voltage 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between live and dead metal parts (Pin type only)
2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
(Initial value) 2,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between input and output
1,000 Vrms for 1 min: Between contacts
Between live and dead metal parts Min. 100 MΩ: Between live and dead metal parts
Insulation resistance (At 500V DC)
Electrical Min. 100 MΩ: Between input and output (At 500V DC) Between input and output
(Initial value)
Between contacts
Operating voltage reset
Max. 0.5 s
time
Max 65° C
Temperature rise —
(under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/ min single amplitude of 0.35 mm .014 inch (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/ min single amplitude of 0.75 mm .030 inch (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m 321.522 ft./s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m 964.567 ft./s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C +14° F to +131° F
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less — 20 % or less
Connection 8-pin/11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with rubber gasket)

42
 LT4H-W
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions (units: mm inch)

Tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
• LT4H-W digital timer
Screw terminal type Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
48 5.5 64.5 5.5 55.6 14.5
1.890 .217 2.539 .217 2.189 .571

TIMER

T1
T2

T1
OP. T2 44.5 44.5
LOCK h m s 1.752 1.752

RESET UP

SET/LOCK

LT4H-W DOWN

7.5 7.5
.295 .295
(Same for 8-pin type)

• Dimensions for flush mount (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Panel Mounting frame Panel Mounting frame
Rubber gasket for flush mount Rubber gasket for flush mount 8-pin type
ATC18002 (supplied) (8p cap AD8-RC
ATC18002 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied) sold separately)
11-pin type
TIMER TIMER (11p cap AT8-DP11
T1 T1
sold separately)
T2 T2

T1 T1
48 OP. T2 50 44.5 48 OP. T2 50
1.890 1.969 66 1.890 1.969 66
LOCK h m s
2.598 1.752 LOCK h m s
2.598
RESET UP RESET UP

SET/LOCK SET/LOCK

LT4H-W DOWN LT4H-W DOWN

48 1 63.5 48 1 90
1.890 2.500 1.890 3.543

• Dimensions for front panel installations • Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and rub-
DIN rail terminal block +0.6
ber gasket (ATC18002). 45 0
(8-pin type AT8-DF8K +.024
1.772 0
sold separately) 80min.
(11-pin type AT8-DF11K 3.150min.
+0.6
sold separately) 45 0
+.024
1.772 0 A
Device installation rail
AT8-DLA1 +0.6
45 0 When n timers are continuously installed, the dimension
+.024 (A) is calculated according to the following formula (n:
(sold separately) 1.772 0
the number of the timers to be installed):
A=(48 × n – 2.5) 0 A=(1.890 × n – .098) 0
+0.6 +.024

95.5 80min.
(90.0) 3.150min.
3.760 Note) 1: The installation panel thickness should be between 1
(3.543) and 5 mm .039 and .197 inch.
( ) dimension is for 8-pin type.
Note) 2: For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
between the unit and installation panel is lost.

43
LT4H-W
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams
• 8-Pin type • 11-Pin type
Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
N.C. Start Reset Reset
Start
Reset Start N.C. Start
Reset 4 5
N.O. 4 5 Stop Stop
3 6 5 6 7 N.O. 5 6 7
3 6 Lock 4 8
Lock 4 8
7 2 7 3 9 3 9
2
1 8 1 8 2 10 2 10
1 11 1 11
Operating Operating
(–) voltage (+) Operating Operating
(–) voltage (+) – –
voltage + voltage +

• Screw terminal type

Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Start Start
Stop Stop
Lock N.O. Lock
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
N.C.

1 2 3 4 5
Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to
1 2 3 4 5
5) Transistor output on page 48.
Operating Operating
+ voltage – + voltage –

44
 LT4H-W
Setting the operation mode and time range
Setting procedure 1) Setting the time range (Timer T1/Timer T2)
Set the time range with the DIP switches on the side of the LT4H-W timer.
DIP switch Table 1: Setting the time range (Timer T1)
Item
OFF ON DIP switch No.
1 Time range
1 2 3
Time range
2 Refer to table 1 ON ON ON 0.01 s to 99.99 s
(Timer T1)
3 OFF OFF OFF 0.1 s to 999.9 s
Minimum input reset, start, and ON OFF OFF 1 s to 9999 s
*4 20 ms 1 ms
stop signal width OFF ON OFF 0 min 01 s to 99 min 59 s
5 Time delay direction Addition Subtraction ON ON OFF 0.1 min to 999.9 min
6 OFF OFF ON 0 h 01 min to 99 h 59 min
Time range
7 Refer to table 2 ON OFF ON 0.1 h to 999.9 h
(Timer T2)
8 OFF ON ON 1 h to 9999 h
* The 8-pin type does not have the stop input, so that the dip
switch can be changed over between reset and start inputs. Table 2: Setting the time range (Timer T2)
The signal range of the lock input is fixed (minimum 20 ms). DIP switch No.
Time range
6 7 8
DIP switches ON ON ON 0.01 s to 99.99 s
OFF OFF OFF 0.1 s to 999.9 s
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON OFF OFF 1 s to 9999 s

OFF ON OFF 0 min 01 s to 99 min 59 s
ON ON OFF 0.1 min to 999.9 min
OFF OFF ON 0 h 01 min to 99 h 59 min
ON OFF ON 0.1 h to 999.9 h
OFF ON ON 1 h to 9999 h
(same for screw terminal type and 8-pin type.) Notes: 1) Set the DIP switches before installing the timer.
2) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Setting procedure 2) Setting the operation mode 3) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.
Set the operation mode with the keys on the front of the LT4H-W timer.
Front display section
Q Elapsed time display I UP keys
3 TIMER
W Set time display Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the addition direc-
1
E T1/T2 operation indicator T1 tion (upwards)
R T1/T2 setting value 4 T2 2 O DOWN keys
selectable indicator 5
T1
OP. T2 Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the subtraction
T Controlled output LOCK h m s direction (downwards)
indicator 6 UP
7 P RESET switch
RESET
Y Lock indicator 10 8 Resets the elapsed time and the output
U Time units display 11
SET/LOCK
{ SET/LOCK switch
9
LT4H-W DOWN Changes over the display between T1/T2 settings, sets the operation
mode, checks the operation mode and locks the operation of each key
Fourth digit First digit
(such as up, down or reset key).

1) Setting or changing the operation mode Ex: Setting operation mode display
(1) When the UP or DOWN key at the first digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK (PULSE-A example)
switch pressed, the mode is changed over to the setting mode.
(2) Now release the SET/LOCK switch.
(3) The operation mode in the setting mode is changed over sequentially in the left or right direction by pressing the UP or DOWN key at the first digit, respectively.

Pulse input Pulse input Pulse input Integrating input Integrating input Integrating input
OFF-start OFF-start ON-start OFF-start OFF-start ON-start
One operation Repeating operation Repeating operation One operation Repeating operation Repeating operation
(4) The operational mode displayed at present is set by pressing the RESET switch, and the display returns to the normal condition.
2) Setting (changing) the time
(1) Pressing the SET/LOCK key switches the set value display between T1 and T2. Display the timer (T1 or T2) which is to be set (or changed).
(2) After displaying the timer (T1 or T2) which is to be set, press the UP or DOWN key to change the time.
• Checking the operation mode
When the UP or DOWN key at the second digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK switch pressed, the operational mode can be checked.
The display returns to the normal condition after indicating the operational mode for about two seconds. (While the display indicates the operational mode for about two
seconds, the other indicators continue to operate normally.)
• Setting the lock
When the UP or DOWN key at the fourth digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK switch pressed, all keys on the unit are locked.
The timer does not accept any of UP, DOWN and RESET keys.
To release the lock setting, press the UP or DOWN key at the fourth digit again with the set/lock switch pressed.
* Operational mode, adding and subtracting and minimum input signal range cannot be set at T1 and T2, respectively.
• Changing over the T1/T2 setting display
The T1/T2 setting display is changed over by pressing the SET/LOCK switch. (This operation gives no effect on the other operations. The set time and elapsed time
(residual time) at T1 are linked with those at T2.)
• Changing the set time
1) It is possible to change the set time with the UP and DOWN keys even during time delay with the timer. However, be aware of the following points.
(1) If the set time is changed to less than the elapsed time with the time delay set to the addition direction, time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches full
scale, returns to zero, and then reaches the new set time. If the set time is changed to a time above the elapsed time, the time delay will continue until the elapsed
time reaches the new set time.
(2) If the time delay is set to the subtraction direction, time delay will continue until “0” regardless of the new set time.
2) When the set times at T1 and T2 are set to 0, the output becomes ON only while the start input is carried out. However, while the reset input is carried out, the output
becomes OFF.
45
LT4H-W
OPERATION MODE
PULSE : Pulse input INTEGRATION : Integrating input

PULSE A OFF-start/1 operation t1<T1, t2<T2 INTEGRATION A OFF-start/1 operation t1<T1, t2<T2

Power ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 te+tf=T1 tg+th=T2

Power
supply supply

Output Output
A T1 T2 ta tb tc td t1 T1 t2 ta tb tc td te tf tg th t1 T1 t2

Delayed Stop Stop

one shot Reset Reset

Start Start

• Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. • Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function).
• Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval • When power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous
is in progress. to power going off.
• Elapsed value cleared when one operation has been completed. • Elapsed value cleared when one operation has been completed.

PULSE B OFF-start/repeating operation t1<T1, t2<T2 INTEGRATION B OFF-start/repeating operation t1<T1, t2<T2

ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 Power ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 te+tf=T1 tg+th=T2

Power
supply supply

Output
B Output
T1 T2 T1 T2 ta tb tc td t1 T1 t2 ta tb tc td te tf tg th T1 T2 t1 T1 t2

OFF-start Stop Stop

flicker Reset Reset

Start Start

• Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. • Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function).
• Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval • When power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous
is in progress. to power going off.

PULSE C ON-start/repeating operation t1<T1, t2<T2 INTEGRATION C ON-start/repeating operation t1<T1, t2<T2

Power ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 ta+tb=T1 tc+td=T2 te+tf=T1 tg+th=T2

Power
supply supply

Output Output
C T1 T2 T1 T2 ta tb tc td t1 T1 t2 ta tb tc td te tf tg th T1 T2 t1 T1 t2
Stop Stop
ON-start flicker
Reset Reset

Start Start

• Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. • Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function).
• Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval • When power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous
is in progress. to power going off.

• The pulse input mode starts the operation by starting the • The integrating input mode is operated by the integrated
start input. time of the start input. In other word, the timer operates only
• When using the unit by starting it with the power on, short- when the start input is performed.
circuit the start terminal (8-pin: Q to R, 11-pin: E to Y and • When the elapsed value is cleared by the reset input, the
screw terminal: 6 to 9 ). output is reset.
Remarks • When using the unit by starting it with the power on, short-
and notes circuit the start terminal (8-pin: Q to R, 11-pin: E to Y and
screw terminal: 6 to 9 ).

• Each signal input such as start, reset, stop and lock inputs is applied by short-circuiting its input terminal and common terminal
(8-pin type: terminal Q, 11-pin type: terminal E and screw terminal: terminal 6 ) respectively.
• The 8-pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.

46
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LT4H SERIES
1. Terminal wiring If independent power circuitry must be Reset input
1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the used, keep the input contacts or transis- Start input
Stop input
terminal layout and wiring diagrams and tors separate from each other, as shown
Lock
be sure to perform the wiring properly in Fig. B. input
without errors.
(Fig. B)
2) When using the instrument with an Input contact 8-pin type 1 — — 4 3
flush mounting, the screw-down terminal point or transistor
11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
type is recommended. For the pin type, Input Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
terminal
use either the rear terminal block 3

(AT78041) or the 8P cap (AD8-RC) for 2 10 Power * The short-circuit impedance should be
the 8-pin type, and the rear terminal supply less than 1 kΩ.
Input contact
block (AT78051) or the 11P cap (AT8- point or transistor
DP11) for the 11-pin type. Avoid solder- [When the impedance is 0 Ω, the current
Input
ing directly to the round pins on the unit. 3
terminal coming from the start input and stop
When using the instrument with a front 2 10 input terminals is approximately 12 mA,
panel installation, use the DIN rail termi- and from the reset input and lock input
nal block (AT8-DF8K) for the 8-pin type When power circuitry is not independent, terminals is approximately 1.5 mA.]
and the DIN rail terminal block (AT8- one input signal can be fed to two or
DF11K) for the 11-pin type. more counters at once, as shown in Fig. Also, the open-circuit impedance should
3) After turning the unit off, make sure C. be more than 100 kΩ.
that any resulting induced voltage or
residual voltage is not applied to power (Fig. C) * As shown in the diagram below, from a
Input contact
supply terminals W through U (8-pin point or transistor non-contact point circuit (proximity
type) W through P (11-pin type) or 1 switches, photoelectric switches, etc.)
Input
and 2 (screw terminal type). (If the 3
terminal with a power supply voltage of between
power supply wire is wired parallel to the 2 10 Power 12 and 40 V, the signal can be input
high voltage wire or power wire, an supply without using an open collector transis-
induced voltage may be generated tor. In the case of the diagram below,
between the power supply terminals.) when the non-contact point transistor Q
Input
4) Have the power supply voltage pass 3
terminal switches from off to on (when the signal
through a switch or relay so that it is 2 10 voltage goes from high to low), the sig-
applied at one time. If the power supply nal is input.
is applied gradually, the counting may
3. Input and output 12 to 40V DC
malfunction regardless of the settings,
1) Signal input type
the power supply reset may not function,
(1) Contact point input Reset input
or other such unpredictable occurrence
Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. Q
may result.
Since the contact point’s bounce time
2. Input connections
leads directly to error in the timer opera- 8-pin type 1 — — 4 3
The power circuit has no transformer
tions, use contacts with as short a 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
(power and input terminals are not insu-
bounce time as possible. Also, select a Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
lated). When an input signal is fed to two
minimum input signal width of 20 ms. (The above example is for reset input)
or more timers at once, do not arrange
the power circuit in an independent way. Reset input 2) The input mode and output mode
If the timer is powered on and off inde- Start input change depending on the DIP switch set-
Stop input tings. Therefore, before making any con-
pendently as shown in Fig. A, the timer's
Lock
internal circuitry may get damaged.Be input nections, be sure to confirm the opera-
careful never to allow such circuitry. tion mode and operation conditions cur-
(Figs. A, B and C show the circuitry for rently set.
8-pin type 1 — — 4 3
the 11-pin type.) 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
3) The LT4H series use power supply
Screw terminal type
without a transformer (power and input
(Fig. A) 6 7 8 9 10
Input contact terminals are not insulated). In connect-
point or transistor
(2) Non-contact point input ing various kinds of input signals, there-
Input Connect with an open collector. Use fore, use a power transformer in which
terminal
3
transistors whose characteristics satisfy the primary side is separated from the
2 10 Power
the criteria given below. ungrounded secondary side as shown in
supply
VCEO = 20 V min. Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor
IC = 20 mA min. and other input devices so that short-cir-
Input ICBO = 6µA max. cuiting can be prevented.
terminal
3 Also, use transistors with a residual volt-
2 10
age of less than 2 V when the transistor
is on.

47
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LT4H SERIES
Once the wiring to be used is completely (2) Use the diode connected to the out- • Surge wave form
installed and prior to installing this timer, put transistor’s collector for absorbing [± (1.2 × 50) µs uni-polar full wave voltage]
confirm that there is complete insulation the reverse voltage from induced loads.
100
between the wires connected to the 90

Surge voltage (%)

LT4H timer
power terminals (2 each) and the wires
connected to each input terminal. If the Peak
50
power and input lines are not insulated, a
30
short-circuit may occur inside the timer Inductive load
Diode rating:
and result in internal damage.
IF (forward current): 1 A 0
In addition, when moving your equipment 0 1.2 50
VR (reverse voltage): 600 V Load’s Time (µs)
to a new installation location, confirm power supply
that there is no difference in environmen-
tal conditions as compared to the previ- 6) When wiring, use shielded wires or 4) Regarding external noise, the values
ous location. metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire below are considered the noise-resistant
lengths as short as possible. voltages. If voltages rise above these
(Fig. A) Good example
AC power supply
7) For the load of the controlled output, values, malfunctions or damage to the
Insulation transformer make sure that it is lower than the rated internal circuitry may result, so take the
(+)

(–)
Input device
(e.g., sensor) control capacity. necessary precautions.
4. Operation of LT4H digital timer Power supply terminals
(–)
1) Turning on and off the power supply Input
DC type
Timer
while operating in A2* (Power on delay AC type terminals
24V AC type
2) or G (Totalizing On delay) will result in Noise
(Fig. B) Bad example
a timer error to be generated due to the 1,500V 1,000V 600V
AC power supply
voltage
Insulation transformer characteristics of the internal circuitry.
Noise wave form (noise simulator)
(+)
Input device Therefore, use the start input or stop
(–)
(e.g., sensor)
Rise time: 1 ns
input. Pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns
(–) * Not related to the start input. Polarity: ±
Timer
2) When controlling the timer by turning Cycle: 100 cycles/second
on the power supply, use only A (Power 5) When connecting the operating power
AC power supply

Single coil transformer

(+)
(–)
(–)
Timer
4) The input signal is applied by the
shorting of each input terminal with the
common terminal (terminal Q for 8-pin
types, terminal E for 11-pin types and
terminal 6 for screw terminal types).
Never connect other terminals or volt-
ages higher than 40V DC, because it
may destroy the internal circuitry.
5) Transistor output
(1) Since the transistor output is insulat-
ed from the internal circuitry by a pho-
tocoupler, it can be used as an NPN
output or PNP (equal value) output.
(The above example is 11-pin type)
LT4H timer
As NPN output
{ O
Load
Load’s power supply
LT4H timer
As PNP output
on delay 1) or A2 (Power on delay 2). supply, make sure that no leakage cur-
Input device
(e.g., sensor)
Use of other modes in this situation will rent enters the timer. For example, when
result in timer errors. When using the performing contact protection, if set up
other modes, control the timer with the like that of fig. A, leaking current will
Alternative
current flow start input or stop input. pass through C and R, enter the unit,
5. Operation mode and time range set- and cause incorrect operation. The fig. B
ting shows the correct setup.
The operation mode and time range can
be set with the DIP switches on the side
of the timer. Make the DIP switch set-
Leakage current
tings before installing the timer on the
panel. Operating power supply R C T
The operation mode of LT4H-W series
can be set with the keys and switches on
the front of the timer.
6. Conditions of usage (Fig. A)
1) Avoid locations subject to flammable
or corrosive gases, excessive dust, oil,
vibrations, or excessive shocks.
2) Since the cover of the timer is made of
polycarbonate resin, avoid contact with R
or use in environments containing methyl Operating power supply
T
alcohol, benzene, thinners, and other
C
I organic solvents; and ammonia, caustic
sodas, and other alkaline substances.
3) If power supply surges exceed the val- (Fig. B)
ues given below, the internal circuits may
become damaged. Be sure to use surge
absorbing element to prevent this from
happening.

{ O I Operating voltage Surge voltage (peak value)

AC type 6,000V
Load
DC type
1,000V
24V AC type
Load’s power supply

Note: With the 8-pin type, there is no diode

between points I and O.

48

6) Long periods of continuous operation
in the time-up completed condition (one
month or more) will result in the weaken-
ing of the internal electrical components
from the generated heat and, therefore,
should be avoided. If you do plan to use
the unit for such continuous operation,
use in conjunction with a relay as shown
in the circuit in the diagram below.
R T R R
Receive output
R Relay T Timer from contact
at relay R
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LT4H SERIES
7. Acquisition of CE marking
Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that comply
with EN61812-1.
1) Overvoltage category III,
pollution level 2
2) This timer employs a power supply
without a transformer, so the power and
input signal terminals are not insulated.
(1) When a sensor is connected to the
input circuit, install double insulation on
the sensor side.
(2) In the case of contact input, use dual-
insulated relays, etc.
3) The load connected to the output con-
tact should have basic insulation.
This timer is protected with basic insula-
tion and can be double-insulated to meet
EN/IEC requirements by using basic
insulation on the load.
4) Please use a power supply that is pro-
tected by an overcurrent protection
device which complies with the EN/IEC
standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, etc.).
5) You must use a terminal socket or
socket for the installation. Do not touch
the terminals or other parts of the timer
when it is powered. When installing or
un-installing, make sure that no voltage
is being applied to any of the terminals.
6) Do not use this timer as a safety cir-
cuit. For example when using a timer in a
heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
circuit on the machine side.

7. Self-diagnosis function
If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear.
Display Contents Output condition Restoration procedure Preset values after restoration
The values at start-up before the CPU
Malfunctioning CPU.
Enter reset input, RESET malfunction occurred.
OFF
Malfunctioning memory. See key, or restart unit.
0
note.
Note: Includes the possibility that the EEPROM’s life has expired.

49
QM4H

DIN 48 SIZE QM4H

DIGITAL TIMER
Timers
Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily
during the power off.
Furthermore single unit has a time range of 0.01s to 9990hrs!!
Features
1. Possible to set and change the time and the time range even
when the power is off.
2. Selectable 8 different time ranges with front digit switches.
3. Low price.
4. [QM4H-S Type]
It can select the mode with MODE switch.
T.D. MODE: Time delay 2C (2 Form C)
S Type G Type INST. MODE: Time delay 1C (1 Form C)
(with MODE switch) Instantaneous 1C (1 Form C)
[QM4H-G Type]
Reset and stop signal input enable to external control.
RoHS Directive compatibility information
5. Compliant with UL/c-UL and CE.
http://www.nais-e.com/

Product types
Time delay
Product name Time range Operating mode Contact arrangement Operating voltage Part number
direction
T.D. mode: Time delay 2C 12 to 48 V AC/DC QM4HS-U2C-48V
S Type QM4H INST. mode: Time delay 1C
Power ON delay
digital timer and Instantaneous 1C
0.01s/0.1s/1s/0.1min/ (Use MODE switch on front) 100 to 240 V AC/DC QM4HS-U2C-240V
Addition 1min/0.1h/1h/10h
(8 time ranges) Power ON delay 12 to 48 V AC/DC QM4HG-U1C-48V
G Type QM4H
(with reset and Time delay 1C
digital timer
stop terminals) 100 to 240 V AC/DC QM4HG-U1C-240V

Note: Time delay directional subtraction types are also available by order

Part names
TIMER Elapsed time display
Time delay indicator
MODE switch
(OP.LED)
(QM4H-S type only) MODE
T.D. INST.
Set time display
- - - -
8 8 8 S
+ + + +
Time setting switch
(3 digits)
QM4H-S Time range switch

Time range settings

Time range .01 0.1 0.1 0.1 10
switch S S S M M H H H

Operating 0.01s 0.1s 1s 0.1min. 1min. 0.1h 1h 10h

to to to to to to to to
time range 9.99s 99.9s 999s 99.9min 999min 99.9h 999h 9990h

.01 0.1 .01 0.1 0.1 0.1 10

S S S S S M M H H H

Note that there are two settings with the same range.

50
 QM4H
Changing the time setting
• It is possible to use the up and down keys to change the time setting even during timer delay.
However, attention should be paid to the following.
1) When the time setting is shorter than the elapsed time, and timer delay is set in the plus direction, the time setting will return to “0”
after the timer delay reaches full-scale, timer delay will be performed up to the changed time setting, and time up will be reached.
2) When timer delay is set in the minus direction, timer delay will be performed up to “0” regardless of the time, even if the time setting
is shorter than the elapsed time, and time up will be reached.

Specifications
Type
QM4H-S QM4H-G
Item
Rated operating voltage 12 to 48 V AC/DC and 100 to 240 V AC/DC
During time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 1.5W During time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 1.0W
12 to 48 V delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 3.0 VA delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 2.0 VA
AC/DC After time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 2.5W After time 12 V DC, 48 V DC: Max. 1.5W
Rated power delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 5.0 VA delay 12 V AC, 48 V AC: Max. 3.5 VA
consumption During time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 1.5W During time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 1.0W
100 to 240 V delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 3.0 VA delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 2.5 VA
Rating AC/DC After time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 2.0W After time 100 V DC, 240 V DC: Max. 1.8W
delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 4.0 VA delay 100 V AC, 240 V AC: Max. 3.2 VA
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common (at AC)
Rated control capacity 5 A, 250V AC (resistive load)
Time range 0.01s to 9990h, Selection of 8 range: 0.01s/0.1s/1s/0.1min/1min/0.1h/1h/10h
Operation mode Power ON delay Power ON delay (with reset and stop terminals)
Min. input signal width — 20ms (Reset and Stop inputs)*4
Operating time fluctuation ±(0.01%+0.05s) in case of power on start
Temperature error ±(0.005%+0.03s) in case of input reset start*2
Time
Operating voltage: 85 to 110% V
accuracy*1 Setting error Temperature: –10 to +55°C +14 to 131°F (20°C 68°F)
Voltage error Stopped time: 0.1 sec to 1 hour
T.D. mode: Time delay 2C
Contact arrangement INST. mode: Time delay 1C and Time delay 1C
Contact Instantaneous 1C (Use MODE switch on front)
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) Min. 107
Life*3
Electrical (contact) Min. 105 (at rated control vltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Between live and dead metal parts, between input and output,
Breakdown voltage
between contact sets, between contacts
(Initial value)
Min. 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC megger)
Electrical Between live and dead metal parts: 2, 000 Vrms for 1 min
Insulation resistance Between input and output: 2, 000 Vrms for 1 min
(Initial value) Between contact sets: 2, 000 Vrms for 1 min
Between contacts: 1, 000 Vrms for 1 min
Reset time Max. 0.1s
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min. single amplitude of 0.25 mm .010 inch (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min. single amplitude of 0.375 mm .015 inch (1h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 980 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10°C to 55°C +14°F to +131°F
Operating
Ambient humidity Min. 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
conditions
Air pressure 860 to 1060 hPa
Mass (Weight) Approx. 130 g 4.59 oz Approx. 120 g 4.23 oz
Others Available standards UL, c-UL, CE
Operating display LED (red), During time delay: blinking, After time delay: OFF
Notes: 1. Unspecified measuring conditions are rated operating voltage (in case of DC type, ripple rate of 5% or less), ambient temp. 20°C 68°F,
and stop time 1 second.
2. Reset start applies to QM4H-G type.
3. Excluding switches
4. Note that if the QM4H-G type is set to zero “0” and a STOP signal is input, output will begin when the power is turned on.
5. The protective structure on the AQM4801 is IP50, and IP64 for the AQM4803.

51
QM4H
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)

Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)

Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions (units: mm inch)

Tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
• S Type • G Type Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

48 6 72.5 12.9 • QM4H-S Type

1.890 .236 2.854 .508
NC NC
TIMER TIMER NO NO
4 5
3 6
MODE
T.D. INST.
44.5
MODE

1.752 2 7
- - - - - - - - 1 8
8 8 8 S 8 8 8 S
+ + + + + + + + COM COM
QM4H-S QM4H-G Operating
voltage
9.5 (85.4)
.374 (3.362)
MODE TD mode: Time delay 2C
T.D. INST. INST mode:
Time delay 1C and
Instantaneous 1C
Panel cut-out dimensions Panel Mounting Diagram
*Use MODE switch on front
Mounting frame (AQM4812: supplied)
45+0.6
0
(AT8-DA4 can also be used for
1.772+.024 mounting frame. Sold separately)
0
Notes:
Mounting screw
(supplied with mounting frame) 1. Operating voltage signs in parentheses ( ) indicate
45+0.6
0
the polarity of the DC type.
1.772+.024
0
2. is a time delay contact.
45+0.6
0
1.772+.024
0
is an instantaneous contact.

A
• QM4H-G Type
Dimensions A when n products STOP NC
are installed continuously: Panel (Thickness: 1 to 5 mm .039 to .197 inch) RESET NO
A = (48∗n–2.5 +0.6 +.024
0 ) A = (1.890∗n–.098 0 ) 4 5
3 6

2 7
1 8
COM COM
Operating
voltage

52
 QM4H
Operation mode
• QM4H-S Type • QM4H-G Type
1) T.D. mode
ON ON

Power supply OFF Power supply

T ON ON
ON
Reset 1-3
Time delay contact OFF
ON
(N.O. contact)
Stop 1-4
1-3 or 6-8
ta T t1 t2
OP.LED ON ON
Time delay contact
(N.O. contact) 6-8
2) INST. mode
OP.LED
ON
OFF T: Setting time t1+t2 = T ta<T
Power supply T
ON Lit Blinking Blinking slowly
Time delay contact OFF
(N.O. contact) 6-8 * Set the reset inputs 1 to 3 and stop inputs 1 to 4 to 20 ms or higher.
ON * When shorting a signal, please set the inter-terminal resistance to 1 kΩ or less,
Instantaneous contact OFF
and the inter-terminal residual voltage to 2 V or less.
(N.O. contact) 1-3
When releasing, please set the inter-terminal resistance to 100 kΩ or greater.
OP.LED

Precautions in using the QM4H

1. Avoid locations subject to
flammable or corrosive gases,
excessive dust, oil, vibrations, or
excessive shocks.
2. Since the main-unit is made of
polycarbonate resin, avoid contact
with or use in environments
containing methyl alcohol, benzene,
thinners, and other organic solvents;
and ammonia, caustic sodas, and
other alkaline substances.
3. Power supply superimposed surge
protector
Although a surge protector will withstand
standard-waveform voltage with the
values in the next table, anything above
this will destroy the internal circuit. You
should therefore use a surge absorber.
12 to 48 V AC/DC 100 to 240 V AC/DC
1,000 V 6,000 V
• Surge waveform
[±(1.2×50) µs uni-polar full wave voltage]
4. In order to maintain the
characteristics, do not remove the
timer case.
5. When installing the panel, use the
supplied AQM4812 main-unit
mounting frame. Note that the
ATA4811 is also available for sale
separately.
6. If you change the operating voltage,
be sure not to allow leak current into
the timer.
7. Avoid leaving the unit powered
continuously. Leaving the unit
powered up with output set to ON
continuously for a long period of time
(about 1 month or more) will wear out
the electronic components. If you will
be keeping it powered continuously,
combine with a relay to create the
circuit shown below:
R T
R
R T

Compliance with the CE marking

• When using in applications to which
EN61010-1/IEC61010-1 applies, abide
by the following conditions.
1) Ambient conditions
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
• Indoor use
• Acceptable temperature and humidity
range: –10 to +55°C, 30 to 85%RH (with
no condensation at 20°C)
• Under 2000 m elevation
2) Use the unit in a location that matches 3) Connect a breaker that conforms to
the following conditions. EN60947-1 or EN60947-3 to the voltage
• There is minimal dust and no corrosive input section.
gas. 4) Applied voltage should be protected
• There is no combustible or explosive with an overcurrent protection device
gas. (example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse)
• There is no mechanical vibration or that conforms to the EN/IEC standards.
impacts.
• There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
• Located away from large-volume
electromagnetic switches and power
lines with large electrical currents.

53
DIN SIZE TIMERS COMMON OPTIONS
Terminal sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ±1 ±.039)
Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
• DIN rail socket (8-pin) 24
.945
19
PM4H-S 50 1.969 M3.5 .748
M.138
PM4H-M 40 1.575
50
6 5 4 3
PM4H-SD 1.969
PM4H-F8 2- φ 4.5
2- φ .177
PM4H-F8R 24 6 5 4 3
70
.945
PM4H-W 2.756
LT4H 70 35.5 70 7 8 1 2
2-M4 2-M.157
screw holes

LT4H-L 70 2.756 1.390 2.756 (or 4.2 ±0.1 .165±0.1

50 2.756 dia. holes)
40±0.2
LT4H-W 1.969
1.575±.008 13
The minimum distance
between the holes which
QM4H 7 8 1 2 Note: Terminal No. .512 areparallel drilled.

PM4S on the main body

(8-pin type) are identifical to
4 those on the termi-
ATC180031 .157 nal socket.

• DIN rail socket (11-pin)

50 1.969 30.5
M3.5 1.201
40 1.575 M.138 29.5
1.161 50
8 7 6 5 1.969
4
8 7 6 5

PM4H-A 2- φ 4.5
2- φ .177
30.5 70
PM4H-F11R 1.201 4
2.756
LT4H 70 70 9 3 2-M4 2-M.157
screw holes
LT4H-W 2.756 2.756 10 11 1 2
(or 4.2 ±0.1 .165±0.1
70 9 3 dia. holes)
(11-pin type) 50
1.969
2.756 40±0.2 The minimum distance
1.575±.008 13 between the holes which
.512
10 11 1 2 Note: Terminal No. areparallel drilled.

on the main body

4 are identifical to
.157 those on the termi-
ATC180041 nal socket.

Note: The socket’s numbering system matches that of the timer terminals.

Sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ±1 ±.039)

Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
21
• Rear terminal socket M3.5 .138 .827
3 4 5 6
PM4H-S 38
1.496
16
.630
21
PM4H-M .827
PM4H-SD 3 4 5 6 —
41
PM4H-F8 1.614
38 41
PM4H-F8R 1.496 1.614
2 1 8 7
2 1 8 7
PM4H-W AT78041
LT4H • 8P cap 34.6
LT4H-L 1.362
φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30
LT4H-W φ 1.236 φ .551 φ 1.181 4 5
3

φ 31.4 φ 30
6

(8-pin type) φ 1.236 φ 1.181 —

8
2

PM4S .315 1 8
8.6 26
QM4H φ 32.5 .339 1.024
AD8-RC (34.6)
φ 1.280 (1.362)
5 21
• Rear terminal socket M3.5 .138 .197 .827
4 5 6 7 8
45 16
1.772 .630
21
.827
4 5 6 7 8 11 —
43.4 11
1.709
PM4H-A 45 43.4
1.709
1.772 3 2 1 10 9
3 2 1 10 9
PM4H-F11R AT78051
LT4H
LT4H-W • 11P cap
34.6
(11-pin type) 1.362 φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30
φ 1.236 φ .551 φ 1.181 6 5
7
4 3 2

9 8

φ 31.4 φ 30 8 —
φ 1.236 φ 1.181 .315
10

8.6 26 1 11
φ 32.5 .339 1.024
AT8-DP11 φ 1.280
(34.6)
(1.362)
Note: The terminal socket’s numbering system matches that of the timer terminals.

54
 DIN SIZE TIMERS COMMON OPTIONS
MOUNTING PARTS
• Rubber gasket • Mounting frame

Applicable for PM4H series

50.0
and LT4H series
1.969
48 Applicable for PM4H series
1.890
50.0 1.0 LT4H series and QM4H
1.969 .039 series
ATC18002 48 1.890
AT8-DA4 68 2.677

The rubber gasket is enclosed in the PM4H

(screw terminal type) and the LT4H series.

1,000 ± 1 39.37 ± .039

• Mounting rails (Applicable for 5.5
• Fastening plate 50
1.969
DIN and IEC standards) .217 12 M4
2.75R .108R .472 M.157
5 15 10 15 15 10 15 5 10
.394
.197 .591 .394 .591 .591 .394 .591 .197
Oval hole, 40-5.5x15 40-.217x.591

35 24 27 10

UP
AT8-DLA1 1.378 .945 1.5
.059
1.063 ATA4806 .394
ATA4806
Length: 1 m
aluminum 7.5 For holding DIN rails
.295

• Protective cover for DIN 48 size: LT4H, QM4H series • Protective cover for DIN 48 size: QM4H series
Flexible type Hard type
17.2 50.6
11 50 1.992
1.969 .677
.433

50 50.6
1.969 1.992

AQM4803 AQM4801

Accessories
PM4H series
• Panel cover (Black) • Set ring
When you control the fixed time
PM4H-A PM4H-S PM4H-M
range, the setting rings (a set of 2
POWER
PM4H-A
POWER
PM4H-S POWER
PM4H-M pcs.) make it easy to do the time
OP OP OP
setting and keep the time range all
the time. (Excluding PM4H-W)
S S S

N RAN N RAN N RAN

GE GE GE

MODE MODE

ATC18011 ATC18012 ATC18013

PM4H-W PM4H-SD PM4H-F

PM4H-W PM4H-SD PM4H-F
OFF

ON
POWER
ATC18001

S S S

L L RANGE L
RANGE OFF S RANGE
-
RANGE RANGE

ATC18014 ATC18015 L
ATC18016

LT4H series
• Panel cover (Black)
LT4H LT4H-W

TIMER TIMER

RESET RESET
UP UP
LOCK SET/LO
CK

LT4H LT4H-W
DOW DOW
N N

ATL58011 ATL68011

The black panel cover is also available so that you can change the
appearance of the panel by changing the panel cover. The color of the
standard panel cover is ash gray.

55
INSTALLING DIN SIZE TIMER
Installations
1. Surface mount
1) For the timers of PM4H and LT4H
series, use the pin type timer. With the
PM4S and QM4H series, only pin-type
timers are available.
2) Put the terminal socket on the board
directly or put it on the DIN rail (Fig. 1).
3) Insert the timer into the terminal sock-
et and fix it with clip (Fig. 2)
2) How to mount the timer
From the panel front, pass the timer
through the square hole. Fit the mount-
ing frame from the rear, and then push it
in so that the clearance between the
mounting frame and the panel surface is
minimized. In addition, lock the mount-
ing frame with a screw.
• Screw terminal type
Panel cover
Mounting frame
Push in
5) Correctly connect the pins while see-
ing the pin connection diagram.
Tighten the terminal screws with a torque
of 0.8 N·cm or less. The screws are
M3.5. (screw-tightened terminal type)
6) If the pin type is used, the rear termi-
nal block (ATC78041) or the 8P cap
(AD8-RC) is necessary to connect the
pins. For the 11-pin type, use the rear
terminal block (ATC78051) or the 11P
cap (AT8-DP11) and avoid directly sol-
dering the round pins on the timer.
7) Panel cutout dimensions
The standard panel
+ 0.6
45
cutout dimensions are
0

4) On DIN rail mounting, mount the timer + .024

1.7720 shown in the left figure.
on the DIN rail tightly to get the proper Screw (Panel thickness: 1 to 5
Rubber gasket 45+ 0.6

dimension (Fig. 3). 1.772

0
+ .024
0
mm .039 to .197 inch)
(Fig. 1) (Fig. 2) • Pin type
Panel Push in
8) Although the
80 mm
+ 0.6
45
timers can be 1.772
03.150 inch
+ .024
0or more
mounted adjacent 45 + 0.6
0

to each other in 1.772 + .024

0
Terminal socket
this case, it is rec-
ommended to 80 mm
3.150 inch
arrange the or more
Screw
mounting holes
(Fig. 3)
3) Caution in mounting the timer as shown in the
• PM4H, and LT4H series right figure to

a If the PM4H and the LT4H series are facilitate attaching
used as the waterproof types, tighten the and detaching the
DIN rail
reinforcing screws on the mounting mounting frame.
frames so that the timers, the rubber 9) Adjacent + 0.6
450
gaskets, and the panel surfaces are mounting + .024
1.7720

5) 8-pin type should be connected with tightly contacted with each other. Although the
terminal socket (AT8-DF8K). 11-pin type (Tighten the two screws with uniform timers can be A

should be connected with terminal sock- force and make sure that there is no rat- mounted adjacent to each other, remem-
et (AT8-DF11K). tling. If the screws are tightened too ber that the panel surface of PM4H or
6) DIN rail (AT8-DLA1) is also available excessively, the mounting frame may LT4H series timer will lose its water-
(1 m). come off.) resistant effect. (Panel thickness: 1 to 5
2. Flush mount
b If the timer is installed with the panel mm .039 to .197 inch)
1) For the timers of PM4H and LT4H cover and the rubber gasket removed, A = (48 × n – 2.5) +0.6
+0 (mm)
series, it is recommended to use the the waterproofing characteristic is lost. When lining up the
built-in screw terminal type for flush 4) Installation timers horizontally,
mount. (Mounting frame and rubber Loosen the screws on the mounting set the frames in
gasket are provided when timer is frame, spread the edge of frame and such a position so
shipped.) remove it. the formed spring
areas are at the Formed spring

top and bottom.

When lining up the
timers vertically,
set the frames in
Pull the mounting 1
such a position as
If the pin type is used, the mounting frame backward while the formed spring Formed spring
frame (AT8-DA4) and rubber gasket spreading out its hooks areas are at the
(ATC18002 for surface waterproofing) with your thumbs and right and left.
that are available at extra costs are nec- index fingers.
2
essary. If the pin connection socket is
the 8-pin type, use the 8P cap (AD8-
RC); or if it is the 11-pin type, use the
11P cap (AT8-DP11). 1

56
 S1DXM-A/M

RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/
MULTI-RANGE S1DXM-A/M
ANALOG TIMER
Timers
UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
FEATURES
1. Multiple functions built in 4. Economically priced
The operation mode and time range can 1) Prices set to lower costs.
be switched by using the MODE and 2) Further cost reduction when used with
RANGE switches on the front panel. HJ Relay terminal socket.
2. Part number consolidation 5. CE marking supported
1) The lineup consists of 64 easy-to- UL and C-UL approved.
choose models.
2) An operation mode fixed type
(S1DXM-A) and 4-operation mode
switching type (S1DXM-M) are available.
3. Cadmium-free contacts used
To eliminate environmentally harmful
chemical substances, relays with
cadmium-free contacts are used.

PRODUCT TYPES
1. S1DXM-A multi-range timer
No MODE switch, Operation mode (fixed): Power ON-delay
Timed-out 2 Form C Timed-out 4 Form C
Operating voltage Time range
Part number Part number
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-DC12V S1DXM-A4C10M-DC12V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-DC12V S1DXM-A4C30M-DC12V
12V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-DC12V S1DXM-A4C60M-DC12V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-DC12V S1DXM-A4C10H-DC12V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-DC24V S1DXM-A4C10M-DC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-DC24V S1DXM-A4C30M-DC24V
24V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-DC24V S1DXM-A4C60M-DC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-DC24V S1DXM-A4C10H-DC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC24V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC24V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC24V
24V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC24V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC24V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC120V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC120V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC120V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC120V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC120V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC120V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC120V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC220V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC220V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC220V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC220V
200 to 220V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC220V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC220V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC220V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC220V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-A2C10M-AC240V S1DXM-A4C10M-AC240V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-A2C30M-AC240V S1DXM-A4C30M-AC240V
220 to 240V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-A2C60M-AC240V S1DXM-A4C60M-AC240V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-A2C10H-AC240V S1DXM-A4C10H-AC240V

57
S1DXM-A/M
2. S1DXM-M multi-range timer
With MODE switch, Operation mode (switchable): Power ON-delay, Power Flicker ON start, Power Flicker OFF start, Power One-shot
Timed-out 2 Form C Timed-out 4 Form C
Operating voltage Time range
Part number Part number
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-DC12V S1DXM-M4C10M-DC12V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-DC12V S1DXM-M4C30M-DC12V
12V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-DC12V S1DXM-M4C60M-DC12V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-DC12V S1DXM-M4C10H-DC12V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-DC24V S1DXM-M4C10M-DC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-DC24V S1DXM-M4C30M-DC24V
24V DC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-DC24V S1DXM-M4C60M-DC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-DC24V S1DXM-M4C10H-DC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC24V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC24V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC24V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC24V
24V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC24V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC24V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC24V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC24V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC120V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC120V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC120V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC120V
100 to 120V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC120V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC120V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC120V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC120V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC220V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC220V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC220V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC220V
200 to 220V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC220V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC220V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC220V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC220V
0.05 s to 10 min S1DXM-M2C10M-AC240V S1DXM-M4C10M-AC240V
0.2 s to 30 min S1DXM-M2C30M-AC240V S1DXM-M4C30M-AC240V
220 to 240V AC
0.5 s to 60 min S1DXM-M2C60M-AC240V S1DXM-M4C60M-AC240V
0.05 min to 10 hr S1DXM-M2C10H-AC240V S1DXM-M4C10H-AC240V

PART NAMES
S1DXM-A S1DXM-M • [RANGE] Time range switch
Operation (4 different time ranges can be switched.)
Time range Time range
mode switch 10M type: 1 s/10 s/1 min/10 min
switch switch
Power LED 30M type: 3 s/30 s/3 min/30 min
(green) 60M type: 6 s/60 s/6 min/60 min
Operation LED
(orange) 10H type: 1 min/10 min/1 hr/10 hr
Setting
hand
Setting dial • [MODE] Operation mode switch
(4 different operation modes can be switched.)
Control time
scale Power ON-delay
Power Flicker OFF start
Power Flicker ON start
Power One-shot

OPERATION MODE AND TIME RANGE SETTING

Operation mode Operation mode switch Time range switch
ON
1 s m
Power ON-delay (m) (h)
2
X1 X10
ON
1 The time setting can be switched among 4
Power Flicker OFF start ranges each for 4 types for an interval between
2 0.05 seconds and 10 hours.

Notes: 1. The product is factory shipped with all settings on the OFF side (left).
ON 2. Do not operate the switches with a sharp-edged object such as a knife
1 blade.
3. The power must be turned off when setting the time range or operation
Power Flicker ON start
mode. Operating the switches with the power on is a cause of breakdown
2 and malfunction.
4. Use a force of under 5 N to operate the DIP switches when setting the time
ON range and operation mode.
1
Power One-shot
2

58
 S1DXM-A/M
OPERATION MODE
1. S1DXM-A multi-range timer
Power ON-delay operation
• When power is turned on, the output contact operates after the set time. The output contact remains on until the power is turned off.
Time chart
ON
Power supply
OFF
T
ON
Timed-out contact (NO)
OFF
T: Setting time
UP (operation) LED
(orange)
ON (power) LED
(green)

2. S1DXM-M multi-range timer

Power ON-delay operation Power Flicker OFF start operation
[MODE] switch 1: OFF, switch 2: OFF [MODE] switch 1: OFF, switch 2: ON
• When power is turned on, the output contact operates after the set time. • When the power is turned on, the output contacts repeatedly operate at
The output contact remains on until the power is turned off. the set time. The output contact begins from the off state.
Time chart Time chart
ON ON
Power supply Power supply
OFF OFF
T T T T T T T t
ON ON
Timed-out contact (NO) Timed-out contact (NO)
OFF OFF
T: Setting time T: Setting time t<T
UP (operation) LED UP (operation) LED
(orange) (orange)
ON (power) LED ON (power) LED
(green) (green)

Power Flicker ON start operation Power One-shot operation

[MODE] switch 1: ON, switch 2: OFF [MODE] switch 1: ON, switch 2: ON
• When power is turned on, the output contact operates repeatedly at the When power is turned on, the output contact performs the on operation
set time. The output contact outputs at the same time power turns on. at the same time power turns on, only for the set time.
Time chart Time chart
ON ON
Power supply Power supply
OFF OFF
T T T T T T t T
ON ON
Timed-out contact (NO) Timed-out contact (NO)
OFF OFF
T: Setting time t<T T: Setting time
UP (operation) LED UP (operation) LED
(orange) (orange)
ON (power) LED ON (power) LED
(green) (green)

TIME RANGE SETTING

Type Time scale Time unit Min. scale Max. scale Setting range
10M type s m 0.05 1 0.05 to 1s 0.5 to 10s 0.05 to 1m 0.5 to 10m
30M type s m 0.2 3 0.2 to 3s 2 to 30s 0.2 to 3m 2 to 30m
S1DXM-A X1 X10
60M type s m 0.5 6 0.5 to 6s 5 to 60s 0.5 to 6m 5 to 60m
10H type m h 0.05 1 0.05 to 1m 0.5 to 10m 0.05 to 1h 0.5 to 10h
10M type s m 0.05 1 0.05 to 1s 0.5 to 10s 0.05 to 1m 0.5 to 10m
30M type s m 0.2 3 0.2 to 3s 2 to 30s 0.2 to 3m 2 to 30m
S1DXM-M X1 X10
60M type s m 0.5 6 0.5 to 6s 5 to 60s 0.5 to 6m 5 to 60m
10H type m h 0.05 1 0.05 to 1m 0.5 to 10m 0.05 to 1h 0.5 to 10h
Note: The time setting range is the combination of the time scale (X1 or X10) on the dial and the time unit (s, m, or h).
Example: When dial reads 1, time scale is X1 and time units is seconds, then it is 1 second.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Ex. S1DXM- A 2C 30M DC24V

Control output
Operation mode Time range Operating voltage*
arrangement
A 2C: Timed-out 2 Form C 10M: 0.05 s to 10 min DC12V: 12 V DC
M 4C: Timed-out 4 Form C 30M: 0.2 s to 30 min DC24V: 24 V DC
60M: 0.5 s to 60 min AC24V: 24 V AC
10H: 0.05 min to 10 hr AC120V: 100 to 120 V AC
AC220V: 200 to 220 V AC
AC240V: 220 to 240 V AC
* For other operating voltage types, please consult us.

59
S1DXM-A/M
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specifications
Rated operating voltage 24VAC 100 to 120VAC 200 to 220VAC 220 to 240VAC 12VDC 24VDC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common —
Max. 3 VA Max. 3 VA Max. 3 VA Max. 3 VA Max. 2 W Max. 2 W
Rated power (at 24 VAC) (at 100 VAC) (at 200 VAC) (at 220 VAC) (at 12 VDC) (at 24 VDC)
consumption During time delay Approx. 3mA Approx. 3mA Approx. 3mA Approx. 3mA Approx. 5mA Approx. 3mA
After time delay Approx. 80mA Approx. 20mA Approx. 13mA Approx. 13mA Approx. 70mA Approx. 40mA
Rating Timed -out 2 Form C: 7A 250V AC (resistive load)
Rated control capacity
Timed -out 4 Form C: 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
S1DXM-A
Power on delay operation fixed
(Power display: ON/green; Operation display (when output is on): UP/orange)
Operation mode
S1DXM-M
4 switchable operations: Power ON-delay/Power Flicker OFF start/Power Flicker ON start/Power One-shot
(Power display: ON/green; Operation display (when output is on): UP/orange)
Operating time fluctuation &
Max. ±1 %, (power off time change at the range of 0.1 s to 1 h), 1 s range: Max. ±1 % and 10 ms*2
Power off time change error
Time accuracy*1 Voltage error Max. ±1 % (at the operating voltage changes between –20 to +10%), 1 s range: Max. ±1 % and 10 ms*2
Temperature error Max. ±5% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F)
Setting error Max. ±10%, 1 s range: Max. ±10% and 20 ms
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C, Timed-out 4 Form C
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A, 6V DC)
Contact
Timed-out 2 Form C type: Silver alloy, Au plating
Contact material
Timed-out 4 Form C type: Silver alloy, Au plating
Mechanical (constant) Min. 107
Life
Electrical (constant) 2×10 (at rated control capacity)
5

Vibration Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.25mm (10min on 3 axes)

resistance Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.375mm (1h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Allowable operating voltage range 80 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Reset time Max. 0.1s
Between live and dead metal parts, between input and output, between contact sets, between contacts
Insulation resistance (Initial value)
Min. 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC megger)
Electrical Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
Between contact sets: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Between contacts: 1,000 Vrms for 1 min
Max. temperature rise 70°C 158°F
Ambient temperature –10 to 50°C +14 to 122°F
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Operating Air pressure 860 to 1060 hPa
conditions Ripple rate DC type only, transmission wave rectification (ripple rate: approx. 48%)*3
Mass (Weight) Approx. 45 g
Protective construction IEC standard: IP40 (IP50 when using ADX18008 protective cover)
Notes: *1. Unspecified measuring conditions are rated operating voltage (in case of DC type, ripple rate of 5% or less), ambient temp. 20°C 68°F, and power off time 1 second.
*2. Power one-shot 1 s range: +2% and 10 ms
*3. When using with a transmission wave rectification, vibration resistance and shock resistance properties worsen compared to when using a stabilized power supply.

60
 S1DXM-A/M
DIMENSIONS mm inch

1. S1DXM-A
Control time scale
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagram
Timed-out 2 Form C type
UP LED (orange)
Time range switch
1 4

X10

S1DXM
UP
m
RANGE 5 8
X1
s
22.1 13.35
9 12
.870 .526

0
ON

13 14
ON LED (green)
28.5 Operating
1.122 16.6 voltage
.654
Timed-out 4 Form C type
4.45 1 2 3 4
.175
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
Nameplate 13.35
57.9 .526
52.7 2.280 13 14
2.075
For 4 Form C type Operating
5.1 6.4 6.4 voltage
.201 4.1 .252 .252
.161

6.4
.252
* For the DC operating type, terminal 14 is “+” and terminal 13 is “–”.
Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020

2. S1DXM-M
Control time scale
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagram
Timed-out 2 Form C type
UP LED (orange)
Time range switch 1 4
X10
UP

S1DXM
m
MODE ON RANGE

5 8
Operation mode switch 22.1 13.35
X1
s

9 12
.870 .526
0

13 14
2
1

ON

ON LED (green)
28.5 Operating
1.122 16.6 voltage
.654
Timed-out 4 Form C type
4.45 1 2 3 4
.175
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
Nameplate 13.35
57.9 .526 13 14
52.7 2.280
2.075
For 4 Form C type Operating
5.1 6.4 6.4 voltage
.201 4.1 .252 .252
.161

6.4
.252 * For the DC operating type, terminal 14 is “+” and terminal 13 is “–”.
Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020

APPLICABLE STANDARD
Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II (2 Form C type);
Safety standard EN61812-1
Pollution Degree 1/Overvoltage Category II (4 Form C type)
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

61
S1DXM-A/M
Precautions during usage
1. Reset periods
After unscheduled operations have been
completed, or if the timer operation power
supply has been turned off at any time
during operation, a reset period of at
least 0.1 seconds should be allowed
before resuming operation.
2. External surge protection
External surge protection may be
required if the following values are
exceeded. Otherwise, the internal circuit
will be damaged. The typical surge
absorption elements include a varistor, a
capacitor, and a diode. If a surge
absorption element is used, use an
oscilloscope to see whether or not the
foreign surge exceeding the specified
value appears.
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1.2 × 50) µs]
100
90
Crest value (%)
Crest value
50
30
0
0 1.2
Time (µs)
Operation voltage
100 to 120V AC, 200 to 220V AC
12V DC, 24V DC
Since the main body cover and knob are
made of polycarbonate resin, prevent
contact with organic solvents such as
methyl alcohol, benzine and thinner, or
strong alkali materials such as ammonia
and caustic soda.
3. Terminal wiring
Make sure that terminals are wired
carefully and correctly, referring to the
terminal layout and wiring diagrams.
Particularly, since the DC type has
polarity, do not operate it with reverse
polarity.
4. Assembly
1) When installing, use a terminal socket
or socket intended for the HC/HJ relay.
For adjacent installations, be sure to first
verify the installation conditions of the
terminal sockets or sockets you will be
using.
2) Use the separately-sold dedicated
socket leaf holding clip to secure terminal
sockets and sockets to the timer unit. The
conditions of use for dedicated socket
leaf holding clip will differ depending on
the terminal socket or socket you will be
using. Therefore, please test under actual
conditions before putting into operation.
62
3) If terminals are to be soldered directly,
please hand solder with a 30 to 60 W
solder iron with a tip temperature of
300°C for no more than 3 seconds.
Automatic soldering should be avoided.
4) A flux-tight construction is not used
with this timer, so be careful that flux or
cleaning fluid does not get inside the
case.
5) To assure that characteristics are
maintained, do not remove the case.
5. Long Continuous Current Flow
Long continuous current flow through the
timer cause generation of heat internally,
which degrade the electronic parts. Use
the timer in combination with a relay and
avoid long continuous current flow
through the timer. (Refer to the circuit
diagram below when using a safety
circuit for continuous operation.)
R T R pass through C and R, enter the timer,
R T
50
6. Phase synchronization using AC
Surge voltage
load
If the turning on of the timer output relay
4,000V
is synchronized to the AC power supply
1,000V
phase, there may be times when the
service life is shortened because of
electrical factors, or when a locking
phenomenon (defective relay return)
occurs because of contact point welding
or a shift in the contact relay. Check the
operation using the actual timer.
7. Acquisition of CE marking
Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that comply
with EN61812-1.
1) Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 2 (2 Form C type)
Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 1 (4 Form C type)
2) The load connected to the output
contact should have basic insulation.
This timer is protected with basic
insulation and can be double-insulated to
meet EN/IEC requirements by using
basic insulation on the load.
3) Please use a power supply that is
protected by an overcurrent protection
device which complies with the EN/IEC
standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, etc.).
4) You must use a terminal socket or
socket for the installation. Do not touch
the terminals or other parts of the timer
when it is powered. When installing or un-
installing, make sure that no voltage is
being applied to any of the terminals.
5) Do not use this timer as a safety
circuit. For example when using a timer in
a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
circuit on the machine side.
8. Others
1) When setting the time, the dial should
be kept within the range indicated on the
dial face. The “0” marking on the dial
indicates the minimum time during which
the control time can be varied (it does not
indicate 0 seconds).
2) Do not rotate the knob past the
stopper.
3) Turn off the power before changing the
DIP switch settings. Changing the DIP
switch with the power on can cause
breakdown.
4) When connecting the operating power
supply, make sure that no leakage
current enters the timer. For example,
when performing contact protection, if set
up like that of fig. A, leaking current will
and cause incorrect operation. The fig. B
shows the correct setup.
Leakage current
Operating power supply
R C T
(Fig. A) WRONG
R
Operating power supply
T
C
(Fig. B) CORRECT
When a contact switch having an
operation indicating lamp (lamp equipped
limit switch, etc.) is used to apply power
to the timer, a resistor having a value
equal to or greater than the value below
shall be connected in series with the
lamp.
100 to 120V AC operating type:
Min. 33kΩ
200 to 220V AC operating type:
Min. 82kΩ
Limit switch
Example of limit switches
with lamp.
T VL with lamp, Vertical type
Resistor Neon lamp with lamp, ML with lamp.
 S1DX
COMPACT SIZE (one)
HIGH PRECISION TIMERS
VARIOUS OUTPUT & S1DX Timers
OPERATION MODE TYPES

UL File No.: E122222

CSA File No.: LR39291
Features
3 operation modes added for
fuller lineup Output contact relay construction
Now, operation modes include not only Available contact relay output types: 2C and 4C
On Delay, but Flicker, One Shot, and
One Cycle modes as well.
Panels can be installed
Operation can be In addition to conventional DIN rail
checked easily installation, panels can be installed using
Power supply: Green an mounting frame.
Operation: Orange LED display The compact timer size means that larger
panels can be used.

Output terminal
Compliant with UL, A plug-in terminal and printed
circuit terminal are provided.
CSA and CE.

Easier than ever to

read and use
Large-sized transparent dial
makes setting time easy!

High precision
Repeatability error: 1%

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Product types
• Plug-in terminal
Power ON-delay
AC operating type
24V AC 100 to 120V AC 200 to 220V AC 220 to 240V AC
Time range
Part number Part number Part number Part number
0.05 to 0.5 s S1DX-A2C0.5S-AC24V S1DX-A2C0.5S-AC120V S1DX-A2C0.5S-AC220V S1DX-A2C0.5S-AC240V
0.1 to 1 s S1DX-A2C1S-AC24V S1DX-A2C1S-AC120V S1DX-A2C1S-AC220V S1DX-A2C1S-AC240V
0.1 to 3 s S1DX-A2C3S-AC24V S1DX-A2C3S-AC120V S1DX-A2C3S-AC220V S1DX-A2C3S-AC240V
0.2 to 5 s S1DX-A2C5S-AC24V S1DX-A2C5S-AC120V S1DX-A2C5S-AC220V S1DX-A2C5S-AC240V
0.5 to 10 s S1DX-A2C10S-AC24V S1DX-A2C10S-AC120V S1DX-A2C10S-AC220V S1DX-A2C10S-AC240V
Time-out 1 to 30 s S1DX-A2C30S-AC24V S1DX-A2C30S-AC120V S1DX-A2C30S-AC220V S1DX-A2C30S-AC240V
2 Form C
type 3 to 60 s S1DX-A2C60S-AC24V S1DX-A2C60S-AC120V S1DX-A2C60S-AC220V S1DX-A2C60S-AC240V
0.1 to 3 min S1DX-A2C3M-AC24V S1DX-A2C3M-AC120V S1DX-A2C3M-AC220V S1DX-A2C3M-AC240V
0.5 to 10 min S1DX-A2C10M-AC24V S1DX-A2C10M-AC120V S1DX-A2C10M-AC220V S1DX-A2C10M-AC240V
1 to 30 min S1DX-A2C30M-AC24V S1DX-A2C30M-AC120V S1DX-A2C30M-AC220V S1DX-A2C30M-AC240V
3 to 60 min S1DX-A2C60M-AC24V S1DX-A2C60M-AC120V S1DX-A2C60M-AC220V S1DX-A2C60M-AC240V
0.1 to 3 h S1DX-A2C3H-AC24V S1DX-A2C3H-AC120V S1DX-A2C3H-AC220V S1DX-A2C3H-AC240V
0.05 to 0.5 s S1DX-A4C0.5S-AC24V S1DX-A4C0.5S-AC120V S1DX-A4C0.5S-AC220V S1DX-A4C0.5S-AC240V
0.1 to 1 s S1DX-A4C1S-AC24V S1DX-A4C1S-AC120V S1DX-A4C1S-AC220V S1DX-A4C1S-AC240V
0.1 to 3 s S1DX-A4C3S-AC24V S1DX-A4C3S-AC120V S1DX-A4C3S-AC220V S1DX-A4C3S-AC240V
0.2 to 5 s S1DX-A4C5S-AC24V S1DX-A4C5S-AC120V S1DX-A4C5S-AC220V S1DX-A4C5S-AC240V
0.5 to 10 s S1DX-A4C10S-AC24V S1DX-A4C10S-AC120V S1DX-A4C10S-AC220V S1DX-A4C10S-AC240V
Time-out 1 to 30 s S1DX-A4C30S-AC24V S1DX-A4C30S-AC120V S1DX-A4C30S-AC220V S1DX-A4C30S-AC240V
4 Form C
type 3 to 60 s S1DX-A4C60S-AC24V S1DX-A4C60S-AC120V S1DX-A4C60S-AC220V S1DX-A4C60S-AC240V
0.1 to 3 min S1DX-A4C3M-AC24V S1DX-A4C3M-AC120V S1DX-A4C3M-AC220V S1DX-A4C3M-AC240V
0.5 to 10 min S1DX-A4C10M-AC24V S1DX-A4C10M-AC120V S1DX-A4C10M-AC220V S1DX-A4C10M-AC240V
1 to 30 min S1DX-A4C30M-AC24V S1DX-A4C30M-AC120V S1DX-A4C30M-AC220V S1DX-A4C30M-AC240V
3 to 60 min S1DX-A4C60M-AC24V S1DX-A4C60M-AC120V S1DX-A4C60M-AC220V S1DX-A4C60M-AC240V
0.1 to 3 h S1DX-A4C3H-AC24V S1DX-A4C3H-AC120V S1DX-A4C3H-AC220V S1DX-A4C3H-AC240V
* Wire springs (ADX18005) are included.

63
S1DX
DC operating type
12V DC 24V DC
Time range
Part number Part number
0.05 to 0.5 s S1DX-A2C0.5S-DC12V S1DX-A2C0.5S-DC24V
0.1 to 1 s S1DX-A2C1S-DC12V S1DX-A2C1S-DC24V
0.1 to 3 s S1DX-A2C3S-DC12V S1DX-A2C3S-DC24V
0.2 to 5 s S1DX-A2C5S-DC12V S1DX-A2C5S-DC24V
0.5 to 10 s S1DX-A2C10S-DC12V S1DX-A2C10S-DC24V
Time-out 1 to 30 s S1DX-A2C30S-DC12V S1DX-A2C30S-DC24V
2 Form C
type 3 to 60 s S1DX-A2C60S-DC12V S1DX-A2C60S-DC24V
0.1 to 3 min S1DX-A2C3M-DC12V S1DX-A2C3M-DC24V
0.5 to 10 min S1DX-A2C10M-DC12V S1DX-A2C10M-DC24V
1 to 30 min S1DX-A2C30M-DC12V S1DX-A2C30M-DC24V
3 to 60 min S1DX-A2C60M-DC12V S1DX-A2C60M-DC24V
0.1 to 3 h S1DX-A2C3H-DC12V S1DX-A2C3H-DC24V
0.05 to 0.5 s S1DX-A4C0.5S-DC12V S1DX-A4C0.5S-DC24V
0.1 to 1 s S1DX-A4C1S-DC12V S1DX-A4C1S-DC24V
0.1 to 3 s S1DX-A4C3S-DC12V S1DX-A4C3S-DC24V
0.2 to 5 s S1DX-A4C5S-DC12V S1DX-A4C5S-DC24V
0.5 to 10 s S1DX-A4C10S-DC12V S1DX-A4C10S-DC24V
Time-out 1 to 30 s S1DX-A4C30S-DC12V S1DX-A4C30S-DC24V
4 Form C
type 3 to 60 s S1DX-A4C60S-DC12V S1DX-A4C60S-DC24V
0.1 to 3 min S1DX-A4C3M-DC12V S1DX-A4C3M-DC24V
0.5 to 10 min S1DX-A4C10M-DC12V S1DX-A4C10M-DC24V
1 to 30 min S1DX-A4C30M-DC12V S1DX-A4C30M-DC24V
3 to 60 min S1DX-A4C60M-DC12V S1DX-A4C60M-DC24V
0.1 to 3 h S1DX-A4C3H-DC12V S1DX-A4C3H-DC24V
* Wire springs (ADX18005) are included.

Please select power flicker, power one-shot or power one-cycle specifications based on the ordering information listed below.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Ex. S1DX- C 2C 5S — AC120V

Operation mode Control output Time range * Operating voltage *

arrangement
F: Power Flicker 2C: Timed-out 2 Form C 0.5S: 0.05 to 0.5 s 60S: 3 to 60 s AC24V: 24V AC
S: Power One-shot 4C: Timed-out 4 Form C 1S: 0.1 to 1 s 3M: 0.1 to 3 min AC120V: 100 to 120V AC
C: Power One-cycle 3S: 0.1 to 3 s 10M: 0.5 to 10 min AC220V: 200 to 220V AC
5S: 0.2 to 5 s 30M: 1 to 30 min AC240V: 220 to 240V AC
10S: 0.5 to 10 s 60M: 3 to 60 min DC12V: 12V DC
30S: 1 to 30 s 3H: 0.1 to 3 h DC24V: 24V DC
*For other time range types and operating voltage types, please consult us.

• PC board terminal
Power ON-delay
100 to 120V AC 200 to 220V AC 24V DC
Time range
Part number Part number Part number
0.05 to 0.5 s S1DX-A2C0.5S-AC120VP S1DX-A2C0.5S-AC220VP S1DX-A2C0.5S-DC24VP
0.1 to 1 s S1DX-A2C1S-AC120VP S1DX-A2C1S-AC220VP S1DX-A2C1S-DC24VP
Time-out 0.1 to 3 s S1DX-A2C3S-AC120VP S1DX-A2C3S-AC220VP S1DX-A2C3S-DC24VP
2 Form C 0.2 to 5 s S1DX-A2C5S-AC120VP S1DX-A2C5S-AC220VP S1DX-A2C5S-DC24VP
type 0.5 to 10 s S1DX-A2C10S-AC120VP S1DX-A2C10S-AC220VP S1DX-A2C10S-DC24VP
1 to 30 s S1DX-A2C30S-AC120VP S1DX-A2C30S-AC220VP S1DX-A2C30S-DC24VP
3 to 60 s S1DX-A2C60S-AC120VP S1DX-A2C60S-AC220VP S1DX-A2C60S-DC24VP
0.05 to 0.5 s S1DX-A4C0.5S-AC120VP S1DX-A4C0.5S-AC220VP S1DX-A4C0.5S-DC24VP
0.1 to 1 s S1DX-A4C1S-AC120VP S1DX-A4C1S-AC220VP S1DX-A4C1S-DC24VP
Time-out 0.1 to 3 s S1DX-A4C3S-AC120VP S1DX-A4C3S-AC220VP S1DX-A4C3S-DC24VP
4 Form C 0.2 to 5 s S1DX-A4C5S-AC120VP S1DX-A4C5S-AC220VP S1DX-A4C5S-DC24VP
type 0.5 to 10 s S1DX-A4C10S-AC120VP S1DX-A4C10S-AC220VP S1DX-A4C10S-DC24VP
1 to 30 s S1DX-A4C30S-AC120VP S1DX-A4C30S-AC220VP S1DX-A4C30S-DC24VP
60 s S1DX-A4C60S-AC120VP S1DX-A4C60S-AC220VP S1DX-A4C60S-DC24VP
* Wire springs (ADX18005) are included.

64
 S1DX
Specifications
Type AC operating type DC operating type
Rated operating voltage 24V, 100 to 120V, 200 to 220V, 220 to 240V 12V, 24V
Allowable operating voltage range 80 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common —
Power supply ripple — Full-wave rectified (Approx. 48%)
Rated power consumption Max. 3VA Max. 2W
[Timed -out 2 Form C]: 7A 250V AC
Rated control capacity [Timed -out 4 Form C]: 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
[Timed -out 2 Form C]: 7A 125 AC, 6A 250V AC, 1/6HP 125, 250V AC, PILOT DUTY C300
UL/CSA rating [Timed -out 4 Form C]: 5A 250V AC, 1/10HP 125, 250V AC, PILOT DUTY C300
Output arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C, Timed-out 4 Form C
[Except 0.5s & 1s types] ±1%
Operating time [0.5s type]: ±(2%+10ms)
fluctuation & Power off [1s type]: ±(1%+10ms)
time change error (power off time change at the range of 0.1 s to 1 h)
Time
accuracy Temperature error ±5% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F)
(max.) [Except 0.5s & 1s types] ±1%
Voltage error [0.5s type]: ±(2%+10ms)
[1s type]: ±(1%+10ms) (at the operating voltage changes between –20 to +10%)
Setting error ±10% (Full-scale value)
Min. power off time 100ms
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A, 6V DC)
Mechanical (constant) 107
Life 5
Electrical (constant) 2×10 (at rated control capacity)
Min. 100MΩ Between live and dead metal parts/input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ Between contact sets (At 500V DC)
Min. 100MΩ Between contacts
1500Vrms for 1min Between live and dead metal parts/input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 1500Vrms for 1min Between contact sets
1000Vrms for 1min Between contacts
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.75mm (1h on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Max. temperature rise 70°C 158°F
Ambient temperature –10 to 50°C + 14 to 122°F
Ambient humidity 30 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
*Power one-shot type of 1 s type: +(2% + 10 ms)

Dimensions mm inch
Timed-out Timed-out
• Plug-in terminal 2 Form C type 4 Form C type Terminal layouts and
22.1
.870
57.9
2.280
6.4
.252
13.35
.526
13.35
.526
4.45
Wiring diagram
52.7 5 5 .175
2.075 .197 .197 Timed-out Timed-out
ON UP 2 Form C type 4 Form C type
4.1 4.1
.161 .161
6.3 6.3
28.5 21.5 .248 .248 1 4 1 2 3 4
1.122 .846 6.4 6.4
.252 .252 5 8 5 6 7 8
S1DX
9 12 9 10 11 12
13 14 13 14

Operating Operating
voltage voltage

Timed-out Timed-out (For the DC operating type, terminal 14 is +, and ter-

• Printed circuit board terminal 2 Form C type 4 Form C type minal 13 is –.)
13.35 13.35
22.1 57.9 1.5 3.5 .526 .526
.870 2.280
52.7
.059 .138
0.5 5 1.5 5
4.45
.175
PC board pattern
2.075 .020 .197 .059 .197

ON UP
Timed-out Timed-out
4.1 4.1
.161 .161 2 Form C type 4 Form C type
6.3 6.3
28.5 21.5 .248 .248
1.122 .846 4.1 4.1
6.4 6.4 .161 .161
.252 .252
S1DX

10.4 10.4
.409 16.8 .409 16.8
.661 .661
Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020 4.45
8- φ 2 hole .175 14- φ 2 hole
13.35 8- φ .079 hole 14- φ .079 hole
.526 8.9
.350
13.35
.526

General tolerance: ±0.1 ±.004

65
S1DX
Applicable standard
Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II (2 Form C type)
Safety standard EN61812-1
Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II (4 Form C type)
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Data
1. Load control capacity and life
• Switching capacity • Life curve
10
1,000 No load life
No. of operations, ×104

7
5 No load life: Min. 107 ope.
Rated load life: Min. 2×105 ope.
(250V AC cosφ = 1)
Load current, A

2 Form C 4 Form C 500

1 type type
400

300
2 Form C
0.1 type
200

100
4 Form C
type
0.01 0
10 100 1,000 2 4 6 8

Load voltage, V Load current, A

2. Time accuracy
• Voltage error test I • Voltage error test II • Voltage error test III
3 s range, 120V AC operating type 6 pcs. 3 s range, 220V AC operating type 3 pcs. 3 s range, 24V DC operating type 3 pcs.

Voltage error,
Voltage error,
Voltage error,

0.2 0.2 0.2

%
%
%

0.1 0.1 0.1

80 80 80 110
100 110 Applied voltage, 100 110 Applied voltage, 100
Applied voltage,
%V %V %V

− 0.1 − 0.1 –0.1

− 0.2 − 0.2 –0.2

• Temperature error test I • Temperature error test II • Temperature error test III
3 s range, 120V AC operating type 4 pcs. 3 s range, 220V AC operating type 4 pcs. 3 s range, 24V DC operating type 3 pcs.
Temperature

Temperature

Temperature

1 1 1
error, %

error, %

error, %

0.5 0.5 0.5

− 10 20 50 − 10 20 50 –10 20 50
Ambient Ambient Ambient
temperature, °C temperature, °C temperature, °C

− 0.5 − 0.5 –0.5

−1 −1 –1

66
 S1DX
3. Environmental durability
• Surge testing • Noise testing • Cold and heat testing
100 to 200 to 100 to Item Noise generation Results Conditions Results
12V 24V 48V
Model 120V 220V 110V
DC DC DC Noise simulator Left for 1 hour at high
AC AC DC Appearance
1,000 V temperature of 80°C
Power Rise: 1 ns Operation
Surge 176°F and low tempera-
4,000V 4,000V 1,000V 1,000V 4,000V 4,000V supply Pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns Not Insulation performance
voltage ture of –25°C –13°F (25
weight Repetition cycle: 10 ms affected —No irregularities
times)
Noise Pulse polarity: Positive, negative
Applied voltage: Unipolar full-wave voltage of
Applied modes: Normal mode • Humidity testing
± (1.2 x 50) µs and Common mode
No. of times applied: 5 times, continuously Conditions Results
Locations at which voltage is applied:
Between power supply terminals (between 13 Left for 500 hours at Appearance
and 14) ambient temperature of Operation
40 (C, at relative humidi- Insulation performance
Results: No differences from withstand surge ty of 90 to 95%. —No irregularities
voltages listed above.

Operation mode and color Scale intervals

Operation mode Time type Scale intervals
Operation type Description Time chart
indicator color 0.05
T
0.5 (0.02 in a range
Timing operation will ON OFF of 0.1 to 0.5)
Power supply
start when the power is ON OFF 1 0.05
Power ON-delay supplied, and the control Timed-out contact
output turns on after the (NO) OFF ON
3 0.1
setting time. Timed-out contact Yellow
(NC) 5 0.2
When the power is 10 0.5
ON OFF
supplied, the control Power supply 30 1
output turns on after the ON
T
OFF ON
T
OFF ON
T
OFF
Power Ficker setting time and then Timed-out contact 60 2
turns off after the setting (NO) T
ON
T
ON
T
ON
t

time. This operation is Timed-out contact OFF OFF OFF

Blue
(NC)
repeated sequentially. t<T

ON OFF
When the power is Power supply
T
supplied, control output ON OFF
Power One-shot turns on for the setting
Timed-out contact
(NO) OFF ON
time.
Timed-out contact Green
(NC)

ON OFF
When the power is Power supply
T
supplied, the control ON OFF
Power One-cycle output turns on for one Timed-out contact
(NO) OFF ON
pulse after the setting
Timed-out contact
time. (NC)
Red
One pulse time: Approx. 1 s

67
S1DX
Precautions during usage
1. Terminal wiring
Make sure that terminals are wired care-
fully and correctly, referring to the termi-
nal layout and wiring diagrams.
2. Assembly
1) A dedicated terminal base or socket
should be used for attachment.
2) To assure that characteristics are
maintained, do not remove the case.
3. Rest periods
After unscheduled operations have been
completed, or if the timer operation
power supply has been turned off at any
time during operation, a rest period of at
least 0.1 seconds should be allowed
before resuming operation.
4. External surge protection may be
required if the following values are
exceeded. Otherwise, the internal
circuit will be damaged.
100 to 200 to
Operation
120V 220V
voltage
AC AC
Surge
4,000V 4,000V 1,000V 4,000V 4,000V
voltage
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1.2 × 50) µs]
100
90
Surge voltage (%)
Crest value
50
30
0 tact should have basic insulation.
0 1.2
Time (µs)
The typical surge absorption elements
include a varistor, a capacitor, and a
diode. If a surge absorption element is
used, use an oscilloscope to see
whether or not the foreign surge exceed-
ing the specified value appears.
5. Phase synchronization using AC
load
If the turning on of the timer output relay
is synchronized to the AC power supply
phase, there may be times when the ser-
vice life is shortened because of electri-
cal factors, or when a locking phenome-
non (defective relay return) occurs
because of contact point welding or a
shift in the contact relay. Check the oper-
ation using the actual timer.
68
6. Soldering and cleaning
1) A flux-tight construction is not used
with this timer, so be careful that flux
does not get inside the case.
2) Terminals should be soldered by hand
(at a soldering iron temperature of 300°C
572°F, for less than 3 seconds, using a
30 to 60 W soldering iron). Automatic
soldering should be avoided.
3) Cleaning should be avoided as much
as possible. If the timer has to be
cleaned, make sure no cleaning fluid
gets inside the main unit case.
7. Installing the unit
1) The wire spring included in the prod-
uct packaging is for the HC relay termi-
nal block.
2) The wire spring is not usable with an
HJ relay terminal block, so the stopper
plate spring B (ADX18012: HJ relay ter-
minal block plate spring) (sold separate-
100 to
12V DC
48V DC 110V ly) for the S1DH should be purchased.
24V DC
DC 8. Others
1) When connecting the operating power
supply, make sure that no leakage cur-
rent enters the timer. For example, when
performing contact protection, if set up
like that of fig. A, leaking current will
pass through C and R, enter the unit,
and cause incorrect operation. The fig. B
shows the correct setup.
Leakage current
50
Operating power supply R C
(Fig. A)
R socket for the installation. Do not touch
Operating power supply
C
(Fig. B)
When a contact switch having an opera-
tion indicating lamp (lamp equipped limit
switch, etc.) is used to apply power to
the timer, a resistor having a value equal
to or greater than the value below shall
be connected in series with the lamp.
100 to 120V AC operating type:
Min. 33kΩ
200 to 220V AC operating type:
Min. 82kΩ
Resistor Neon lamp T
Example of limit switches with lamp.
VL with lamp, Vertical type with lamp, ML with lamp.
2) When setting the time, the dial should
be kept within the range indicated on the
dial face. The “0” marking on the dial
indicatesf the minimum time during
which the control time can be varied (it
does not indicate 0 seconds).
9. Acquisition of CE marking
Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that comply
with EN61812-1.
1) Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 2 (2 Form C type)
Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 1 (4 Form C type)
2) The load connected to the output con-
T This timer is protected with basic insula-
tion and can be double-insulated to meet
EN/IEC requirements by using basic
insulation on the load.
3) Please use a power supply that is pro-
tected by an overcurrent protection
device which complies with the EN/IEC
standard (example: 250 V 1 A fuse, etc.).
4) You must use a terminal socket or
the terminals or other parts of the timer
T
when it is powered. When installing or
un-installing, make sure that no voltage
is being applied to any of the terminals.
5) Do not use this timer as a safety cir-
cuit. For example when using a timer in a
heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
circuit on the machine side.
S1DXM-A/M/S1DX COMMON OPTIONS
ACCESSORY Note: Accessories are the same as those for the S1DX timer.
• Mounting frame
Appearance Panel cutout dimensions
+ 0.2
25.1 25.2+0.008 5
.988 .992 0 .197
30
1.181 31.5
1.240 + 0.2
31.6+0.008
3
.118 1.244 0
*Note
3
.118

33.5
1.319

ADX18002 (Titanium-gray)
Board thickness 1 to 3 mm
ADX18006 (Gray) 27.1 Note: Make sure the holes area stays
ADX18007 (Black) 1.067 as right angles.

• Protective cover • Cap block • Cap • Socket

10.5
.413 28.2 29.4
1.110 1.157
36 1.417
2 .079

18.85
.742
30.0
34.6 1.181
1.362
7.65
.301
21.2
21.2 .835
.835

ADX18008 ADX18011 ADX18004 ADX18003

TERMINAL SOCKET
• HC2 slim DIN • HC2 DIN high • HC4 DIN high • HC4 socket • HJ2 terminal • HJ4 terminal
terminal socket terminal socket terminal socket socket socket

82.5 82.5 82.5 58.1 86.0 86.0

3.248 3.248 3.248 2.287 3.386 3.386
86.5 86.5 86.5 88.0 88.0
3.406 3.406 3.406 3.465 3.465
10
.394

HC2-SFD-S HC2-SFD-K HC4-SFD-K HC4-SS-K HJ2-SFD/HJ2-SFD-S HJ4-SFD/HJ4-SFD-S

SOCKET LEAF HOLDING CLIP SOCKET LINE HOLDING

CLIP FOR S1DXM-A/M
ADX18001 ADX18012 AD68002 ADX28005
Figure Dimensions Figure Dimensions Figure Dimensions Dimensions
4.5
.177 4.5
.177
7.5
.295

63.8 52.6
63.1 2.512 2.071
2.484 61.6
2.425

4.5
(2 pieces per set) (2 pieces per set) (2 pieces per set) .177

Type Application
Terminal socket ADX18001 ADX18012 AD68002 ADX28005
HC2-SFD-S — —


For HC relay HC2-SFD-K
— ∆

HC4-SFD-K
— ∆

HJ2-SFD —
— —
HJ2-SFD-S —
— —
For HJ relay
HJ4-SFD — ∆ — —
HJ4-SFD-S — ∆ — —
Note: The triangles indicate that removal will be slightly difficult when installed laterally in succession.

69
S1DXM-A/M/S1DX COMMON OPTIONS
HC relay terminal sockets
Applicable timers
Name/Part No. Dimensions Terminal layout Mounting hole dimensions S1DX(2c) S1DX(4c)
S1DXM(2c) S1DXM(4c)
• Terminal socket, HC Screw hole: 2-M3.5
Oval hole: 2-4.2×5 (or φ 4.2±0.1 hole)
2-pin .165×.197 Terminal screw M3
6.2 (or φ .165±.004 hole)
12 .244 17.5 1 5 9 13
.472 .689 12 20 12
.472 .787 .472

40
40 1.575 Not
1.575 Available
available
5
.197
30 30
1.181 1.181
2 .079
30 15
HC2-SF-K 1.181 .591
For general rails

4 8 12 14 Drilling size of panel holes for installing

Note) Only wire springs can be used. the terminal sockets parallel
(Plate springs cannot be used.)
Oval hole: 2-4.2×9
• High terminal socket, .165×.354 Terminal screw M3
9.5 .374

HC 1-, 2- and 4-pin 2 6 10 22.5 22.5

22.5 28.6 .886 .886
.886 1.126 1 5 9 13

53.5 67
2.106 2.638

53.5 67
2.106 2.638
Screw Available Available
hole
size 30 30
1.181 1.181
2 .079
Screw hole: 2-M3.5
6.2 9 16 8 (or φ 4.2±0.1 hole)
.244 .354 .630 .315 (or φ .165±.004 hole)
HC4-HSF-K 30 27.8 4 8 12
1.181 1.094 14 Drilling size of panel holes for installing
Note) Only wire springs can be used. 3 7 11 the terminal sockets parallel
(Plate springs cannot be used.)

• Slim DIN terminal 15± 0.6

socket, HC2 .591± .024
13.5± 0.2
Terminal screw M3 4 1
.531± .008 20± 0.6
.787± .024 9 .354
8 5 15± 0.2 15± 0.2
.591± .008 .591± .008
4.1± 0.2
.161 ± .008

6.3± 0.2
57± 1
2.244 ± .039
67 Screw hole: 2-M3.5 Not
.248 ± .008 35.4± 0.5 2.638
(or φ 4.2±0.1 hole) Available
6.4± 0.2 67± 1
2.638 ±.039
1.394± .020
57±±0.5 available
.252 ± .008 2± 0.15
.079 ± .006 8± 0.2
2.244 .020 (or φ .165±.004 hole)
± .008
.315

22 22
12 9
HC2-SFD-S 6.2± 0.3
6± 0.3
.866 .866
4.2± 0.3 .244 ± .012 2 .079
.165± .012 .236 ± .012
28.5± 0.6
22± 0.6
.866 ± .024 1.122± .024
14 13

• DIN high terminal

4 1
socket, HC2 26±0.6
1.024 ±.024
Terminal screw M3
13.35±0.2 21±0.6
.526 ±.008 .827±.024
8 5
For DIN rails

4.1±0.2
.161 ±.008 10 .394 Not
6.3±0.2 67±1 Available
.248 ±.008
6.4±0.2
2.638±.039 available
.252±.008 2±0.15 4.2±0.3 26 26
.079 ±.006 .165 ±.012
1.024 1.024

HC2-SFD-K 6 12 9
.236 67
30±0.6
1.181±.024 2.638
14 13 33.5
1.319

• DIN high terminal 26±0.6 4 3 2 1

socket, HC4 1.024 ±.024
13.35±0.2
30 30
.526 ±.008 Terminal screw M3 1.181 1.181
4.45±0.2 21±0.6
8 7 6 5 4 .157
.175±.008 .827±.024
Screw hole: 2-M3.5
(or φ 4.2±0.1 hole)
(or φ .165±.004 hole)

4.1±0.2
Drilling size of panel holes for installing
.161±.008
6.3±0.2 67±1
Available Available
.248 ±.008 2.638±.039 the terminal sockets parallel
6.4±0.2
.252±.008 2±0.15 4.2±0.3
.079±.006 ±.012
.165

HC4-SFD-K
6
.236
12 11 10 9
30±0.6
1.181±.024
14 13

70
 S1DXM-A/M/S1DX COMMON OPTIONS
HJ relay terminal sockets
Applicable timers
Name/Part No. Dimensions Terminal layout Mounting hole dimensions S1DX(2c) S1DX(4c)
S1DXM(2c) S1DXM(4c)
• HJ2 terminal socket M3 .118
30
1.181
terminal screw 16.5
2-M4.2×5 .165×5 .650 4 1
mounting holes 3.4±0.3
.134±.012
4 1 8 5

8 5

72±1
2.835±.039
Not
35.4 15±0.2 Available
59±1
2.323±.039
1.394 .591±.008 available
12 9

4 12 9
.157
14 13
14 13
6±0.3
22 .236±.012
HJ2-SFD .866
59±0.3
2.323±.012
• HJ2 terminal socket M3 .118
30
1.181
16.5
(Finger protect type) 2-M4.2×5 .165×5 terminal screw
.650
3.4±0.3
4 1
mounting holes
.134±.012
4 1 8 5

8 5
2-M3 .118 or M4 .157
72±1
2.835±.039 or 4.5 .177 dia. hole Not
35.4 Available
59±1
2.323±.039
1.394 available
12 9

4 12 9
.157
14 13
14 13
6±0.3
22 .236±.012
HJ2-SFD-S .866

30
• HJ4 terminal socket M3 .118 1.181
terminal screw 16.5
2-M4.2×5 .165×5 .650
mounting holes 3.4±0.3 3 2 1
.134±.012
3 2 1
8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

72±1
2.835±.039 35.4±0.5
1.394±.020
22±0.2 Available Available
59±1
2.323±.039
.866±.008
12 11 10 9

12 11 10 9
4 14 13
Lot No.
6±0.3 4 14 13
.236±.012
HJ4-SFD 29
1.142 59±0.3
2.323±.012
30
• HJ4 terminal socket M3 .118 1.181
18
(Finger protect type) 2-M4.2×5 .165×5 terminal screw
.709
3.4±0.3 3 2 1
mounting holes
.134±.012
3 2 1
8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5
2-M3 .118 or M4 .157
72±1
2.835±.039 or 4.5 .177 dia. hole
59 ±1
35.4
1.394
Available Available
2.323±.039

12 11 10 9

4
.157 12 11 10 9
4 14 13
Lot No.
6±0.3 4 14 13
.236±.012
HJ4-SFD-S 29
1.142

71
S1DXM-A/M/S1DX COMMON OPTIONS
Sockets
Applicable timers
Name/Order No. Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions S1DX(2c) S1DX(4c)
S1DXM(2c) S1DXM(4c)
• Socket, HC 2-pin • The difference between the HC2 and HC4 • The thickness of applicable chassis plates
sockets is only the number of the pins. Their ranges from 1.0 to 2.0 mm.
appearances and sizes are the same. • To install the socket easily, insert the socket
4.45 4.45 top surface into the drilled holes and press the
.175 .175
4.45
two points on the fastening plate indicated by
4.06
.160
.175 arrows as shown in the fig. below.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
29.4 6.35
1.157
9 10 11 12
25.2
.250
7.06 Not
.992
6.35
.250 1.27 .278 Available
13 14
.050
available

25.5
1.004
2.3
HC2-SS-K .091
16.55
.652
7.65
.301

21.2
.835

• Socket, HC 4-pin
General tolerance: ±0.5

4.45 4.45
.175 .175
4.45
4.06 .175
.160
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
29.4 6.35
1.157 .250
9 10 11 12
25.2 6.35 7.06 25.8
.278 1.016
13 14 .992 .250 1.27
.050
Available Available

25.5
1.004 21.6 5.9
2.3 .232
.091 .850
HC4-SS-K 16.55 The interval size between
.652
7.65 the sockets which are
.301 parallel installed.
21.2
.835
Dimensional tolerance of machining: ±0.1 ±.004
• Sockets for PC board
HC2 – Socket for PC board: AP3825K
HC4 – Socket for PC board: AP3845K

72
 PM5S-A/S/M
DIN24 SIZE PM5S-A
MULTI-RANGE PM5S-S
ANALOG TIMER
PM5S-M
C-UL File No.: E59504 (Vol. 3)
Features
• 24-240V AC/DC free-voltage input
• Built-in Screw terminals
• 6 different operation modes: (PM5S-A)
75.0
2.953 • Multiple time ranges — 1 s to 500 h (Max.)
• Slim body — DIN 22.5 mm .886 inch
• 0 setting instantaneous output operation
• UL/C-UL/CE approval

98.5
3.878
22.5 mm inch
.886

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Product types
Contact Protective Rated
Type Operation mode Time range Part number
arrangement construction operating voltage

6 operation modes
• Pulse ON-delay
• Pulse Flicker Relay
PM5S-A • Pulse ON-flicker Timed-out PM5S-A-24-240V
• Signal OFF-delay 2 Form C
• Pulse One-shot
• Pulse One-cycle

Relay 16 selectable
PM5S-S Power ON-delay Timed-out ranges IP40 24 to 240V AC/DC PM5S-S-24-240V
2 Form C 1s to 500h

6 operation modes
(With instantaneous contact)
Relay
• Pulse ON-delay
Timed-out
• Pulse Flicker PM5S-M-24-240V
PM5S-M 1 Form C
• Pulse ON-flicker
Instantaneous
• Signal OFF-delay
1 Form C
• Pulse One-shot
• Pulse One-cycle
Note: PM5S-M timer will be released soon.

Time range
Time unit PM5S-A/PM5S-S/PM5S-M
sec min hrs 10h All types of PM5S timer have multi-time
Scale
1 0.1s to 1s 0.1 min to 1 min 0.1h to 1h 1.0h to 10h range.
5 0.5s to 5s 0.5 min to 5 min 0.5h to 5h 5h to 50h 16 time ranges are selectable.
Control
time range 1s to 500h (Max. range) is controlled.
10 1.0s to 10s 1.0 min to 10 min 1.0h to 10h 10h to 100h
50 5s to 50s 5 min to 50 min 5h to 50h 50h to 500h
Note: 0 setting is for instantaneous output operation.

73
PM5S-A/S/M
Specifications
Item Type PM5S-A PM5S-S PM5S-M
Rated operating voltage 24 to 240V AC/DC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common
Rated power consumption 2.6 VA (AC), 1.4 W (DC)
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Rating Pulse ON-delay
Pulse ON-delay
Pulse Flicker
Pulse Flicker
Pulse ON-flicker
Pulse ON-Flicker
Operating mode Power ON-delay Signal OFF-delay
Signal OFF-delay
Pulse One-shot
Pulse One-shot
Pulse One-cycle
Pulse One-cycle
(with instantaneous contact)
Time range 1s to 500h (Max.) 16 time ranges switchable
Operating time fluctuation ±0.3% (power off time change at the range of 0.1s to 1h)
Time Setting error ±10% (Full-scale value)
accuracy
Note:) Voltage error ±0.5% (at the operating voltage changes between 85 to 110%)
Temperature error ±2% (at 20°C ambient temp. at the range of –10 to +55°C +14 to +131°F)
Timed-out 1 Form C
Contact arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C
Instantaneous 1 Form C
Contact
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 100mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Contact material Silver alloy Au flash on Silver alloy
Mechanical (contact) 2×107 1×107
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage (at 20°C coil temp.)
Between live and dead metal parts
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ (At 500V DC)
Between contacts of different poles
Between contacts of same pole
Electrical
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between live and dead metal parts
function
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value)
2,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of different poles
1,000Vrms for 1 min Between contacts of same pole
Min. power off time 100ms
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F 65°C 149°F
Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Mechanical Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
function Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min Single amplitude of 0.35mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min Single amplitude of 0.75mm (1h on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +55°C +14 to +131°F
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85%RH (non-condensing)
condition Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1,060hPa
Ripple factor (DC) 20%
Protective construction IP40
Others
Weight 120g 4.233 oz
Note: 1) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating voltage (within 5% ripple
factor for DC), 20°C 68°F ambient temperature, and 1s power off time.
2) For the 1s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±10ms.

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

PM5S-A PM5S-S
• Timed-out 2 Form C • Timed-out 2 Form C

PM5S-M Contact
• Timed-out 1 Form C
• Instantaneous 1 Form C

Timed-out contact Instantaneous contact

74
 PM5S-A/S/M
Mode selection
PM5S-A/M type
A1 15 25

PWR ON
Operation mode indicator
OUT Selectable from 8 operation modes
ON: ON-delay
4 6 FL: Flicker
2 8 FO: ON-flicker
SF: Signal OFF-delay
0 10
OS: Pulse One-shot
OC: Pulse One-cycle

S L Sec The 6 operation modes of PM5S-A and PM5S-M

can be selected by the operation mode selector
switch. In the next pages the different modes will
PM5S
be explained.

28 26 B1

18 16 A2

Dimensions mm inch
PM5S-

75.0
2.953
PM5S
10

A2
B1
25

ON

Sec
6

22.5
16
26
15

.886
PWR

OUT

L
2
A1

18
28
0

75.0
9.0 2.953 9.0 5.0
.354 48.0 .354 .197
1.890

14.2
.559

PM5S MULTIRANGE TIMER 41.3

ATD1217 PM5S-A-24-240V 1.626

98.5
3.878

3.5
.138

20
.787
37.5
1.476

75
PM5S-A/S/M
Operation mode  LED lighting LED flickering 
PM5S-A/M T: Setting time t1, t2<T 
Operation type Operation Time chart
Turn the operation selector to ON .
Timing operation starts when terminals A1 – B1 are connected while
power is on. Control output is turned on after the set time regardless Power supply
ON
of duration of operation signal Signal A1-B1
ON

ON-delay
Relay output
ON (NO contact) ON
T T
OUT. LED
POWER LED

Turn the operation selector to FL .

Timing operation starts when terminals A1 – B1 are connected while
power is on. Control output repeatedly turn OFF and ON regardless Power supply
ON
of operation signal input time. Signal A1-B1
ON

Flicker
Relay output
FL (NO contact) ON
T T t1 T t2
OUT. LED
POWER LED

Turn the operation selector to FO .

Timing operation starts when terminals A1 – B1 are connected while
power is on. Control output repeatedly turns ON and OFF regardless Power supply
ON
of operation signal input time. Signal A1-B1
ON

ON-flicker
Relay output
FO (NO contact) ON
T T t1 T T
OUT. LED
POWER LED

Turn the operation selector to SF .

Timing operation starts when terminals A1 – B1 are opened while
power is on. Control output is turned off after the set time. Power supply
ON
If the signal input turns OFF during timing operation, the timing oper- Signal A1-B1
ON
ation starts at that point again.
Signal
OFF-delay
Relay output
SF (NO contact) ON
T t1 t2
OUT. LED
POWER LED

Turn the operation selector to OS .

Timing operation starts when terminals A1 – B1 are connected while
power is ON. Power supply
ON
Control output continues ON state while timing operation. Signal A1-B1
ON

One-shot
Relay output
OS (NO contact) ON
T T T t1
OUT. LED
POWER LED

Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.

Keep 0.05s or more for signal, input time.

76
 PM5S-A/S/M
Operation type Operation Time chart
Turn the operation selector to OC .
Timing operation starts when terminals A1 – B1 are connected while
power is ON. Power supply
ON
Control output is turned on after the set time, the pulse is 0.5 to 1.0 s. Signal A1-B1
ON
0.5-1.0S
One-cycle
Relay output
OC (NO contact)
T T t1
OUT. LED
POWER LED

Note: Keep 0.1s or more for power off time.

Keep 0.05s or more for signal, input time.

 LED lighting LED flickering 

PM5S-S T: Setting time 

Operation type Operation Time chart

When power is applied continuously, the time cycle begins. The out-
Power supply
put contacts change state after the time delay is completed. ON

Time-out relay output

ON
(NO contact) T
Power ON-delay

OUT. LED
POWER LED

Modes and time setting

1) Operation mode setting [PM5S-A]
6 operation modes are selectable with
operation mode selector.
Turn the operation mode selector with
screw driver.
Operation mode is shown up through the
window above the mode selector. The
marks are ON , FL , FO , SF , OS , OC . Turn
the mode selector to the mark until you
can check by clicking sound.
Confirm the mode selector position if it is
correct.
If the position is not stable, the timer
might mis-operate.
PM5S
2) Time setting [common] 3) Time setting [common]
16 time ranges are selectable between To set the time, turn the set dial to a
1s to 500h. desired time within the range.
Turn the time range selector with the Instantaneous output will be on when the
screw driver. dial is set to “0”.
Clockwise turning increases the time When the instantaneous output is used,
range, and Counter-clockwise turning the dial should be set under “0” range.
decrease the time range. (Instantaneous output area)
Confirm the range selector position if it is When power supply is on, the time
correct. range, setting time and operation mode
cannot be changed.
Turn off the power supply is applied to
set the new operation mode.
To set the time in the range, turn the dial
to a desired time scale. Do not turn the
dial beyond the stopper.
• Cautions for Time setting/Operating
mode setting
1) Time chart
• T shots setting time, t1 and t2 means
the time in setting time. (t1, t2<T)
• When the output relay is turned on, No
PM5S
contact is closed and NC contact is
opened.
• LED indication shows “Turn ON”
2) Timing operation starts when power is
applied to terminals A1 – B1
Input signal time should be taken over
0.05 sec.
Short-circuited condition: Max. 1kΩ
Open-circuited condition: Min. 100kΩ

77
PM5S-A/S/M
Input connections Mounting and dismounting
The inputs of the PM5S-A/M are voltage (voltage imposition or The PM5S should be mounted as horizontally as possible.
open) inputs. When mounting the PM5S on a socket mounting track, hook
No-contact input Contact input portion (A) of the Timer to an edge of the track first, and then
(Connection to PNP output sensor.) depress the Timer in the direction of (B).
Sensor
(A)

Timer Timer

B1 A1 B1 A1
Start Start
24 V DC A2 A2
(B)

Operates with transistor ON Operates with relay ON

Voltage Input Signal Levels When dismounting the PM5S pull out portion (C) with a flat-
1. Transistor ON blade screwdriver and remove the Timer from the mounting
Residual voltage: 1 V max. track.
(Voltage between terminals B1 and A2 must be more than the rated
No-contact “H-level” voltage (20.4 V DC min.).)
input 2. Transistor OFF
Leakage current: 0.01 mA max.
(Voltage between terminals B1 and A2 must be less than the rated
“L-level” voltage (2.5 V DC max.).)
Use contacts that can adequately switch 0.1 mA at each voltage to
be imposed. (When the contacts are ON or OFF, voltage between
Contact
terminals B1 and A2 must be within the following ranges:
input
When contacts are ON: 20.4 to 264 V AC/DC (C)
When contacts are OFF: 0 to 2.5 V AC/DC Rail stopper

Cautions for use

Cautions
1) Prevent using the timer in such places
where flammable or corrosive gas is
generated, a lot of dust exisits, oil is
splashed or considerable shock and
vibration occur.
2) Since the body cover is consisted of
polycarbonate resin, prevent from con-
tact with organic solvents such as methyl
alcohol, benzine and thinner, or strong
alkali materials such as ammonia and
caustic soda.

Power supplies
The PM5S Series is provided with a For the power supply of the input device, • Input and Power supply circuit
transformerless power supply system. use a single-phase or double-phase (PM5S-A/M)
An electric shock may be received if the insulated power transformer. The sec-
input terminal or the output type selector ond-phase side must not be grounded.
B1 A1
switch is touched while power is being
supplied. A1 Power supply Power supply
AC/DC Input circuit
circuit
Use the bar terminal for wiring the B1
PM5S Power supply
PM5S. Using a stranded-wire terminal Start
A2
input
may cause a short-circuit due to a stray A2
wire entering into the Timer. • Since input circuit and power supply
Rectifier
circuit

Circuit circuit is independent, it is possible to

switch ON and OFF for input circuit
Isolation tranformer is required.
regardless power ON and OFF.
Note that the contact of input circuit is
given same voltage as power voltage.

78

Terminal connections
• Refer to the terminal layout and wiring
diagram and securely connect the
terminals accordingly.
• Do not allow control output to exceed
rated control capacity.
1. When one input signal is simultane-
ously applied to more than one timer, be
sure to avoid the wiring shown in Fig. A.
Otherwise, the short-circuit current will
flow and cause damage. Be sure to align
the polarity of the power supply as
shown in Fig. B.
2. External surge protection may be
required if the following values are
exceeded. Otherwise, the internal circuit
will be damaged.
Operating voltage
Surge voltage
Surge wave form [±(1.2×50)µs single
polarity full wave voltage]
100
90
PM5S-A/S/M
3. For connecting and disconnecting
operating voltage to the timer, a circuit
should be used to prevent the flow of
leakage current. For example, a circuit
for contact protection as shown in Fig. C
24 to 240 V AC will permit leakage current to flow
4,000 V through R and C, causing erroneous
operation of the timer. Instead, the circuit
shown in Fig. D should be used.
No good Good
Leak current

Crest value (%)

R
Contact or transistor for Crest value Power T Power T
external input signal R C
50 supply supply C
A1
30
B1 Power
(Fig. C) (Fig. D)
PM5S
Incorrect supply 0
0 1.2 50
A2 Time (µs) 4. In order to maintain the characteristics
Short-circuit
current of the timer, long continuous current flow
A1
through the timer, causing generation of
B1
PM5S
heat internally should be avoided
because of the degradation it can cause.
A2 Fig. A For such long continuous operation, the
circuit shown below should be used.
Contact or transistor for
external input signal
A1

B1 Power R T R
PM5S
Correct supply
R: contacts of
relay

R
A2 R Relay T Time
Short-circuit
current
A1

B1
PM5S

A2 Fig. B

The PM5S series is provided with a

transformer less power supply system.

79
 COMPACT SIZE
HIGH PRECISION POWER
ON-DELAY TIMERS
PMH Timers

UL File No.: E59504 CSA File No.: LR39291

Features
1. Various time range ..... 4 ranges in each type
Button 1
10
1
10

position
50 M M
1.969 Type S S

10min type 1S 10S 1M 10M

30min type 3S 30S 3M 30M
56.7 10h type 1M 10M 1H 10H
2.232 30h type 3M 30M 3H 30H
36
1.417
mm inch 2. 2 output types available ........... PMH type: Relay Timed-out 2 Form C
3. Indicator LED is provided for operation
RoHS Directive compatibility information 4. UL/CSA recognized type available for PMH timers
http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
PMH Timers
Type
AC operating type DC operating type
Rated operating voltage 100 to 120V, 200 to 240V 12V, 24V
Rated frequency 50/60Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 3VA Max. 2W
Rated control capacity 7A 250V AC (resistive load)
[Except 1s range] : ±0.5%
Operating time fluctuation &
[1s range] : ±(0.5%+10ms)
Power off time change error
Time (power oft time change at the range of 0.1 s to 1h)
accuracy Temperature error ±5%
(max.) [Except 1s range] : ±0.5%
Voltage error
[1s range] : ±(0.5%+10ms)
Setting error ±10% (Full-scale value)
Output arrangement Timed-out 2 Form C
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 50mΩ (By voltage drop 6V DC 1A)
Expected life Mechanical (contact) 5 × 107
(min. operations) Electrical (contact) 2 × 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 80 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Between input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100MΩ Between contact sets (At 500V DC)
Between contacts
2000Vrms for 1min Between input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2000Vrms for 1min Between contact sets
1000Vrms for 1min Between contact
Min. power off time 100ms
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.75mm (1h on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Ambient temperature –10 to 50°C +14 to 122°F
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Full-wave rectified
Power supply ripple —
(Approx. 48%)

Product types
ORDERING INFORMATION Ex. PMH — 10M — AC120V

Timer type Time range Rated operating voltage

10M 0.05 to 1s 0.5 to 10s 0.05 to 1min 0.5 to 10min AC120V: 100 to 120V AC
30M 0.15 to 3s 1.5 to 30s 0.15 to 3min 1.5 to 30min AC220V: 200 to 240V AC*
PMH Timer
10H 0.05 to 1min 0.5 to 10min 0.05 to 1h 0.5 to 10h DC12V: 12V DC
30H 0.15 to 3min 1.5 to 30min 0.15 to 3h 1.5 to 30h DC24V: 24V DC

80
 PMH·PMH-M
Dimensions mm inch

50 34 dia. 59
1.969 1.339 dia. 2.323

0.5
.2
36 66.1 14.2
1.417 2.602 .559

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

NC NO NC

4 5
NO 3 6
2 7
1 8 : Timed cut contact
COM COM
Operating : Instantaneous contact
(–) (+)
voltage Note: For the DC type, the No. 2 terminal becomes (–).

Operation T: Set time

Power ON-delay

Set time
ON OFF
Power supply
Timed-out ON
OFF
contact NO
Timed-out OFF ON
contact NC

Notes :• Set time should be greater than min. operation time.

• Once power is cut off or the timing operation is completed, min. power off time of 0.1s is needed to start the operation again.
• Do not change the set time during operation. When changing set time, cut off power and set the time.

Cautions
1. Prevent using the timer in such places Surge wave form [ ± (1x40) single polarity full wave 4. Do not attempt to turn the setting knob
voltage]
where flammable or corrosive gas is 100 beyond the stops.
90
generated, a lot of dust exists, oil is 5. When a contact switch having an
Surge vollage (%)

Wave peak value

splashed or considerable shock and operation indicating lamp (lamp

vibration occur. 50 equipped limit switch, etc.) is used to
2. Since the main body cover is made of apply power to the timer, a resistor hav-
30
polycarbonate resin, prevent contact with ing a value equal to or greater than the
organic solvents such as methyl alcohol, values given below should be connected
0
benzine and thinner, or strong alkali 0 1 Time ( 40 in series with the lamp.
)
materials such as ammonia and caustic AC 120V type: Max. 33kΩ
soda. In order to maintain the character- Operating voltage Surge voltage AC 220V type: Max. 82kΩ
istics of the timer, do not remove the 100 to 120V AC 4,000V
case. Install in accordance with the 200 to 240V AC
or 4,000V Resister
intended use. Furthermore, do not 200 to 220V AC
loosen the 4 screws in the base section. 12V DC 500V
Neon lamp
T
3. External surge protection may be 24V DC 500V
required if the following values are
exceeded. Otherwise, the internal circuit
The following Limit Switches with lamps can be used:
will be damaged. VL with lamps, Vertical type with lamp, ML with lamp

81
 COMPACT SIZE
POWER ON-DELAY
MHP·MHP-M
MOTOR TIMERS Timers
UL File No.: E59504
CSA File No.: LR39291
Features
50
1.969
1. Highly reliable with bifucated contacts and block construction
2. Various time range types selectable
3. Two output types available ........ MHP timers : Timed-out 1 Form C
MHP-M timers : Timed-out 1 Form C
56.7 Instantaneous 1 Form A
36 2.232
1.417 4. Flush-mountable with mounting accessory
mm inch
5. UL/CSA and LLOYD recognized type available
RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Type MHP timers MHP-M timers
Rated operating voltage 120V AC, 220V AC, 240V AC
Rated frequency 50Hz or 60Hz (other model)
Rated power consumption Max. 4VA
Rated control capacity 5A 250V AC (resistive load)
Operating time fluctuation ±2% of max. scale
Output arrangement Timed-out 1 Form C Timed-out 1 Form C, Instantaneous 1 Form A
Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. 50mΩ (at 1A 6V DC)
Life Mechanical (contact) 107
(min. operations) Electrical (contact) 4 × 105 (at rated control capacity)
Allowable operating voltage range 80 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Min. 100MΩ Min. 100MΩ
Between live and dead metal parts Between live and dead metal parts/input and output
Insulation resistance (Initial value)
Between contact sets (At 500V DC) Between contact sets (At 500V DC)
Between contacts Between contacts
2000Vrms for 1min Between live and dead metal parts 2000Vrms for 1min Between live and dead metal parts/input and output
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2000Vrms for 1min Between contact sets 2000Vrms for 1min Between contact sets
1000Vrms for 1min Between contacts 1000Vrms for 1min Between contacts
Min. power off time 300 ms (Max. setting time value)
Functional 10 to 55Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.3mm (10min on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 16.7Hz: double amplitude of 4mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 147m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Ambient temperature –10 to 50°C +14 to 122°F
Ambient humidity 30 to 85% RH (non-condensing)

Product types
ORDERING INFORMATION
Ex. MHP- NM — 5S AC120V 60Hz

Time range *
Timer type Operating voltage Operating frequency
50Hz type 60Hz type
5S 0.2 to 6s 0.2 to 5s
10S 0.3 to 12s 0.3 to 10s
30S 1 to 36s 1 to 30s
60S 2 to 72s 2 to 60s
3M 0.1 to 3.5min 0.1 to 3min
6M 0.2 to 7min 0.2 to 6min AC120V: 120V AC
N: MHP Timers 50Hz: 50Hz type
12M 0.3 to 14min 0.3 to 12min AC220V: 220V AC
NM: MHP-M Timers 60Hz: 60Hz type
30M 1 to 36min 1 to 30min AC240V: 240V AC
60M 2 to 72 min 2 to 60min
3H 0.1 to 3.5h 0.1 to 3h
6H 0.2 to 7h 0.2 to 6h
12H 0.3 to 14h 0.3 to 12h
24H 0.5 to 28h 0.5 to 24h
*3H, 6H, 12H and 24H types unavailable in MHP timers.
Cadmium free contact types are available on a custom-made basis. Please add an “F” to the end of the part number when ordering.

82
 MHP·MHP-M
Dimensions mm inch

50 34 DIA. 59
1.969 1.339 DIA. 2.323

0.5
.020
36 66.1 14.2
1.417 2.602 .559

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

1. MHP type 2. MHP-M type
NC NC
NO NO

4 5 4 5 COM: Common terminal

Timed out Timed out
3 6 contact 3 6 contact NC: Normally closed contact
2 Instantaneous 2 7
7 contact NO: Normally open contact
1 8 1 8
COM
COM : Timed out contact
Operating Operating : Instantaneous contact
voltage voltage

Operation
1. MHP type 2. MHP-M type
Power ON-delay Power ON-delay with instantaneous contact

Power supply ON Power supply ON

2 7 W-U
OFF OFF
T
Timed-out ON
T
contact NO OFF
ON
Timed-out
contract NO Timed-out ON
OFF
contact NC OFF

ON Instantaneous ON
Timed-out contact NO OFF
contract NC
OFF

Notes: • Set time should be greater than min. operation time.

• Once power is cut off or the timing operation is completed, min. power off time is needed to start the operation again.
• Do not change the set time during operation. When changing set time, cut off power and set the time.

Cautions
1. Prevent using the timer in such places 3. Do not make direct solder connections
where flammable or corrosive gas is to the round pins.
generated, a lot of dust exists, oil is 4. Do not attempt to turn the setting knob
splashed or considerable shock and beyond the stops.
vibration occur. 5. Avoid long time continuous current
2. Since the main body cover is made of flow operation. For long time current
polycarbonate resin, prevent contact flow operation, a type is available with
with organic solvents such as methyl separate connection for the motor
alcohol, benzine and thinner, or strong clutch.
alkali materials such as ammonia and
NC Application example
caustic soda. In order to maintain the
NO
characteristics of the timer, do not 4 5 8
3 6 8
remove the case. Install in accordance 2 7 5 Use when power will be continuous for long periods of time.
6
with the intended use. Furthermore, 1 8 COM 4 2 Timed-out output arrangement is 1a in this case.
TM TC L Please add “71” to the end of the part number when ordering.
do not loosen the 4 screws in the base Operating 7 7
voltage (for clutch use)
section.
Operating voltage TM Timer motor
(for motor use)
TC Time clutch

83
COMPACT SIZE TIMER COMMON OPTIONS
Flush Type
1. Flush type mounting frame

Front View Mounting Hole Dimensions (Unit: mm inch)

Appearance Color Part number (Installing onto Recommended Hole Applicable Mounting Hole
control panel) (For newly designed frame) (For installing in the old hole)

Gray AT7851 48
62.8 1.890 R: 2 .079
2.472 R: 2 .079
50.5 +0.5
0
or 55 +0.5
0
or
1.988 +.020
0 less 2.165 +.020
0 less
58
Black AT7852 2.283

43.5 +0.5
0
45 +0.5
0
1.713 +.020
0
1.772 +.020
0

Silver
AT7853 *Distance between parallel *Distance between parallel
Gray
drilled holes: 6.5 mm or more drilled holes: 5 mm or more

Gray AT7811 48
62.8
2.472 1.890 R: 2 .079
53 ± 0.3 or
2.087 ± .012 less
58
Black AT7812 2.283
39 ± 0.3
1.535 ± .012
Silver
AT7813 *Distance between parallel
Gray
drilled holes: 11 mm or more
2- φ 4.5 2- φ 4.5
50 2- φ .177 2- φ .177
62.8 Gray AT7821 1.969
2.472 R: 2 .079 62 ±0.1 R: 2 .079
R: 2 .079 62 ± 0.1 R: 2 .079
53 ±0.3 or 2.441 ±.004 or 2.441 ±.004 or
50.5 +0.5 or
2.087 ±.012 less 53 ±0.3 less
1.988
0
+ .020
less 51 ±0.3 less
±.012 0
74 2.087 2.008 ±.012
Black AT7822 2.913
39 ± 0.3 39 ± 0.3 43.5 +0.5
1.535 ± .012
0 44 ± 0.3
1.535 ± .012 1.713 +.020
0 1.732 ± .012
Silver *Distance between *Distance between *Distance between
AT7823 *Distance between parallel parallel drilled holes: parallel drilled holes: parallel drilled holes:
Gray
drilled holes: 13 mm or more 13 mm or more 8.5 mm or more 8 mm or more
2-φ 4.5
58 2-φ .177
62.8 2.283
2.472

76 +0.1 R: 2 .079
2.992 +.004 or
±0.3
Gray AT7831 53 less
88 2.087 ±.012
3.465

39 ± 0.3
1.535 ±.012
*Distance between parallel
drilled holes: 21 mm or more
2- φ 4.5
58 2- φ .177
62.8 2.283
2.472 R: 2 .079
R: 2 .079
76 +0.1 or or
2.992 +.004
less 66 ±0.3 less
66 ± 0.3 2.598 ±.012
Gray AT7841 88 2.598 ± .012
3.465

52 ± 0.3 44 ±0.3
2.047 ± .012 1.732 ±.012
*Distance between parallel *Distance between parallel
drilled holes: 8 mm or more drilled holes: 16 mm or more
Notes:
1. The thickness of all applicable panels ranges from 1.0 to 3.5 mm .039 to .138 inch.
2. * indicates the distance between the mounting holes which are parallel cut on the panel.

84

Installation
1. Insert the mounting frame surface
into the panel from its front surface.
Note: The panel which is
installed onto the flush type
mounting frame for the timer
cannot be inserted.
(However, the installation
order is not specified when
the flush type mounting
frame (type S) is used.)
COMPACT SIZE TIMER COMMON OPTIONS
2. After installing the panel, insert the
timer to be used from the back of the
When an applicable timer comes in con-
panel.
tact with the collar of the mounting
frame, stop the timer by pressing the
upper and lower hooks in the direction
indicated by arrow. Use the terminal
socket at the back (AT78041) or the 8P
cap (AD8-RC) for the connection wiring.

3. Hang the hooks on the timer base

to secure the timer to the flush type
mounting frame.
Arm Arm
Hook Hook

8P cap
Terminal socket
at the back

Removal
Remove the timer in the reverse order of installation.

Compact timer Installation Dimensions (Unit: mm, inch)

Tolerance: ±0.3 ±.012
protective cover Rib Frame

1
.039
Protective
cover

45.6
1.795

Rib 1
.039

Press the points on the protective cover 40

1.575
N-TC (indicated by arrows) to bend the ribs,
11.6
and hook the ribs inside the mounting .457

Features frame window. The protective cover can

1. The cover prevents the timer from be installed if the timer is inserted into
operating improperly after setting the the mounting frame.
time. It also works as a compact dust
cover.
2. The cover is applicable for all types
of the fingertip flush type mounting
frames for the compact timer.

• 8P cap When a flush type mounting frame is used for The dimensions B and C are • Rear terminal socket: M3.5
the exposed type, 8P cap should be installed. shown in the table below. The terminal socket can be used for two
(Unit: mm, inch) installation methods for the back and the
When installing 8P cap:
front!
Mounting plate Mounting frame Dimension Dimension Tolerance: ±0.1 ±.004
34.6
1.362 to be used B C
8p cap
Type H
φ 31.5 φ 30 13.1 52.8 21
φ 1.240 φ 1.181
Frame Timer Type K .827

Type MHP
38 41
10
.394
Type MHP-M 14.6 51.3 1.496 1.614
AD8-RC Type S
B C 34.6
1.362 AT78041

85
COMPACT SIZE TIMER COMMON OPTIONS
The protective cover is applicable for the exposed type plug-in and stand-up
type timers (PMH, MHP-M, MHP)
• Compact timer DIN terminal socket: M3.5
Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020 When installing the Mounting hole dimensions Wiring diagrams
terminal socket: Without DIN rails (TOP VIEW)
Wire holding clip

2-M4 2-M.157 screw hole 6 5 4 3

(or φ 4.2±0.1 φ .165±.004 hole)

24.5
.965 All types of our Approx.
Approx. 87.2
91.6
compact size 3.606
3.433 A 71
2.795
±0.2 7 8 1 2
timers can 34±.008
1.339
71
2.795 37.2 beeasily installed Note: Terminal
1.465
on the DIN rail by number on the
AT8-RFD using this termi- 40 1.575 main body are
37.2
nal socket. The height of the DIN rail should 1.465 The minimum distance
between the holes which
identical to those
be added to the overall height A.
areparallel drilled. on the terminal
socket.

• Compact size round terminal socket: M35

Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020
Installing the Mounting hole dimensions Wiring diagrams
Wire holding terminal socket 2-M4 2-M.157 screw hole (TOP VIEW)
clip (or φ 4.2±0.1 φ .165±.004 hole)

6 5 4 3

72
2.835
±0.2
34±.008
20 1.339
.787
72 7 8 1 2
2.835
38
1.496 40 1.575 Note: Terminal number
AT8-RFV 38
1.496 The minimum distance on the main body are
between the holes which
areparallel drilled. identical to those on
the terminal socket.

• GT pipe socket • Holding clip for stand-up GT pipe

Tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020 Tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039 Installing the Mounting hole
2-3.2 × 6 Fixing hole
2-.087 × 6
holding clip dimensions
2-M3 2-M.118
Approx. 60 screw hole
33 2.362 (or φ 3.5 φ .138
1.299 hole)
4.8
.189 63
2.480
16 Approx.
.630 64 39
2.520 φ 30 φ 1.181 hole 1.535
39
1.535
48.4
1.906
AT7808
AW68102 Use the M3 Pitch for installing the
screws for timer
installation. When installing the clips
vertically, the pitch for
the timer should be 79
mm or more.

• Mounting rail (Applicable for DIN, IEC standards) • Fastening plate

±1 ± .039 50
1,000 39.37
5.5 12 M4 1.969
.217 .472 M.157
2.75R .108R
10
5 15 10 15 15 10 15 5 .394
.197 .591 .394 .591 .591 .394 .591 .197
Oval hole: 40-5.5x15 .217x.591
10
UP

ATA4806 .394
35 24 27
1.378 .945 1.5 1.063 ATA4806
.059

AT8-DLA1 7.5
.295
Length: 1 m
Aluminum

86
TIME SWITCHES TIME SWITCHES
CHART SELECTOR CHART
A-TB72 series A-TB72 series
Perform-
Control cycle Setting Input/Output DIN72 size time switch DIN72 size time switch
ance Name (AC type, with quartz power failure (AC type, with quartz power failure
compensation) compensation)
Drive Operation set at Timer CE markings supported CE markings supported
24 hours
method 15-min. intervals output mode

Illustration
Quartz Panel attachment model Direct-attachment model
power-
With solder/tab terminal DIN rails supported
failure
compensa- 72 92
tion type
72 32 75.2 35

With power With power

AC type failure AC type failure
compensation compensation
• DIN72 size with in-panel dimensions • Can be attached directly to panel;
Principal features Ultra-thin at 27.2 mm 1.071 inch DIN rails supported
A-TB72Q A-TB72Q A-TB72Q • Setting dial built into outer periphery • Setting dial built into outer periphery
Quartz motor Quartz motor
Drive method AC motor type AC motor type
type type
100 VAC 100 VAC
ATB71014 100 VAC - 240 V ATB71224 100 VAC - 240 V
Voltage
Power 200 VAC ATB75017 200 VAC ATB75227
supply ATB71015 ATB71225
50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz
Frequency For 50 Hz/60 Hz For 50 Hz/60 Hz
(switchable) (switchable)
Power failure compensation time — 200 hours — 200 hours
Rated power consumption 1.5 W max. 1 W max. 1.5 W max. 1 W max.
AC motor Monthly variation Lunar equation
type Synchronized to Synchronized to
±15 s ±15 s
Time precision power supply power supply
(average 25°C (average 25°C
frequency frequency
77°F) 77°F)
No. of circuits 1 circuit 1 circuit 1 circuit 1 circuit
Circuit configuration Separate circuit Separate circuit Separate circuit Separate circuit
Cycle 24 hours 24 hours
Unipolar Unipolar Unipolar Unipolar
double-throw double-throw double-throw double-throw
Contact relay configuration

A-TB72 A-TB72 A-TB72

On: with On: with On: with On: with
Manual on/off switch
automatic switch automatic switch automatic switch automatic switch
Resistance load 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A
Incandescent
2A 2A 2A 2A
lamp load
Load
capacitance Induction load
10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
(cos φ = 0.7 min.)
Motor load 100 VAC 150 W 100 VAC 150 W 100 VAC 150 W 100 VAC 150 W
(cos φ = 0.7 min.) 200 VAC 200 W 200 VAC 200 W 200 VAC 200 W 200 VAC 200 W
Min. operation interval 15 min. 15 min. 15 min. 15 min.
Standard 96 Standard 96 Standard 96 Standard 96
operations operations operations operations
No. of on/off operations
Embedded Embedded Embedded Embedded
setting dial setting dial setting dial setting dial
Mass 120 g 100 g 190 g 170 g
Front protective Front protective
cover cover Front protective Front protective
Accessories
#187 flat #187 flat cover cover
connecting dial connecting dial
Page P. 88 P. 88

87
 A-TB72
FLAT TIME SWITCHES A-TB72·72Q

72
2.835

Part names
Manural switch Power status indicator: quartz
72 • Auto and manual modes are selectable power-failure compensation type.
2.835 for control. Frequency switchable: AC motor types.

Easy-to-read.
Flush mounting type
Directly read-
75.2
able clock.
2.961 • Present time is
trimmable every
1 minute.

Setting elements integrated at 15

minute intervals throughout the clock
circumference. ON settings are colored
90 • Load can be turned on and off every 15 minutes on the dial.
3.543 (maximum 48 ON and OFF actions per day), • Operation setting times are found
allowing minute daily time control. at a glance with red indicator.

Complies with CE marking

Surface mounting type

mm inch Quick
Space-saving.
mountable.
Depth in the box is less
RoHS Directive compatibility information
than 21.7mm .854inch.
http://www.nais-e.com/ (including the panel thickness.)

Features
1. DIN72 size smart time switch
Flush mounting type is as thin as 32mm
1.260inch and depth in the box is less
than 21.7mm .854inch.
2. Easy to read directly readable
clock.
3. Load can be turned on and off
every 15 minutes with the 96 setting
elements. Power supply Load DIN rail mounting possible
4. Quartz power-failure compensation terminals terminals
type commonly usable over 100 to
240V AC.
5. Complies with CE marking

Product types
Type Rated operating voltage Flush mounting type Surface mounting type
100V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-100V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-100V
110V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-110V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-110V
120V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-120V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-120V
AC motor type
200V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-200V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-200V
220V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-220V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-220V
240V AC A-TB72-D-HR1A-240V A-TB72-DD-HR1C-240V
Quartz power-failure compensation type 100 to 240V AC A-TB72-Q-HR1A-ACF A-TB72-QD-HR1C-ACF

88
 A-TB72·72Q
Specifications
Drive system AC motor type Quartz power-failure compensation quartz motor type
Types 100V AC, 110V AC, 120V AC
Voltage 100 to 240V AC
200V AC, 220V AC, 240V AC
Frequency 50/60Hz (Switchable) 50/60Hz (Common)
Power consumption 1.5W or less 1W or less
Circuit Input/output separate circuit
Manual ON/AUTO Manual switch provided
Load
Capacity
15A 250V AC
Rating (Resistive load)
System Built-in setting element swing type
Minimum unit 15-minute intervals
Setting
Ninimum range 15 minutes
No. of setting Max. 48 (ON/OFF)
Power failure compensation — 200 hours or more (at 25°C)
Clock accuracy Synchronous with power supply frequency Monthly error: Within ±15 seconds (at 25°C)
Time accuracy
ON clock accuracy ±5 min. (at 25°C), not including time synchronization errors
Contact arrangement Flush mounting type: 1 Form A, Surface mounting type: 1 Form C
Contact
Contact type Solder/tab common terminal: Flush mounting type, Crimp terminal or bare wires: Surface mounting type
specifications
Contact material Silver alloy
Mechanical life (contact) 105 times or more
Life
Electrical life (at rated load) 2 × 104 times or more (ON/OFF)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated voltage 80 to 110% of rated voltage
More than 100MΩ between charged and uncharged sections
Insulation resistance (initial)
More than 100MΩ between contacts (at 500V DC megger)
Electrical Between charged and uncharged sections: 1,500V AC/1 min.
Dielectric strength (initial)
characteristics Between contacts : 1,000V AC/1 min.
Surge resistance Surge voltage 7,000V (±1.2×50µs one time)
Noise resistance Noise simulator 2,000V Noise simulator 1,000V
Temperature rise 60°C or less (at 25°C)
Malfunctional vibration 10 to 55Hz (amplitude: 0.3mm) for 10 minutes in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
Mechanical Destructive vibration 16.7Hz (amplitude: 4.0mm) for 1 hour in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
characteristics Malfunctional shock 49m/s2 {5G} or more, 4 times in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
Destructive shock 490m/s2 {50G} or more, 5 times in each vertical, horizontal and lateral direction
Ambient Ambient operating temperature –10°C to +50°C +14°F to +122°F
conditions Ambient operating humidity 45 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight ( ) denotes Surface mounting type 120g 4.23oz (190g 6.70oz) 100g 3.53oz (170g 6.00oz)
Note) Protective cover is provided on A-TB72.

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

89
A-TB72·72Q
Dimensions mm inch

• Flush mounting type • Surface mounting type: M3.5

Quartz power-failure compensation:
75.2 2.961
Manual Present Dial with built-in Power supply indicator (Protective cover)
switch time setting elements AC motor type: Hz selection

(42.5)
ON-OFF (1.673)
position

72
75.2
72
2.835 2.961 2.835 90±0.2
(Protective cover) 90 3.543±.008
3.543
Knob

Arrow

Time setting Setting element

ON state 3-M4 screw hole

OFF state 65±0.2 3-M.157
2.559±.008 (or φ 4.2±0.1 hole)
39.2 (or φ .165±.004 hole)
32 1.543
27.2 1.260
5.5 1.071
.217 44
37.5 1.732
1.476

67
2.638

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

• Flush mounting type • Surface mounting type • Panel cutout dimensions
(1 Form A) (1 Form C) (Note) 82 3.228
or more

68 +0.7
0

2.677 +.028
0

NC
S1 S2 L2 L1 COM
S1 S2
NO (Note) 82 3.228
or more

Rated operating Load

Rated operating Load
voltage Panel thickness: 1.0 to 4.5mm .039 to .177inch
voltage (Note) Minimum pitch for close mounting

Precautions during usage

1. Output setting 5. Power failure compensation (ATB75
• ON setting: Turn the setting element series)
inward, and red mark appear around the • An internal Ni-NH battery is provided to
dial. compensate for power failures, but the
• OFF setting: Turn the setting element power supply should be left on as much
outward, and the above red mark will dis- as possible. Turning the power supply on
appear. and off shortens the service life of the
• Turn the setting element sufficiently battery.
until the click action is felt. • After continuous charging for 48 hours,
2. Clock setting the battery provides 200 hours of power
• Be sure to turn the knob at the clock failure compensation. The internal bat-
center in the arrow direction to set the tery is fully charged, but if the battery
clock to the present time. (The dial also capacitance has dropped because of
turns together with the clock.) Be sure to natural discharging, or if the battery has
prevent reverse turning. discharged completely, there may be
• do not turn the dial to set the clock. times when the switch does not operate
3. Attachment immediately when the power is turned
• Insert the time switch from the front of on. If this happens, set the clock to the
the attachment panel. proper time after the power has been
(One-touch system: Panel attachment back on for three to four hours.
model) • Secondary batteries are a valuable
• Either use 3.8 or M4 wood screws for commodity which can be recharged.
attachment, or use DIN rails with a width They cannot be replaced, but if being
of 35 mm (ATA48011). (Direct-attach- discarded after use, please make sure
ment model) they are recycled if possible.
4. Contact relay operation if the power When discarding the battery, turn off the
fails power supply to the time switches, and
• Contact relays remain closed while the use radio pliers to disassemble the over-
power is off. all connections and remove the battery.
6. Precautions concerning wiring
Power off
OFF With panel attachment models, wiring
Time switch setting time
should be connected by soldering it
directly, or using the #187 flat connecting
probe provided as an accessory.
7. Compliance with the CE marking
Abide by the following installation condi-
tions and cautions in order to satisfy
EN61812-1 requirements.
• Overvoltage category II,
pollution level 2
• Wiring
The voltage applied to the timer should
be protected with an overcurrent protec-
tion device (example: T 1A, 250 V AC
time lag fuse) that conforms to the
EN/IEC standards.
• Installation and removal
(1) Panel-mounted models are timers for
installing on the surface of the control
panel. Store the terminal section inside
the control panel.
(2) Direct-mounted models are timers for
installing inside the control panel. Do not
touch the terminal section or other parts
of the timer unit while an electric current
is applied.
(3) Before installation or removal, con-
firm that there is no voltage being
applied to any of the terminals.
• Do not use this timer with a safety cir-
cuit. For example, when using a timer in
a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection
circuit on the machine side.
8. Refer to page 91 for information on
other matters.

90
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE A-TB TIME SWITCHES
Precautions when setting the program 4) Since the main body cover is made of polycarbonate resin,
1) If two or more programs are set so that they overlap prevent contact with organic solvents such as methyl alchohol,
benzine and thinner, or strong alkali materials such as ammonia
The individual and caustic soda.
[Program 1]
programs are 5) External surge protection may be required if the following val-
[Program 2] valid, and output is ues are exceeded. Otherwise, the internal circuit will be dam-
continuous, with
no separations.
aged.
[Output]
Surge waveform
2) If the same program is specified for multiple days, specifying [Unipolar full wave voltage of ±(1.2×50) µs]
multiple days when the ON time is specified the same time set-
ting to be entered for multiple days, at one time. 100
90

Surge voltage (%)

ON times: (Mon) (Tues) (Thurs) (Fri) 8:00
[Program] Peak voltage
OFF times: (Mon) (Tues) (Thurs) (Fri) 20:00 50
(Sun) (Mon) (Tues) (Wed) (Thurs) (Fri) (Sat) 30

[Output]
8 20 8 20 8 20 8 20
3) When setting a program that extends over two or more days
(multi-day program), setting the ON and OFF times separately
for all of the days to which that time applies enables multiple
days to be specified at one time.
ON time: (Mon) (Tues) 20:00
[Program 1]
OFF time: (Tues) (Fri) 8:00
(Sun) (Mon) (Tues) (Wed) (Thurs) (Fri) (Sat)
[Output]
20 8 20 8 tance has dropped because of natural discharging, or if the bat-
4) In the pulse setting mode, if a pulse width of 61 or more sec-
onds is set for 23 : 59, the output will be cut off at 0 : 00.00",
and operation will not be carried over to subsequent days. If a
separate program has been specified for 0 : 00, however, out-
put will be continuous, without interruption.
5) When the "Mode Change" switch is set to the "TIMER1 (2)"
mode, no output operation is carried out based on the program;
instead, the previous status is maintained. For this reason, the
"Mode Change" switch should always be returned to the "TIME"
mode when operation has been completed.
6) Entering any one of the settings listed below will cause a set-
ting error, and no writing will be carried out even when the
[WRITE] button is pressed. The location in error will flash.
0
0 1.2 50
Time (µs)
6) Provide chattering absorbing circuit to control the circuit in
which chattering is a problem.
7) Provide circuit breaker, fuse or other protective devices for
the side of power supply.
8) The power failure compensation function provides compen-
sation if power is supplied continuously to the time switches.
The internal battery is fully charged, but if the battery capaci-
tery has discharged completely, there may be times when the
switch does not operate immediately when the power is turned
on. If this happens, check to make sure that the clock is operat-
ing normally immediately after the power is turned on, and then
set the clock to the proper time.
Precautions concerning wiring
Connections should be made using wiring of φ 1 to φ 1.6, or 1.25
to 2 mm2, with a 600V vinyl insulating sheath.
1. If connecting wires just as
they are
Length of sheath to be removed: 10±2 mm
(illustration shows actual size) .394±.079 inch

If this happens, correct the setting for the location where the Insert the wire until the tip
Tighten screws securely. touches this surface.
problem has occurred, and press the [WRITE] button again.
• A setting has not been entered for the day, time, minute, or
another parameter.
• The day, time, and minute settings entered for the ON and
OFF times are exactly the same.
• The number of days is different for the ON and OFF times. Make sure the bare wire is not
exposed beyond this surface.

Precautions concerning handling 2. Using crimp terminals

methods and usage Use a crimp terminal with an insulating
tube and an open tip (for M3.5 screws).
1) Use the time switch in ambient temperatures of –10°C to 3.9 mm min.
.154 inch
+50°C 14°F to 122°F. 7 mm max.
2) Use the time switch in ambient humidities of 85% R.H. or .276 inch

less.
3) Prevent using the time switch in such places where inflam-
mable or corrosive gas is generated, much dust exists, oil is
The crimp terminal should be
splashed and considerable shock and vibration occur. inserted facing the direction
shown in the illustration.

91
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE A-TB TIME SWITCHES
Connection Methods
When time switches are When the electromagnetic breaker and contactor are used in combination
directly controlled Single-phase 3-phase
Time switch Time switch Time switch
COM COM COM
M M M
NO NO NO
S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC

If the power supplies for the Power Power supply

Power supply A B for time switch 13 14 96 95
time switches and the load supply for Load
time switch for time switch 5 6
are separate Power
3 4
Power supply Load
Power 1 2
supply for Load for load
supply
load for load
A B
Electromagnetic
contactor Electromagnetic breaker (green power)

Time switch Time switch Time switch

COM COM COM
M M M
NO NO NO
S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC S1 S2 NC
If the same power supply is
used for the time switches Cross- Cross- Cross-
Power over over A B over 13 14 96 95
and the load supply Load
5 6
(Connect a crossover between
S2 and COM .) Power 3 4
Load
Power supply 1 2
supply Load
A B
Electromagnetic
contactor Electromagnetic breaker (green power)

Example of connecting the

time switches and remote
control transmitter breaker ON COM S1 S2
OFF
(The output from the time NC NO COM
switches is a stand-alone Time switches
circuit, and is applied to 1C.) Remote control
transmitter breaker
Load

Data
1. Life characteristics 2. Normal motor reyolution character- 3. Temperature characteristics of
Applied for AC motor type. istics quartz oscillation accuracy
Applied for AC motor type. Applied for quartz power-failure compen-
sation type.
100 (ppm)
(Internal motor characteristics) 80°C
Normal revolution
range +20
90
60°C
+12ppm
Starting voltage (%V)

+10
80 40°C +3ppm
Recommendable
applicaiton range 0
20°C –7ppm
70
Characteristics range
–10
0°C
Starting voltage –16ppm
60
–20
–20°C

Initial 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 60 100 140 180 220 (%V) 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°C)

years

A-TB TIME SWITCHES COMMON OPTIONS

Mounting parts (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ±1 ±.039)
• Mounting rails (Applicable for • Fastening plate • Protective cover for
DIN and IEC standards) 1,000 ± 1 39.37 ± .039 50 DIN 72 size
5.5 1.969
12 M4
.217
2.75R .108R .472 M.157 For ATB72
5 15 10 15 15 10 15 5 10 17.5 75.2
.394 .689 2.961
.197 .591 .394 .591 .591 .394 .591 .197
Oval hole, 40-5.5x15 40-.217x.591
75.2
2.961
10
UP

35 24 27 ATA4806 .394
1.378 .945 1.5 1.063
ATA4806
AT8-DLA1 .059
Length: 1 m
aluminum 7.5
.295
For holding DIN rails AQM7801

92
COUNTERS SELECTOR CHART
Contact Contact Open
output output collector
(1 Form C) (1 Form A) output

Classification Electronic counters

Name of product LC2H Counter LC2H Counter LC4H/-L Counter LC4H-S Counter LC4H-W Counter
Type Total counter Preset counter Preset counter Preset counter Preset counter
UP, DOWN, and DIR
UP, DOWN, and DIR UP, DOWN, and DIR
Input mode/Input method UP type UP, DOWN type (multi-mode) 2 modes
(multi-mode)/DIP switch (multi-mode)/DIP switch
selectable/DIP switch
Flush mounting type

Appearance
PC board mounting type

4-digit 6-digit 4-digit 6-digit

AEL3
8.7 mm tall 8-digit display
Bright 2-color back light
Features
Flush mounting type:
Unnecessary (Built-in
battery)
Rated operating voltage
PC board mounting type:
3 V DC (Battery in
externally installed)
AEL3
8.7 mm tall 8-digit display
Preset function equipped
in half size
Display has backlight for
instant recognition
24 V DC
display display display display
Bright and easy-to-read Bright and easy-to-read Bright and easy-to-read
display display display
Simple operation Simple operation Simple operation
Short body Pre-scale function Built-in Upper and lower limit
Conforms to IP66’s power supply for high- settings are available.
weather resistant capacity sensor (100 to Conforms to IP66’s
standards 240 V AC type) weather resistant
Conforms to IP66’s standards
weather resistant
standards
100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC
24 V AC, 12 to 24 V DC 24 V AC
12 to 24 V DC

8-digit 8-digit 4-digit 6-digit 4-digit 6-digit 6-digit

Number of digits
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(counter capacity)

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9999 999999 9999 999999 9 9 9 9 9 9

Zero-suppress function
(LCD)
Counter/Indication
Flush mounting type:
2kHz/30Hz
(Changeable by a switch)
Counting speed
PC board mounting type:
2kHz/30Hz
(Different type)
Counting (signal) input and
reset input
• Input by short-circuiting
Input
or opening contacts
• Open collector input
• Voltage input
• Front reset button and
Reset external reset input
(Reset input terminal
specifications conform to • External reset dip
those of counting input) terminal
Preset —
Zero-suppress function
(LCD)
30Hz/5kHz
(switchable)
Counting (signal) input and
reset input
• Input by short-circuiting
or opening contacts
• Open collector input
• Manual reset with and
external terminal and
front reset key
• Manual reset types
inside one-short output
models
• Counter number setting
with key switches
7-segment LCD
Counter value
(backlight red LED)
Setting value
(backlight yellow LED)
30Hz/5kHz
2-input (multi-mode) and
reset input
• Input by short-circuiting
or opening contacts.
• Open collector input
• Manual reset with and
external terminal and
front reset key
• Manual reset types
inside one-short output
models
• Operation mode setting
with dip switches
• Counter number setting
with key switches
7-segment LCD
Counter value
(backlight red LED)
Setting value
(backlight yellow LED)
30Hz/5kHz
2-input (multi-mode) and
reset input
• Input by short-circuiting
or opening contacts.
• Open collector input
• Manual reset with and
external terminal and
front reset key
• Manual reset types
inside one-short output
models
• Operation mode setting
with dip switches
• Counter number setting
with key switches
7-segment LCD
Counter value
(backlight red LED)
Setting value
(backlight yellow LED)
30Hz/5kHz
2-input (multi-mode) and
reset input
• Input by short-circuiting
or opening contacts.
• Open collector input
• Manual reset with and
external terminal and
front reset key
• Manual reset types
inside one-short output
models
• Output mode setting
with dip switches
• Counter number setting
with key switches

Control output —
or or or
External power supply 12 V DC —
Power supply output — — —
100 mA max. (AC type only)
Options Flush mounting type (No Mounting frame, rubber 11 P plug-in 11 P plug-in 11 P plug-in
need for easy installation gasket (terminal block, socket) (terminal block, socket) (terminal block, socket)
type) 8 P plug-in
Mounting frame, rubber (terminal block, socket)
gasket

Available standards UL, c-UL, CE UL, c-UL, CE UL, c-UL, CE UL, c-UL, CE UL, c-UL, CE
Page P. 98 P. 106 P. 115 P. 123 P. 132

93
TYPICAL COUNTER APPLICATIONS
The highly accurate, reliable counters can be controlled from
the front panel and are suitable for a wide range of applications.
DOWN and HOLD-A modes IND and HOLD-D modes PHASE and HOLD-A modes
for shipment quantity counting for parking lots for valve control
Rotary
encoder
To valve
FULL
VACANT

IN2
(down count)
Photoelectric IN1
switch Motor (up count)
(stop/start)

Entrance Photoelectric Exit

switch

Shipment quantities are counted to con- Incoming and outgoing cars are counted Rotary encoder signals are counted to
trol the conveyor line flow. to switch the FULL and VACANT signs. control a valve aperture.

UP and SHOT-A modes UP and SHOT-B modes UP and SHOT-C modes

for packing a specified number of copies for packing medicine tablets for counting acceptables
Electric counter
IN1
Motor Marking (up count)
Photoelectric
switch Film Labeling
Cutter machine
Sorting
Printing machine
machine

Acceptables

Mark
sensor
Mark sensor Rejectables

IN2
(down count)

Printed matter is counted to package a Medicine tablets are packed in specified Labeled cans alone are counted up.
specified number of copies. quantities. Rejected cans are not counted.

UP and SHOT-D modes DIR input mode PHASE input mode for sizing
for winding leader sheet for controlling part stocks

Mark Electric counter

sensor
Cutter

Leader sheet IN2 (down count)

Rotary
encoder

IN1
(counting)
Pipe
Rotary IN1 (up count)
IN2
encoder (up/down count selection)
(single-phase)

Extra leader sheet that is now wound is Incoming and outgoing parts are counted Teamed up with a rotary encoder, the
counted by a rotary encoder and a color to keep parts feeders well-stocked. counter is used to control the cutting
detecting sensor. length of pipes.

94
COUNTER-RELATED TERMINOLOGY
TYPES OF COUNTERS
1. Electro Preset Counter
The counter is equipped with semicon-
ductor counting circuitry. When the
counter counts up to a preset number, its
output circuit sends a signal.
2. Electro Magnetic Counter
A magnet is magnetized and demagne-
tized to drive the dial and count up num-
bers.
RATING
1. Rated Operating Voltage
The voltage is applied to start the
counter.
COUNTINGS
1. Pulse
This is a voltage or current signal sent at
intermittent time intervals.
2. Count
Pulses are used to count up and down.
3. Miss-count
This happens if the number of pulses
does not correspond to the number of
counts.
4. Hertz
This unit of counting speed is used to
give the number of counts per one
second.
8. Recount 5. Automatic Reset
When counting is up, the counter display When counting is up, internal circuitry is
resets to zero and counting restarts. activated to automatically reset the
counter.
9. Down Count
Numbers are counted down one by one 6. Reset Signal Width
from a preset number. This is the time during which the power
is off so as to reset the counter or during
10. Up Count which an external (manual) reset signal
Numbers are counted up one by one is sent.
from zero.
7. Reset time
11. Up/Down Count This is the time from the moment a reset
Numbers are counted up or down signal is sent to the instant the counter is
depending on input ready to start counting again.
conditions.
OTHERS
12. Rejection (gate) Input
1. Function of Memorizing Condition
This signal is used to keep the counter
Counting data up until the operating
from counting.
voltage is turned off can be stored in
memory. When the power is reactivated,
OUTPUTS the data can be reproduced.
1. Count Up
When a preset number is reached, the 2. Anti-surge
output circuit sends a signal. The strength against power voltage
surge is determined by applying a single-
2. Retained Output pole full-wave voltage (several hundred
The output is held until a reset signal is to several thousand volt wave for ±(1.2 ×
sent. 50) µs) acrosss the control power
terminals.
3. One Shot Output Surge waveform
This output has a specified width of time. [Single-pole full-wave voltage for ±(1.2 ×
50) µs]
RESETTINGS 100
90
1. Reset
Surge voltage (%)

5. Make Ratio
This is the ratio of ON time (Ta) to OFF The counting process, display and output Peak value

time (Tb). sections are all brought back to the initial 50

status. 30

0
2. Power off Reset 0 1.2 50
The operating voltage is turned off to Time (µs)
Ta Tb

Time
6. Maximum Counting Speed
Suppose that the counter is operated
with an input pulse of a make ratio of 1.
The highest counting speed is the peak
of a range in which the output circuit can
send signals without mis-counting. The
speed is expressed in units of Hz (cps:
counts per a second).
reset the counter. 3. Noise Immunity
This is the strength against external
3. Manual Reset noise. Relay noise tests, noise simulator
The counter is manually reset. tests, etc. are conducted.
4. Remote Reset
A signal is sent from a remote point to
the reset terminal so as to reset the
counter.

7. Over Count
Counting continues beyond a preset
number.

95
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE COUNTER
Cautions for circuits
1. Protective circuit for counter contact
In the circuit that switches an inductive load, a contact failure may occur at a contact point due to surge or inrush current resulting
from that switching. Therefore, it is recommended that the following protective circuit be used to protect the contact point.
CR circuit (r: resistor c: capacitor) Diode circuit Varistor circuit
Counter contact Counter contact Counter contact Counter contact

Inductive load
Inductive load

Inductive load
Inductive load
Circuit r
r c Diode ZNRvaristor
c

AC (see note.) Available Not available Available

Application
DC Available Available Available Available
If the load is a relay or solenoid, the release time lengthens. The diode connected in parallel caus- Using the rated voltage characteris-
Effective when connected to both contacts if the power supply voltage is es the energy stored in the coil to tics of the varistor, this circuit pre-
24 or 48 V and the voltage across the load is 100 to 200 V. flow to the coil in the form of current vents excessively high voltages
and dissipates it as joule heat at the from being applied across the con-
If the load is a timer, leakage current resistance component of the induc- tacts. This circuit also slightly
Features/Others flows through the CR circuit causing tive load. delays the release time.
faulty operation. This circuit further delays the release
—
Note: If used with AC voltage, be sure time compared to the CR circuit.
the impedance of the load is sufficiently (2 to 5 times the release time listed in
smaller than that of the CR circuit. the catalog)
As a guide in selecting r and c, Use a diode with a reverse break-
c: 0.5 to 1 µF per 1 A contact current down voltage at least 10 times the
r: 0.5 to 1 Ω per 1 V contact voltage circuit voltage and a forward cur-
Values vary depending on the properties of the load and variations in counter charac- rent at least as large as the load
Device Selection teristics. current. —
Capacitor c acts to suppress the discharge the moment the contacts open. Resistor r In electronic circuits where the cir-
acts to limit the current when the power is turned on the next time. Test to confirm. cuit voltages reverse breakdown
Use a capacitor with a breakdown voltage of 200 to 300 V. Use AC type capacitors voltage of about 2 to 3 times the
(non-polarized) for AC circuits. power supply voltage.

2. Type of Load and Inrush Current various kinds of input signals, therefore, 4. Long Continuous Current Flow
The type of load and its inrush current use a power transformer in which the pri- Avoid keeping the counter on for a long
characteristics, together with the switch- mary side is separated from the period of time (over one month).
ing frequency, are important factors ungrounded secondary side as shown in Otherwise heat is generated and accu-
which cause contact welding. Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor mulated inside the counter, which may
Particularly for loads with inrush cur- and other input devices so that short-cir- deteriorate its electronic parts. If the
rents, measure the steady state current cuiting can be prevented. counter must be kept on for a long period
and inrush current and use a relay or of time, a relay is added. See the circuit
magnet switch which provides an ample (Fig. A) Good diagram below.
margin of safety. The table below shows Insurating transformer

(+) Input equipment

the relationship between typical loads (–)
(sensor, etc.)

R C R R
and their inrush currents.
(–)

Type of load Inrush current Counter Receive output

R Relay C Counter from contact
Resistive load Steady state current at relay R
Solenoid load 10 to 20 times the steady state current
(Fig. B) No good
Motor load 5 to 10 times the steady state current AC power supply

Incandescent lamp load 10 to 15 times the steady state current Insurating transformer
(+) Input equipment
Mercury lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current (–)
(sensor, etc.)

Sodium vapor lamp load 1 to 3 times the steady state current

Capacitive load 20 to 40 times the steady state current (–)

Transformer load 5 to 15 times the steady state current Counter

When you want large load and long life AC power supply

of the counter, do not control the load Single coil transformer

(+) Input equipment
direct with a counter. When the counter (–)
(sensor, etc.)

is designed to use a relay or a magnet

switch, you can acquire the longer life of Counter
(–)
AC power
routing

the counter.

3. Connection of input Do not use a single coil transformer (e.g.,

(Except for LC4H-S/AC type) Sly-Duck). Otherwise, the internal circuit
The LC4H series use power supply with- of the counter will be short-circuited as
out a transformer (power and input termi- shown in Fig. B resulting in breakdown.
nals are not insulated). In connecting

96

5. Leakage current
1) For connecting operating voltage to
the counter, a circuit should be used,
which will prevent the flow of leakage
current. For example, a circuit for con-
tact protection as shown in Fig A. will
permit leakage current flow through R
and C, causing erroneous operation of
the counter. Instead, the circuit shown in
Fig. B should be used.
Cautions for use
(common for all models)
1. Terminal connections
Correctly connect the pins while seeing
the terminal layout/wiring diagram. In
particular, the DC type, which has polari-
ties, does not operate with the polarities
connected reverse. Any incorrect con-
nection can cause abnormal heating or
ignition.
2. Connection to operating voltage
1)Apply the entire supply voltage through
a switch, relay or other contact.
2) The operating voltage for the DC type
must be at the specified ripple percent-
age or less. The average voltage must
fall within the allowable operating voltage
range.
Rectification type Ripple percentage
Single-phase, full-wave Approx. 48%
Three-phase, full-wave Approx. 4%
Three-phase, half-wave Approx. 17%
3) Make sure that no induced voltage
and residual voltage are applied between
the power terminals on the counter after
the power switch is turned OFF.
(If the power line is wired in parallel with
the high-voltage and motor lines,
induced voltage may be produced
between the power pins.)
3. Control output
1) Keep the load capacity below the
counter's rated control capacity. If used
above the rating, the counter's service
life may shorten. With the transistor out-
put type counters, transistors may be
damaged.
4. Installing the counter
1) To install the counter, use the dedicat-
ed pin bracket or socket (cap). Avoid
connecting the pins on the counter by
directly soldering them.
2) In order to maintain the characteris-
tics, do not remove the counter cover
(case).
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE COUNTER
(Fig. A)
Leakage current
Operating
voltage R C
5. Superimposed surge of power
supply
For the superimposed surge of power
supply, the standard waveform (±1.2 ×
50µs or ±1 × 40µs) is taken as the stan-
dard value for surge-proof voltage. (The
positive and negative voltages are
applied each three or five times between
the power pins.)
For the standard values for the LC4H
type counters, see the respective items
in "Cautions for use."
• Single-pole, full-wave voltage for surge
waveform [±(1.2 × 50) µs]
100
Surge voltage (%)
90
Peak value
50
30
0
0 1.2
Time (µs)
If external surge occurs exceeding the
specified value, the internal circuit may
break down. In this case, use a surge
absorption element. The typical surge
absorption elements include a varistor, a
capacitor, and a diode. If a surge
absorption element is used, use an oscil-
loscope to see whether or not the foreign
surge exceeding the specified value
appears.
6. Signal input
The counter's signal input comes in two
ways. One is by opening and closing the
input terminal. The other is by applying a
specified H-level or L-level voltage to the
input terminal.
For an input sensor's residual voltage,
input impedance, input voltage level and
other signal input conditions, see the rat-
ings for each type of product.
7. Operating environment
1) For the ambient operating tempera-
ture and humidity, see the ratings for
each type of product.
2) Avoid using the counter in a location
where inflammable or corrosive gas is
generated, the counter is exposed to
much dust and other foreign matter; water
or oil is splashed on the counter; or vibra-
tions or shocks are given to the counter.
2) If the counter
(Fig. B)
is directly
switched with a
R non-contact ele-
Operating
C voltage C ment, leak cur-
Counter Counter
C rent may flow
into the counter
and cause it to
malfunction.
3) The counter cover (case), the knobs,
and the dials are made of polycarbonat-
ed resin. Therefore, prevent the counter
from being exposed to organic solvents
such as methyl alcohol, benzine, and
thinner, strong acid substances such as
caustic soda, and ammonia and avoid
using the counter in atmosphere contain-
ing any of those substances.
4) If the counter is used where noises
are emitted frequently, separate the input
signal elements (such as a sensor), the
wiring for the input signal line, and the
counter as far as possible from the noise
source and the high power line contain-
ing noises.
Input line
Sensor,
etc.
Counter As remote as possible
50
Power line, etc.
8. Checking the actual load
In order to increase the reliability in the
actual use, check the quality of the
counter in the actual usage.
9. Others
1) If the counter is used exceeding the
ratings (operating voltage and control
capacity), the contact life, or any other
specified limit, abnormal heat, smoke, or
ignition may occur.
2) The LC2H series counter, incorpo-
rates a lithium battery.
Never disassemble the lithium battery or
throw it into fire because this may affect
humans and facilities. The lithium bat-
tery must be disposed of as an incom-
bustible like other used batteries.
3) If any malfunction of the counter is
likely to affect human life and properties,
give allowance to the rated values and
performance values. In addition, take
appropriate safety measures such as a
duplex circuit from the viewpoint of prod-
uct liabilities.
97
LC2H

DIN HALF SIZE LC2H

LCD COUNTER
Counters

Features
1. 8.7 mm .343 inch Character Height 6. Screw Terminals Designed for
(previously 7 mm) Safety
Easy-to-read character height increased Built in finger protection.
from 7 mm to 8.7 mm .276 inch to .343 7. Panel Covers Replacable
inch. (Standard color is ash gray.)
Panel mounting type Change the panel design by replacing
One-touch installation type 8.7mm with a black panel cover.
.343inch 8. Conforms to IP66 Protective
Construction (Only installation frame
2. Plenty of Digits type.) (Front panel surface)
9. Input Methods
1) Non-voltage input method
2) Voltage input method
Panel mounting type
8 digits 3) Free voltage input method
Installation frame type 3. Counting Speed Switchable 10. Backlight Type Added to Series
between 2 kHz and 30 Hz and Now 2-color Switchable (green/
4. Panel Mounting Type Features red)
2 Installation Methods Easy viewing even in dark places and
Comes with very easy one-touch switchable between green and red
installation type and also installation (Voltage input type).
PC board mounting type frame type that uses the bracket on the 11. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
timer/counter. Choose a method that
suits the application.
RoHS Directive compatibility information 5. Battery Replacement Easy on
http://www.nais-e.com/ Environment
To replace battery simply remove body
for the one-touch installation type, and
remove battery lid for the installation
frame type.

Product chart
Type Standard type Backlight type
Voltage input type Free voltage input type Voltage input type
Installation type Non-voltage input type
(4.5 to 30 V DC) (24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5 to 30 V DC)
Panel One-touch installation type




mounting
type Installation frame type




PC board mounting type
— — —

Product types
1. Panel mounting type
1) One-touch installation type
1 Standard type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
Non-voltage input type LC2H-FE-2KK
2 kHz/30 Hz switchable
8 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-FE-DL-2KK
30 Hz Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC) LC2H-FE-FV-30
Note) Please ask us about types without front resetting.

2 Backlight type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
8 digits 2 kHz/30 Hz switchable Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-FE-DL-2KK-B

98
 LC2H
2) Installation frame type
1 Standard type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
Non-voltage input type LC2H-F-2KK
2 kHz/30 Hz switchable
8 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-F-DL-2KK
30 Hz Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC) LC2H-F-FV-30
Note) Please ask us about types without front resetting.

2 Backlight type
No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
8 digits 2 kHz/30 Hz switchable Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC) LC2H-F-DL-2KK-B

2. PC board mounting type

No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No.
2 kHz LC2H-C-2K-N
8 digits No Non-voltage input type
30 Hz LC2H-C-30-N

Specifications
1. Panel mounting type
Type Standard type Backlight type Standard type
Item Non-voltage input Voltage input Free voltage type
No. digits 8 digits
External power supply Not required (built-in battery)
Max. counting speed 2 kHz/30 Hz (Switchable by switch) 30 Hz (Note 2)
Min. input signal width
0.25 ms/16.7 ms (Switchable by switch) 16.7 ms
(ON: OFF = 1:1)
High level:
Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC Low level:
Count connection
0 to 2.4 V AC/DC
input
When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Approx. 4.7 kΩ —
When open:
Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V — —
Min. input signal width 200 ms
Non-voltage input using Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC
connection connection
Reset
input When shorted: When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Appox. 4.7 kΩ
When open: When open:
Max. 750 kΩ Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max 0.5 V — Max. 0.5 V
7-segment LCD
Display method 7-segment LCD 7-segment LCD
With green/red backlight
Between charged and
Breakdown voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute. uncharged parts: 2,000 V
AC for 1 minute.
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.
Backlight power — 24 V DC (±10%) —
Protective construction (Note 3) IEC Standard IP66 (only panel front: when using rubber gasket)
Accessories (Note 3) Rubber gasket, mounting bracket
Battery life 7 years (at 25°C 77°F) Note 1 6 years (at 25°C 77°F)
Notes) 1. The value given for battery life is calculated based on continuous operation (count input signal ON/OFF = 1:1), therefore, this value is not guaranteed.
Also, battery life is decreased 30% when operation is continuous with 2 kHz count inputting in 2 kHz mode.
2. Operation is at 25 Hz when using 24 V AC.
3. Only for installation frame type.

99
LC2H
2. PC board mounting type
Type
PC board mounting type
Item
Input method Non DC voltage input
No. digits 8 digits
Rated operation voltage 3 V DC
Allowable operation voltage range 2.7 to 3.3 V DC
Current consumption Max. 30 µA (max. 250 µA during reset input)
Max. counting speed 2 kHz 30 Hz
Min. input signal width
0.25 ms 16.7 ms
(ON: OFF = 1:1)
Count Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V
Min. input signal width 10 ms
Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
Reset
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual power Max. 0.5 V
Break down voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute.
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.

3. Common
Type
Panel mounting/PC board mounting types
Item
Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.15 mm .006 inch (10 min. on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.375 mm .015 inch (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Operation temperature –10 to +55°C +14 to +131°F (without frost or dew)
Storage temperature –25 to +65°C –13 to +149°F (without frost or dew)
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category III
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
EMC
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)

Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)

Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

100
 LC2H
Part names
1. Front reset button COUNTER Count speed switch
This button resets the count value. It
does not work when the lock switch is
ON. Be aware that battery life will RESET

LC2H
decrease if this switch is used frequently.
2. Lock switch (Refer to chart on
Front reset button
right.)
Disable the front reset button. Lock switch
Note) Turn ON at the LCD side (reset disabled) and
OFF at the terminal block side (reset enabled).
3. Count speed switch (Refer to chart
on right.)
Use this switch to switch the count speed Non-voltage input/voltage input Free voltage input
between 30 Hz and 2 kHz. (On the non-
voltage and voltage input types, 30 Hz is (Terminal block side) OFF❇
on the LCD side and 2 kHz is on the Lock switch
terminal block side. Fixed at 30 Hz for (Unit display 1)
free voltage input type.) (LCD side) ON
Note) You must press the front reset button when you
change the count speed switch setting.
Confirm, however, that the Lock Switch is OFF
(front switches operable). (Terminal block side) 2k Hz
Count speed
—
switch
(Unit display 2)
(LCD side) 30Hz❇ (Fixed at 30 Hz)

Notes) 1. ❇Default setting when shipped.

2. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
1. Panel mounting type
• External dimensions • Panel installation diagram
1) One-touch installation type
44.8
1.764

Panel (1 to 4.5mm
54.4 .039 to .177inch
2.142 Rubber spacer
thickness)

Note) When installing to a 4.5 mm .177 inch thick panel, remove the rubber spacer
first.

When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure

10.4 (44) 5 48 that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
.409 (1.732) .197 1.890
To prevent the installation spring
COUNTER from pinching the rubber gasket:
22 24 1. Set the rubber gasket on both
.866 .945 RESET
ends of the installation spring
LC2H
(left and right).
7
.276 Reset button 2. Confirm that the installation
spring is not pinching the rubber
gasket, and then insert and fix the
installation spring in place from the
rear of the timer unit.

101
LC2H
2) Installation frame type • Panel mounting diagram
44.8 Mounting screws Mounting frame
1.764 (found on mounting frame) ATH3803 (included)

54.4 37
2.142 1.457

Rubber gasket
Panel ATH3804 (included)
(1 to 4.5mm .039 to .177inch thickness)

10.4 44 5 48
.409 1.732 .197 1.890

COUNTER

22 24
.866 .945 RESET

LC2H

7
.276 Reset button

• Panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installation (sealed installation)

The standard panel cut-out is shown below. (Only installation frame type.)
Use the mounting frame (ATH3803) and the rubber packing (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type.)

22.2+0.5
0
.874+.020
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0
A=(1.890×n-.098)+.039
0
60 min.
2.362 min.
45+0.5
0
1.772+.020
0
Notes) 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm .039 to .177 inch.
2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
+0.5
22.2 0
+.020
.874 0

• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

1) Standard type
Non voltage input type Voltage input type Free voltage input type

Count input Reset input Count input Reset input Count input Reset input
+V +V

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 4

0V 0V
W-R are connected internally.

2) Backlight type
Voltage input type

Backlight
<When green> <When red>
0V +V
Count input Reset input
+V +V
5 5 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
6 6 6
0V 0V

0V +V

102
 LC2H
2. PC board mounting type General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039 mm inch
• External dimensions
PC board pattern (BOTTOM VIEW)
33.02±0.3
5.08±0.3 1.300±.012 5.08±0.3
2.54 Mounting area
.200±.012 .200±.012
0.6±0.1 .100 1.9
.024±.004 DIP switch × 8 .075

2.54
3.3±0.3 .100 15.24 Connection sockets
.130±.012 .600 28 pin DIP terminal
8-0.8 dia.
8-.031 dia.
1.9
43.4 17.3 0.5±0.3 5.08 5.19 .075
1.709 .681 .020±.012 .200 .204
5.19 5.08
.204 .200
19 15.24±0.3 33.02
.748 .600±.012 1.300
COUNTER LC2H

0.3±0.1
General tolerance: ±0.1 ±.004
.012±.004
Note: The AXS212811K is recommended as a compatible connection socket.
• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

15 17 26 28
Count input Reset input
14 12 3 1

Q-E, }-w, e-t and S-F are connected internally.

An external power supply is required.

Input method
1. Standard type
Non-voltage input type
Panel mounting type PC board mounting type
Transistor input Transistor input
Contact input Contact input
NPN transistor NPN transistor

15 17 26 28 15 17 26 28
Count Reset Count 1 2 3 4 Reset Count Reset Count Reset
1 2 3 4 input input input input
input input input input 14 12 3 1 14 12 3 1

0V 0V
(W and R are connected internally.) (W and R are connected internally.) 3V DC 3V DC

Notes) 1. When using contact input, since current flow is small from terminals 1 and 3 on the panel mounting type and terminals e to t and S to F on the PC board
mounting type, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability.
2. When using transistor input, use the following as a guide for which transistors (Tr) to use for inputting. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)

Voltage input type

Transistor input Free voltage input type
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor
+V +V +V +V
Count Reset
input input Count Reset
Count input

Reset input
1 2 3 4
input input
1 2 3 4 Count Reset 1 2 3 4
input 1 2 3 4 input
or or or

Notes) 1. 2 and 4. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
2. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
3. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

103
LC2H
2. Backlight type
Voltage input type
Transistor input Backlight connection
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor

Green Red
+V +V +V +V

Count Reset 24V DC

input input
5 Count 5 Reset 5 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Count 1 2 3 4 Reset input input
6 input input 6 6 6
6

0V 0V 24V DC

Notes) 1. Do not reverse the polarities when connecting the DC voltage for the backlight.
2. 2 and 4. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
3. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
4. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

Explanation of operation
1. Counting takes place when the count
input signal is ON. Count input
2. Counting resumes again when the
count value reaches 99999999 (full scale Reset input ❇
value) and then returns to “0” with a new
count input. Count value 0 1 99999999 0 1 0 1

3. No measurement takes place when a Note) ❇Count becomes “1” when the reset input is turned OFF while the count signal is being input.
reset is input.
1) When reset is ON, resetting takes
place and the count becomes “0”.
2) Press the front reset button when you
want to reset manually (only panel
installation type).
Note) Be aware that battery life will decrease if the
count input or reset input are left ON.

104

Cautions for use
1. Non-voltage input type
For both panel mounting and PC
board mounting types
1) Never apply voltage to the non-voltage
input type. This will damage the internal
elements. Also, since there is a possibility
of erroneous operation, do not connect in
parallel the inputs of a non-voltage input
type and another counter from a single
input signal.
2) Since the current flow is very small
from the count input and reset input
terminals (1 and 3 on the panel
mounting type and terminals e to t and
S to F on the PC board mounting type)
please use relays and switches with high
contact reliability.
3) When inputting with an open collector
of a transistor, use a transistor for small
signals in which ICBO is 1 µA or less and
always input with no voltage.
4) When wiring, try to keep all the input
lines to the count and reset inputs as
short as possible and avoid running them
together with high voltage and power
transmission lines or in a power conduit.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires
exceeds 500 pF (10 m 32.808 ft. for
parallel wires of 2 mm2). When using 2
kHz mode, use with a wiring floating
capacitance of 120 pF (3 m 9.843 ft. for
parallel wires of 2 mm2). In particular,
when using shielded wiring, be careful of
the capacitance between wires.
PC board mounting type
1) For external power supply use
manganese dioxide or lithium batteries
(CR type: 3V).
2) Always reset after external power is
applied and confirm that the display
reads “0”.
3) Make the wiring from the battery to the
counter unit as short as absolutely
possible. Also, be careful of polarity.
4) Calculate battery life with the following
formula.
t = A/I
t: battery life [h]
I: LC2H current consumption [mA]
A: battery capacity until minimum
operation voltage is reached [mAh]
5) Hand solder to the lead terminal. Do
not dip solder. With the tip of the
soldering iron at 300°C 572°F perform
soldering within 3 seconds (for 30 to 60
W soldering iron).
2. Voltage input type
1) Be aware that applying more than 30 V
DC to count input terminals 1 and 2,
and reset input terminals 3 and 4 will
cause damage to the internal elements.
LC2H
2) For external resetting use H level Voltage input type
(application of 4.5 to 30 V DC) between +V +V
R
reset terminals 3 and 4 of the rear Tr
3 4 3 4 3 4 or 3 4
terminals. In this case, connect + to
terminal 3 and – to terminal 4. This is
the valid polarity; therefore, the counter Note) Make sure that H (reset ON) level is at least 4.5
will not work if reversed. V.
3) When wiring, try to keep all the input 5. Backlight luminance
lines to the count and reset inputs as To prevent varying luminance among
short as possible and avoid running them backlights when using multiple Backlight
together with high voltage and power types, please use the same backlight
transmission lines or in a power conduit. power supply.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires 5 5
24V DC 2 2 2 2 24V DC
exceeds 500 pF (10 m 32.808 ft. for 6 6
parallel wires of 2 mm2). Green Red
3. Free voltage input type
6. Environment for use
1) Use count input terminals 1 and 2 for
1) Ambient conditions
free voltage input and reset terminals 3
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
and 4 for non-voltage input.
• Indoor use
2) Be aware that the application of
• Acceptable temperature and humidity
voltage that exceeds the voltage range of
range: –10 to +55°C, 35 to 85%RH (with
the H level to the count input terminal,
no condensation at 20°C)
and the application of voltage to the reset
• Under 2000 m elevation
input terminal, can cause damage to the
2) Use the main unit in a location that
internal elements.
matches the following conditions.
3) Since the current flow is very small
• There is minimal dust and no corrosive
from reset input terminal 3, please use
gas.
relays and switches with high contact
• There is no combustible or explosive
reliability.
gas.
4) When inputting a reset with an open
• There is no mechanical vibration or
collector of a transistor, use a transistor
impacts.
for small signals in which ICBO is 1 µA or
• There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
less and always input with no voltage.
• Located away from large-volume
5) To reset externally, short reset input
electromagnetic switches and power
terminals 3 and 4 on the rear.
lines with large electrical currents.
6) Input uses a high impedance circuit;
3) Connect a breaker that conforms to
therefore, erroneous operation may occur
EN60947-1 or EN60947-3 to the voltage
if the influence of induction voltage is
input section.
present. If you plan to use wiring for the
4) Applied voltage should be protected
input signal that is 10 m or longer (wire
with an overcurrent protection device
capacitance 120 pF/m at normal
(example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse)
temperature), we recommend the use of
that conforms to the EN/IEC standards.
a CR filter or the connection of a bleeder
(Free voltage input type)
resistor.
4. How to reset multiple panel
mounting type counters all at once
(input is the same for count)
Non-voltage input type
D D D
Tr
3 4 3 4 3 4 or
Notes) 1. Use the following as a guide for choosing
transistors used for input (Tr).
Leakage current < 1 µA
2. Use as small a diode (D) as possible in the
forward voltage so that the voltage between
terminals 3 and 4 during reset input meets
the standard value (0.5 V).
( At IF = 20 µA, forward voltage 0.1 and
higher.)
105
LC2H

PRESET COUNTER
LC2H
Counter

Features
1. Preset function equipped in half 3. 8.7 mm 0.343 inch Character Height
size (24 × 48 mm 0.945 × 1.890 inch). (previously 7 mm 0.276 inch)
2. Display has backlight for instant Easy-to read character height increased
recognition. from 7 mm to 8.7 mm 0.276 inch to 0.343
inch.
Counting Counting up
Red or (Green) 8.7mm
(backlight)
.343inch

Green or (Red) 4. Plenty of Digits

(backlight) (Lit or Flashing)

Red or (Green) 8 digits

(backlight)
Green or Red can
be selected at setup. 5. Counting Speed Switchable
between 30 Hz and 5 kHz
6. Conforms to IP66 Protective
(Lit or Flashing) Construction (Front panel surface)
Lit or Flashing can Weatherproofing supported by using
be selected at setup.
optional mounting frame and rubber
gasket
7. Includes reassuring lock mode and
lock switch to prevent erroneous
operation.
8. Screw terminals are constructed to
RoHS Directive compatibility information
protect fingers to ensure safety.
http://www.nais-e.com/ 9. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.

Product types
No. digits Counting speed Output mode Output Operating voltage Part No.
• Maintain output/hold count
30 Hz/5 kHz • Maintain output/over count
8 digits Transistor (1a) 24 V DC LC2HP-FEW-B-DC24V
switchable • One shot/over count
• One shot/recount
Mounting frame ATH3803
Options Use for waterproofing (front panel surface)
Rubber gasket ATH3804
Note: Mounting frame and rubber gasket are not included.

106
 LC2H
Specifications
Item Descriptions
Rated operating voltage 24 V DC
Rated power consumption Max. 1.5 W
Rated control capacity 100 mA 30 V DC
Input mode Addition/Subtraction (selectable by front switch)
Max. counting speed 30 Hz/5 kHz (selectable by slide switch on side)
Min. input signal width: 16.7 ms at 30 Hz/0.1 ms at 5 kHz,
Counting input
ON time : OFF time = 1 : 1
Reset input Min. input signal width: Min. 30 ms
• Non-voltage input using contacts or open-collector connection
Rating
Input signal • Input impedance; when shorted: Max. 1 kΩ, when open: Min. 100 kΩ
• Residual voltage: Max. 2 V
• Maintain output/hold count • Maintain output/over count
Output mode • One shot/over count • One shot/recount
(Selectable by front switch)
7-segment LCD
Display method
(Switch between red and green for backlight, and between lit and flashing for count up.)
–9999999 to 99999999 (–7 digits to +8 digits)
Digit
(0 to 99999999 for preset value)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 operations or more)
Contact arrangement 1 Form A (Open collector)
Electrical life (contact) 107 operations (at rated control voltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Electrical Break down voltage (Initial value) Between input and output: 1,500 V AC, for 1 min.
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Between input and output: 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC)
Functional vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 min. on 3 axes)
Destructive vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.375 mm (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Functional shock resistance Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Destructive shock resistance Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Operation temperature –10 to 55°C +14 to +131°F (without frost or dew)
Operating
Storage temperature –25 to +65°C –13 to +149°F (without frost or dew)
conditions
Ambient humidity 30 to 85% RH (at 25°C 77°F, non-condensing)
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with mounting bracket and rubber gasket)
* The factory default preset value is set to 1000000.

Applicable standard
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
EMC
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

107
LC2H
Part names
1. Front reset key 5
This key resets the count value. It does
not work when the lock switch is ON. COUNTER

2. Mode key
Use to switch between each mode.
RESET MODE SET

3. Setting key LC2H

Used to set digits of preset values or set 1 2 3 4 6
each mode.
4. Set key
Use to set preset values or to switch
between modes.
5. Lock switch ❇: Default setting when shipped.
Disable the operation of the front panel
reset key and the mode key. With the lock (Terminal block side) OFF❇
switch on, is displayed for about Lock switch
two seconds when the reset key or mode 5
(unit display 1)
switch is operated. (LCD side) ON
6. Count speed switch
Use this switch to switch the count speed
between 30 Hz and 5 kHz. (Terminal block side) 5kHz
Count speed switch
6
(unit display 2)
(LCD side) 30Hz❇

Notes: 1. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

2. Please turn the power off if you change the setting of the count speed switch when the power is on. The
setting will become valid when the power is turned back on.

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
• External dimensions
44.8
1.764
When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure
that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
To prevent the installation spring
54.4 from pinching the rubber gasket:
2.142
1. Set the rubber gasket on both
ends of the installation spring
(left and right).
2. Confirm that the installation
spring is not pinching the rubber
10.4 44 5 48
.409 1.732 .197 1.890 gasket, and then insert and fix the
COUNTER
installation spring in place from the
22 24
.866 RESET MODE SET
.945 rear of the timer unit.
LC2H
7
.276

• Panel cut out dimensions • When installing repeatedly (sealed installation)

The standard panel cut out is shown below. (Only installation frame type)
Use the mounting bracket (ATH3803) and the rubber gasket (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type)

22.2+0.5
0
.874+.020
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0
A=(1.890×n-.098)+.039
0
60 min.
2.362 min.
45+0.5
0
1.772+.020
0
Notes: 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm 0.39 to 0.177 inch.
2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
+0.5
22.2 0
+.020
.874 0

108

How to set
1. Preset value setting mode
This is the mode for setting preset values.
Press the MODE key. Set the digit. Set the value.
1) Pressing the MODE key takes you to
the preset value setting mode.
Sample display in preset value
setting mode
(when preset value is 1000)
2) Pressing the setting key moves the
flashing digit left by one. Following the
highest digit it returns to the lowest digit
and each time the digit setting key is
pressed it moves one to the left.
3) Pressing the set key increases the
value by one. (After 9 it returns to 0 and
then changes to 1, 2, 3, etc.)
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the displayed preset value and returns
you to the regular operation mode.
5) In the preset value setting mode if you
do not operate the digit setting key or the
set key for ten seconds or more you will
be returned to regular operation. In this
case the preset value will not change.
2. Lock mode
This mode prohibits everything except
the preset value setting mode.
+ mode reads “
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock
the MODE key.
1) Pressing the set key while holding
down the mode key takes you to the lock
mode.
2) The display reads “Un-Lock” after
entering the lock mode (initial setting).
Display after entering lock mode
(Example showing “Un-Lock”.)
3) Pressing the setting key changes the
display between “ Lock” and “Un-
lock”.
(Example showing “
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the content displayed and returns you to
regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
5) When the lock mode display reads
“ Lock”, you will not be able to move
to the backlight setting mode, the input
setting mode, or the output setting mode.
3. Backlight setting mode
This is the mode for setting the backlight
during count up.
+
Press the SET key while pressing Lit red
the MODE key. Lit green
1) Pressing the SET key two times while
holding down the MODE key takes you to
the backlight setting mode.
2) The display in the backlight setting
LEd”
Lock
Display after entering
the backlight setting mode.
3) The LED backlight will be red (initial
setting).
LC2H
4) The backlight changes from flashing
green to flashing red to lit green and to lit
red with each press of the setting key.
5) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the current backlight color and returns
you to regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
Lock”.)
4. Input setting mode
This is the mode for setting addition or
subtraction.
+
Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
the MODE key.
1) Pressing the SET key three times
while holding down the MODE key takes
you to the input setting mode.
2) The display after entering the input
setting mode reads “ UP” (initial
setting).
Display after entering input
setting mode
(Example showing “UP”)
Flashes green
3) Pressing the setting key changes the
Flashes red display to “dn” (subtraction) and pressing
it again changes it to “UP” (addition). The
display alternates between “dn” and “UP”.
(Example showing “dn”)
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the content displayed and returns you to
regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
109
LC2H
5. Output setting mode
This sets the operation mode.
2) Lock mode
+ +
Press the SET key while pressing HOLD-A HOLD-B
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock Lock
the MODE key. SHOT-B SHOT-A
the MODE key.
When the lock is set, you cannot enter modes other than
1) Pressing the SET key four times while backlight setting mode.
holding down the MODE key takes you to 3) Backlight setting mode
the output setting mode. +
2) The display reads “HoLd-A” (initial Press the SET key while pressing Lit red Flashes green
the MODE key. Lit green Flashes red
setting) after entering the output setting
Front panel reset key
mode.
4) Input setting mode
+
Regular operation mode
Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
the MODE key.
3) Pressing the setting key causes the
display to change as follows:
HOLD-B (Output maintain/over count I) 5) Output setting mode
+
Press the SET key while pressing HOLD-A HOLD-B
the MODE key. SHOT-B SHOT-A

SHOT-A (One shot/over count)

Mode changes as follows by pressing the SET key while holding down the MODE key.
Lock mode Backlight setting mode
Output setting mode Input setting mode

SHOT-B (One shot/recount I) Please be aware that after doing a front Preset Output
Count value
panel reset key and returning to regular value change
operation mode, the preset values, count Lock
× × ×
mode
value and output will be as shown in this
HOLD-A (Output maintain/hold count) Backlight
table. setting × × ×
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets mode
the display content and returns you to Input Addition: “0”
regular operation mode. setting × Subtraction: ON➝OFF
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode “Preset value”
mode if you do not press the front panel reset Output Addition: “0”
key. setting × Subtraction: ON➝OFF
mode “Preset value”
Note: “×” sign: No change

Changing the preset value

1. It is possible to change the preset
value even during counting. However,
be aware of the following points.
1) If the preset value is changed to less
than the count value with counting set to
the addition direction, counting will
continue until it reaches full scale, returns
to zero, and then reaches the new preset
value. If the preset value is changed to a
value above the count value, counting will
continue until the count value reaches the
new preset value.
2) Suppose that the counter is preset to
count down. Whether a preset count
down value is smaller or larger than the
count value, the counter counts down to
“0 (zero)”.
2. If the preset value is changed to “0”,
the counter will not complete count-
up. It starts counting up when the
counting value comes to “0 (zero)”
again.
1) Addition (up-count) input when
counting is set to the addition direction,
counting will continue until full scale is
reached, return to zero, and then
complete count-up.
2) Subtraction (down-count) input when
counting is set to the subtraction direction,
counting will continue until full scale
“–9999999” is reached, and then the
display will change to “ ”.

Compliance with the CE marking

• EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
The LC2H Preset Counter conforms to
the EMC Directive as a simple counter.
Applicable standards: EN61000-6-4,
EN61000-6-2

110
 LC2H
Operation mode
Output mode Operation Example when input mode is either addition or Subject:ubtraction
Output control is maintained after count-up
completion and until resetting. Output OFF ON

Output maintain/ During that time, the count display does not Counting able/unable Able Unable
hold count change from that at count-up completion.
Addition 0 1 2 3 4 n–1 n
HOLD-A
Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 n–4 1 0

n: Preset value

Output control is maintained after count-up

completion and until resetting. However, Output OFF ON

Output maintain/ counting is possible despite completion of Counting able/unable Able

over count I count-up.
Addition 0 1 2 3 n–2 n–1 n n+1 n+2 n+3
HOLD-B
Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 2 1 0 –1 –2 –3

n: Preset value

Output control is maintained after count-up One shot pulse width: approx. 1 sec.
completion for a fixed time (approx. 1 sec.).
Output OFF ON
Counting is possible despite completion of
One shot/ count-up. Counting able/unable Able
over count
Addition 0 1 2 3 n–2 n–1 n n+1 n+2 n+3
SHOT-A
Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 2 1 0 –1 –2 –3

n: Preset value

Output control is maintained after count-up One shot pulse width: approx. 1 sec.
completion for a fixed time (approx. 1 sec.).
Output OFF ON
Counting is possible despite completion of
One shot/ count-up. However, reset occurs Counting able/unable Able
recount I simultaneous with completion of count-up.
Addition 0 1 2 3 n–1 0 1 2 3 4
SHOT-B While output is being maintained, restarting
of the count is not possible. Subtraction n n–1 n–2 n–3 1 n n–1 n–2 n–3 n–4

n: Preset value

111
LC2H
Cautions for use
1. Input and output connection VCEO = Min. 20 V (3) Input wiring
1) Input connection IC = Min. 20 mA When wiring, use shielded wires or
(1) Contact input ICBO = Max. 6 µA metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire
Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. Also, use transistors with a residual lengths as short as possible.
Since the contact’s bounce time leads voltage of less than 2 V when the 2) Output connection
directly to error in the count value, use transistor is on. Since the transistor output of counter is
contacts with as short a bounce time as * The short-circuit impedance should be less insulated from the internal circuitry by a
possible. In general, select input to have than 1 kΩ. photo-coupler, it can be used as an NPN
a maximum counting speed of 30 Hz. (When the impedance is 0 Ω, the current output or PNP (equal value) output.
coming from the count input terminal is As NPN output
Count 5 Reset approximately 5 mA and from the reset
input 1 2 3 4 input Load
6 input terminal is approximately 1.5 mA.)
5 Load’s power
Also, the open-circuit impedance should 1 2
6
3 4
supply

(2) Non-contact input (Transistor input) be more than 100 kΩ.

Connect with an open collector. Use As PNP output
5
transistors whose characteristics satisfy Count
input 1 2 3 4
Reset
input
6
the criteria given below. 1 2
5
3 4
Load’s power
6 supply

Load

2. Self-diagnosis function 3. Terminal connection

If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. 1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and
Output Restoration Preset values after wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly
Display Contents
condition procedure restoration without errors.
The preset value at An external power supply is required in order to run the main
Malfunctioning Enter front start-up before the unit.
Err-00
CPU reset key or CPU malfunction Power should be applied between
OFF occurred. 5
restart terminals (1) and (2). Terminal (1) acts 1 2 3 4
Malfunctioning counter 6
Err-01 0 as the positive connection and terminal
memory*
(2) as the negative.
* Includes the possibility that the EEP-ROM’s life has expired. Operating voltage

2) After turning the counter off, make sure that any resulting
induced voltage or residual voltage is not applied to power
supply terminals (1) through (2). (If the power supply wire is
wired parallel to the high voltage wire or power wire, an induced
voltage may be generated at the power supply terminal.)
3) Have the power supply voltage pass through a switch or relay
so that it is applied at one time.

112

PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC2H SERIES
Cautions for use
1. Insulation sheet
Before using a panel mounting type,
please pull and remove the insulation
sheet from the side of the product in the
direction of the arrow.
In consideration that the product might be
stored for long periods without being
used, an insulation sheet is inserted
before shipping. Remove the insulation
sheet and press the front reset button.
• LC2H total counter (one-touch
installation type)
Reset button
Insulation sheet
• LC2H total counter (installation
frame type)
Reset button
Insulation sheet
2. Waterproof construction
• LC2H total counter (installation
frame type)
The operation part of the panel
installation type (installation frame type)
is constructed to prevent water from
entering the unit and a rubber gasket is
provided to prevent water from entering
the gap between the unit and the panel
cutout.
There must be sufficient pressure applied
to the rubber gasket to prevent water
from entering.
Be sure to use the mounting
reinforcement screws when installing the
mounting frame (ATH3803).
Note: The one-touch installation type is
not waterproof.
Mounting frame
(ATH3803)
• LC2H preset counter
1) The front plate will not be waterproof
when this product is installed on a panel.
To make the front plate waterproof,
please install the following.
When using the waterproof type (IP66:
panel front only), install the counter to the
front plate with mounting frame ATH3803
(sold separately) and rubber gasket
ATH3804 (sold separately). Be sure to
tighten using mounting screws.
Mounting frame
(ATH3803)
Rubber gasket (ATH3804)
When installing the mounting frame
and rubber gasket please remove the
pre-attached o-ring.
2) Panel installation order
(1) Remove o-ring.
(2) Place rubber gasket.
(3) Insert counter into panel.
(4) Insert mounting frame from the
rear.
(5) Secure with mounting screws (two
locations)
3. Do not use in the following
environments
1) In places where the temperature
changes drastically.
2) In places where humidity is high and
there is the possibility of dew.
(When dew forms the display may vanish
and other display errors may occur.)
4. Conditions of use
1) Do not use on places where there is
flammable or corrosive gas, lots of dust,
presence of oil, or where the unit might
be subject to strong vibrations or shocks.
2) Since the cover is made of
polycarbonate resin, do not use in places
where the unit might come into contact
with or be exposed to environments that
contain organic solvents such as methyl
alcohol, benzene and thinner, or strong
alkali substances such as ammonia and
caustic soda.
LC2H
5. Cautions regarding battery
replacement
1) Remove wiring before replacing the
battery. You may be electrocuted if you
come into contact to a part where high
voltage is applied.
2) Make sure you are not carrying a static
electric charge when replacing the
battery.
3) Battery replacement procedure
For LC2H total counter (one-touch
installation type)
(1) Remove the up/down hook of the
case using a tool.
(2) Pull the unit away from the case.
(3) Remove the battery from the side of
the unit. Do not touch the display or
other parts.
(4) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(5) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(6) After replacing the battery, return
the unit to the case. Verify that the
hook of the case has properly
engaged.
(7) Before using, press the reset button
on the front.
Tool
1
2
1
3
6
113
LC2H
For LC2H total counter 6. Terminal connection
1
(installation frame type) Tighten the terminal screws with a torque
(1) Remove the battery cover from the of 0.8 N·cm or less.
case.
(2) Remove the battery from the side of
the case. The battery will come
loose if you put the battery side face
down and lightly shake the unit.
(3) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(4) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(5) After replacing the battery, return 2
the battery cover to the case. Verify “+” side
that the hook of the battery cover is
properly engaged.
(6) Before using press the reset button
5
on the front. “−” side

Options
1. Accessories (for LC2H total 2. Lithium battery (3 V) 3. Installation parts
counter) Mounting frame
Pa
Panel cover (black) CR2n4asonic (Suitable for installation frame type LC2H
3V 77
JAPA
N
total counter and LC2H preset counter)
COUNTER

Part No.: ATH3802

RESET Packaged with the LC2H (excluding the
LC2H PC board mounting type).

Part No.: AEL3801 Warning

You can change the design of the front
panel by replacing it with this black panel
cover. The counter comes with an ash
gray panel cover as standard.
Note: No panel cover accessory (black) is available
for the LC2H preset counter.
• Make sure the “+” and “−” polarities are
positioned correctly. Part No.: ATH3803
Packaged with the mounting bracket type
• Do not throw the old battery into a fire,
short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to LC2H total counter
come into contact with heat.
• The battery is not rechargeable. Rubber gasket
(Suitable for installation bracket type
LC2H total counter and LC2H preset
counter)

Part No.: ATH3804

Packaged with the mounting bracket type
LC2H total counter

114
 LC4H/-L
DIN 48 SIZE
LCD ELECTRONIC
LC4H/-L
COUNTER Counters
LC4H Counters UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features
1. Bright and Easy-to-Read Display 5. Screw terminal and Pin Type are
A brand new bright 2-color backlight LCD Both Standard Options
48
1.890 display. The easy-to-read screen in any The two terminal types are standard
location makes checking and setting pro- options to support either front panel
cedures a cinch. installation or embedded installation.
2. Simple Operation 6. Changeable Panel Cover
64.5 Also offers a black panel cover to meet
4-digit display 48 2.539 Seesaw buttons make operating the unit
1.890
mm inch even easier than before. your design considerations.
3. Short Body of only 64.5 mm 2.539 7. 4-digit or 6-digit display
inch (screw type) or 70.1 mm 2.760 Two sizes of displays are offered for you
inch (pin type) to choose the one that suits your needs.
With a short body, it easily installs in 8. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
even narrow control panels.
4. Conforms to IP66’s Weather
6-digit display
Resistant Standards
The water-proof panel keeps out water
and dirt for reliable operation even in
poor environments.

Pin type Screw terminal type

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Product types
Digit Count speed Output mode Output Operating voltage Power down insurance Terminal type Part number
8 pins LC4H8-R4-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4H-R4-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4H-R4-AC240VS
8 pins LC4H8-R4-AC24V
Relay
24 V AC 11 pins LC4H-R4-AC24V
(1c)
Screw terminal LC4H-R4-AC24VS
8 pins LC4H8-R4-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-R4-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4H-R4-DC24VS
4
8 pins LC4H8-T4-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4H-T4-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4H-T4-AC240VS
• Maintain
8 pins LC4H8-T4-AC24V
output/hold count Transistor
24 V AC 11 pins LC4H-T4-AC24V
• Maintain (1a)
Screw terminal LC4H-T4-AC24VS
output/over count I
8 pins LC4H8-T4-DC24V
• Maintain
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-T4-DC24V
30 Hz (cps)/ output/over count II
Screw terminal LC4H-T4-DC24VS
5 KHz (Kcps) • One shot/over Available
8 pins LC4H8-R6-AC240V
switchable count
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4H-R6-AC240V
• One shot/recount I
Screw terminal LC4H-R6-AC240VS
• One shot/recount II
8 pins LC4H8-R6-AC24V
• One shot/hold Relay
24 V AC 11 pins LC4H-R6-AC24V
count (1c)
Screw terminal LC4H-R6-AC24VS
(7 modes)
8 pins LC4H8-R6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-R6-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4H-R6-DC24VS
6
8 pins LC4H8-T6-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4H-T6-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4H-T6-AC240VS
8 pins LC4H8-T6-AC24V
Transistor
24 V AC 11 pins LC4H-T6-AC24V
(1a)
Screw terminal LC4H-T6-AC24VS
8 pins LC4H8-T6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-T6-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4H-T6-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.

115
LC4H/-L
LC4H-L Counters UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features
1. Low Price
All this at an affordable price to provide
48
1.890 you with unmatched cost performance.
2. Display is a bright reflective-type
LCD.
3. Inherits all of the characteristics of
64.5
48 2.539 the LC4H digital timer.
1.890
mm inch • Seesaw switches ensure easy
AEL11 Series operation.
(4-digit display)
• IP66 environmental protection.
• Shortened body
(pin type: 70.1 mm 2.760 inch,
screw type: 64.5 mm 2.539 inch
underhead).
4. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.

AEL13 Series
(6-digit display)

Pin type Screw terminal type

Product types
Digit Count speed Output mode Output Operating voltage Power down insurance Terminal type Part number
8 pins LC4HL8-R4-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4HL-R4-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4HL-R4-AC240VS
8 pins LC4HL8-R4-AC24V
Relay
24 V AC/DC 11 pins LC4HL-R4-AC24V
(1c)
Screw terminal LC4HL-R4-AC24VS
8 pins LC4HL8-R4-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4HL-R4-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4HL-R4-DC24VS
4
8 pins LC4HL8-T4-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4HL-T4-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4HL-T4-AC240VS
• Maintain
8 pins LC4HL8-T4-AC24V
output/hold count Transistor
24 V AC/DC 11 pins LC4HL-T4-AC24V
• Maintain (1a)
Screw terminal LC4HL-T4-AC24VS
output/over count I
8 pins LC4HL8-T4-DC24V
• Maintain
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4HL-T4-DC24V
30 Hz (cps)/ output/over count II
Screw terminal LC4HL-T4-DC24VS
5 KHz (Kcps) • One shot/over Available
8 pins LC4HL8-R6-AC240V
switchable count
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4HL-R6-AC240V
• One shot/recount I
Screw terminal LC4HL-R6-AC240VS
• One shot/recount II
8 pins LC4HL8-R6-AC24V
• One shot/hold Relay
24 V AC/DC 11 pins LC4HL-R6-AC24V
count (1c)
Screw terminal LC4HL-R6-AC24VS
(7 modes)
8 pins LC4HL8-R6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4HL-R6-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4HL-R6-DC24VS
6
8 pins LC4HL8-T6-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 11 pins LC4HL-T6-AC240V
Screw terminal LC4HL-T6-AC240VS
8 pins LC4HL8-T6-AC24V
Transistor
24 V AC/DC 11 pins LC4HL-T6-AC24V
(1a)
Screw terminal LC4HL-T6-AC24VS
8 pins LC4HL8-T6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4HL-T6-DC24V
Screw terminal LC4HL-T6-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.

116
 LC4H/-L
Part names
DIP switches
• 4-digit display type
COUNTER
Counter display

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Controlled output indicator

Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
UP
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch LOCK

Down keys
Lock switch LC4H DOWN

(Same for screw terminal type)

• 6-digit display type DIP switches

COUNTER
Counter display

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Controlled output indicator

Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch LOCK

Lock switch LC4H

(Same for screw terminal type)

Specifications
Ralay output type Transistor output type
Item
AC type DC type AC type DC type
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC 12 to 24 V DC 100 to 240 V AC, 24 V AC 12 to 24 V DC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common — 50/60 Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA 30 V DC
Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE)
Input mode
5 modes selectable by DIP switch
Max. counting speed 30 Hz/5 kHz (selectable by DIP switch)
Counting input (Input 1, 2) Min. input signal width: 16.7 ms at 30 Hz/0.1 ms at 5 kHz, ON time: OFF time = 1:1
Reset input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (selected by DIP switch)
Rating
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms
Contact or Open collector input/Input impedance: 1 kΩ or less, Input residual voltage: 2 V or less,
Input signal
Open impedance: 100 kΩ or more, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Output mode HOLD-A/HOLD-B/HOLD-C/SHOT-A/SHOT-B/SHOT-C/SHOT-D (7 modes selectable by DIP switch)
One shot output time Approx. 1 s
Indication 7-segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
4-digit display type –999 to 9999 (–3 digits to +4 digits) (0 to 9999 for setting)
Digit
6-digit display type –99999 to 999999 (–5 digits to 6 digits) (0 to 999999 for setting)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 ope. or more)
Contact arrangement 1 Form C 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Initial contact resistance 100 mΩ (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flush —
Mechanical (contact) 2 × 107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts) —
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 ope. (At rated control voltage) 107 ope. (At rated control voltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage
Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (11-pin type)
Break down voltage Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (11-pin type)
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
(Initial value) Between input and output: 2,000 V AC for 1 min
Between open contacts: 1,000 Vrms for 1 min
Electrical
Insulation resistance Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 MΩ (11-pin type)
Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 MΩ (11-pin type)
(At 500 V DC) (Initial Between input and output: Min. 100 MΩ
Between input and output: Min. 100 MΩ
value) Between open contact: Min. 100 MΩ
Temperature rise Max. 65° C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m 321.522 ft./s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m 964.567 ft./s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C +14° F to +131° F
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less — 20 % or less
Connection 8-pin/11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with a rubber gasket)

117
LC4H/-L
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
• 4-digit display type
Screw terminal type: M3.5 Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
5.5 70.1
5.5 2.760
48 .217 .217
1.890 64.5 55.6
2.539 2.189

COUNTER

OP. (44.5 (44.5

48 RST
1.890 (1.752 (1.752
LOCK

RESET UP

LOCK

LC4H DOWN 7.5 7.5

.295 .295

• 6-digit display type

Screw terminal type: M3.5 Pin type
(Flush mount) (Flush mount/Surface mount)
5.5 5.5 70.1
48 .216 .217 2.760
1.890 64.5 55.6
2.539 2.189

COUNTER

OP. (44.5
48 RST
(44.5
1.890 (1.752 (1.752
LOCK

RESET

LOCK

LC4H 7.5 7.5

.295 .295

118
 LC4H/-L
• Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed)
Screw terminal type: M3.5 Pin type
Rubber gasket Panel Rubber gasket Panel
Mounting frame Mounting frame 8-pin type
ATC18002 (supplied) ATC18002 (supplied) (8p cap AD8-RC
for flush mount for flush mount
AT8-DA4 sold separately)
AT8-DA4 (supplied)
(supplied) 11-pin type
COUNTER COUNTER (11p cap AT8-DP11
sold separately)

OP. OP.
48 50 (44.5 48 50

66
RST RST
1.890 LOCK 1.969 (1.752 1.890 LOCK 1.969
66
RESET UP 2.598 RESET

LOCK LOCK

LC4H DOWN LC4H

1 1
48 .039 63.5 48 .039 90
1.890 2.500 1.890 3.543

• Dimensions for front panel installations
DIN rail terminal block
8-pin type: AT8-DF8K
(sold separately)
• Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and
rubber gasket (ATC18002). 45-0.6
0

11-pin type: AT8-DF11K 1.772-.024

0
80 min.
(sold separately) 3.150
45-0.6
0 1.772-.024
0

Device installation rail A

-0.6
AT8-DLA1 45 0
-.024
1.772 0 –0.6
(sold separately) A = (48 × n – 2.5) 0
80 min.
95.5 3.150 Note 1: The installation panel thickness should be between 1
(90.0)
3.760 and 5 mm .039 and .197 inch.
(3.543) Note 2: For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
( ) Dimensions for 8-pin type. between the unit and installation panel is lost.

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

• 8-pin type • 11-pin type • Screw terminal type
Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
Input 2 Input 2 Reset Reset Reset Reset
Input 1 NC Input 1 Input 1 Input 1
Input 1 Input 1 NO Input 2 Input 2
Reset Reset Input 2 5 6 7 NO Input 2 5 6 7
4 5 4 5 Lock Lock Lock NO Lock
6 4 8 4 8
3 3 6 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
3 9 3 9 NC
2 7 2 7 2 10 2 10
1 11 1 11
1 8 1 8
– Operating + – Operating + – Operating + – Operating + 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~
+ Operating – + Operating –
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~
Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to 5) Transistor output on page 141.

119
LC4H/-L
Setting the operation mode and set value
Setting procedure 1) Setting the operation mode (input mode and output mode)
Set the input and output modes with the DIP switches on the side of the counter.
DIP switches Table 1: Setting the output mode
DIP switch DIP switch No.
Item Output mode
OFF ON 1 2 3
1 ON ON ON SHOT-A
2 Output mode Refer to table 1 OFF OFF OFF SHOT-B
3 ON OFF OFF SHOT-C
4 Minimum reset input signal width 20 ms 1 ms OFF ON OFF SHOT-D
5 Maximum counter speed 30 Hz 5 kHz ON ON OFF HOLD-A
6 OFF OFF ON HOLD-B
7 Input mode Refer to table 2 ON OFF ON HOLD-C
8 OFF ON ON — (See note 1)

Table 2: Setting the input mode

DIP switch No.
DIP switches (See note 2) Input mode
6 7 8
ON ON ON Addition input
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF OFF OFF Subtraction input

ON OFF OFF Directive input
OFF ON OFF Independent input
ON ON OFF Phase input
(Same for 6-digit and screw terminal types) OFF OFF ON — (See note 1)
ON OFF ON — (See note 1)
OFF ON ON — (See note 1)
Notes:1) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err.
Notes:2) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel.
Notes:3) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Notes:4) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.
Setting procedure 2) Setting the set value
Set the set value with the UP and DOWN keys on the front of the counter.
Front display section
• 4-digit display type U DOWN keys
Q Counter display COUNTER Changes the corresponding digit of
1
W Set value display the set value in the subtraction
3
E Controlled output indicator 2 direction (downwards).
OP.
R Reset indicator 4 RST
LOCK
I RESET switch
T Lock indicator 5 6
Resets the counting value and the
UP
Y UP keys 8
RESET output.
7
Changes the corresponding 9
LOCK
O LOCK switch
digit of the set value in the LC4H DOWN Locks the operation of all keys on
addition direction (upwards). the counter.
• 6-digit display type Y UP keys
COUNTER
Q Counter display 1 Changes the corresponding digit of
W Set value display 3 the set value in the addition direc-
2
E Controlled output indicator OP. tion (upwards).
4 RST
R Reset indicator LOCK U RESET switch
T Lock indicator 5 6 Resets the counting value and the
RESET
7
LOCK
output.
8 I LOCK switch
LC4H
Locks the operation of all keys on
• Changing the set value the counter.
1. It is possible to change the set 2) Suppose that the counter is preset to 2) Down-count (subtraction) input when
value with the up and down keys (4- count down. Whether a preset count- counting is set to the subtraction direc-
digit type only) even during counting. down value is smaller or larger than the tion, counting will continue until full scale
However, be aware of the following count value, the counter counts down to is reached (-999 with the 4-digit type and
points. “0(Zero)”. -99999 with the 6-digit type), and then
1) If the set value is changed to less than 2. If the set value is changed to “0,” the display will change to with
the count value with counting set to the the unit will not complete count-up. It the 4-digit type and with the
addition direction, counting will continue starts counting up when the counting 6-digit type. The counting value does not
until it reaches full scale (9999 with the value comes to “0 (Zero)” again. become “0” and so the counter does not
4-digit type and 999999 with the 6-digit 1) Up-count (addition) input when count- count up.
type), returns to zero, and then reaches ing is set to the addition direction, count- 3) For directive, independent, and phase
the new set value. If the set value is ing will continue until full scale is reached input, when the counting value increases
changed to a value above the count (9999 with the 4-digit type and 999999 or decreases from the value "0" and then
value, counting will continue until the with the 6-digit type), return to zero, and returns back to the value "0," count-up is
count value reaches the new set value. then complete count-up. completed.

120
 LC4H/-L
Operation modes
1. Input mode
For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes
• Addition UP
• Subtraction DOWN
• Directive DIR
• Independent IND
• Phase PHASE

Input mode Operation *Minimum input signal width 30 Hz: 16.7 ms; 5 kHz: 0.1 ms
IN1 or IN2 works as an input block • Example where IN1 is the count counting and IN2 is the input block (gate).
(gate) for the other input.
H
IN1 L
A A A A
Blocked
Addition H
IN2 L
UP
Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 n-3 n-2 n-1 n

Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 3 2 1 0

Reset Count-up completed

• Example where IN2 is the counting input and IN1 is the input block (gate).
H Blocked Blocked
IN1 L
A A A A

H
IN2
Subtraction L
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n
DOWN Counting (addition)

n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 1 0

Counting (subtraction)
Reset Count-up completed

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the

addition or subtraction directive input.
IN2 adds at L level and subtracts at H IN1
H
L
level. A A A A
Addition Subtraction Addition
Directive IN2
H
L
DIR 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Counting
Reset

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is addition input and IN2 is subtrac-

tion input.
IN1 H
L

H
IN2
Independent L

IND Counting 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
Reset

* IN1 and IN2 are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal

timing.

Addition when the IN1 phase advances

beyond IN2, and subtraction when the
IN2 phase advances beyond IN1. IN1 H
L
H
IN2 L
Phase B B
Phase advance Phase retard
PHASE
Counting 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
Reset

* “B” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

121
LC4H/-L
2. Output mode
For the output mode, you can choose one of the following seven modes
• Maintain output/hold count HOLD-A
• Maintain output/over count I HOLD-B
• Maintain output/over count II HOLD-C
• One shot/over count SHOT-A
• One shot/recount I SHOT-B
• One shot/recount II SHOT-C
• One shot/hold count SHOT-D

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-3 n-2 n-1 n
count-up completion and until resetting.
Maintain output During that time, the count display does
Counting (subtraction) 3 2 1 0
Hold count not change from that at count-up com-
HOLD-A pletion. Counting able/unable Able Unable

ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until resetting.
Maintain output However, counting is possible despite Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count I completion of count-up.
Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-B
ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until the next
Maintain output signal enters. However, counting is Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count II possible despite completion of count-
HOLD-C up. Counting able/unable Able

ON
Output control OFF OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion for a fixed time
One shot (approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count despite completion of count-up.
Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-A
ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 0 1 2
count-up completion for a fixed time
One shot (approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible Counting (subtraction) 2 1 n n-1 n-2

Recount I despite completion of count-up. Reset (automatic)

However, reset occurs simultaneous Able
SHOT-B with completion of count-up. While out- Counting able/unable

put is being maintained, restarting of ON

Output control OFF OFF
the count is not possible Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n n+1 0 1
count-up completion for a fixed time
One shot (approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible Counting (subtraction) 1 0 -1 n n-1

Recount II despite completion of count-up. Reset (automatic)

SHOT-C However, reset occurs simultaneous Counting able/unable

Able
with output OFF. ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n 0 1
count-up completion for a fixed time
One shot (approx. 1 sec). During that time, the Counting (subtraction) 1 0 n n-1

Hold count count display does not change from Reset (automatic)

SHOT-D that at count-up completion. Reset Counting able/unable

Able Unable Able
occurs simultaneous with output OFF. ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
122
 LC4H-S

ELECTRONIC COUNTER LC4H-S

(with pre-scaling function)
UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features
1. Bright and Easy-to-Read Display
A brand new bright 2-color backlight LCD
display. The easy-to-read screen in any
location makes checking and setting pro-
cedures a cinch.
4-digit type 2. Easy to use, simple operation,
simple settings
• Operation modes (input/output modes)
can be set easily, using DIP switches
on the side panel.
• Values can be set easily, using key
switches on the front panel.
3. Pre-scaling function provided
A pre-scaling function enables conver-
sion of lengths and volumes to any
desired values, and displays the results.
6-digit type 4. Built-in power supply for high-
capacitance sensor
An internal power supply drives a 12
VDC, 100 mA high-capacitance sensor.
(AC power supply types only)
11 pin type Screw terminal type Photoelectric switches, proximity switch-
es and encoders can be directly connect-
ed.
RoHS Directive compatibility information
5. Dual-path AC sensor can be
http://www.nais-e.com/ connected.
Counters
6. Basic insulation between the power
supply and the input terminal
(only for the sensor type model with
power supply)
There is no need for caution when con-
necting between terminals.
7. Conforms to IP66’s Weather
Resistant Standards
The water-proof panel keeps out water
and dirt for reliable operation even in
poor environments.
8. 4-digit or 6-digit display
Two sizes of displays are offered for you
to choose the one that suits your needs.
9. Screw terminal and Pin Type are
Both Standard Options
The two terminal types are standard
options to support either front panel
installation or embedded installation.
10. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
11. Low Price
All this at an affordable price to provide
you with unmatched cost performance.

Product types
Digit Count speed Operation mode Output Operation voltage Power for sensor Terminal Part No.
11 pins LC4H-PS-R4-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC 12 V DC 100mA
Screw terminal LC4H-PS-R4-AC240VS
Relay
12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-S-R4-24V
4 None
/24 V AC Screw terminal LC4H-S-R4-24VS
• Maintain output/hold count
• Maintain output/over count I 11 pins LC4H-S-T4-24V
12 to 24 V DC
• Maintain output/over count II Transistor None
/24 V AC Screw terminal LC4H-S-T4-24VS
30 Hz/5 KHz • One shot/over count
switchable • One shot/recount I 11 pins LC4H-PS-R6-AC240V
• One shot/recount II 100 to 24 V AC 12 V DC 100mA
• One shot/hold count Screw terminal LC4H-PS-R6-AC240VS
Relay
(7 modes) 11 pins LC4H-S-R6-24V
12 to 24 V DC
6 None
/24 V AC Screw terminal LC4H-S-R6-24VS

12 to 24 V DC 11 pins LC4H-S-T6-24V
Transistor None
/24 V AC Screw terminal LC4H-S-T6-24VS
Notes) 1. Rubber packing (ATC18002) and an mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.
2. 100 to 240 VAC Tr outputs (11-pin terminal, screw-tightening terminal) types are also supported.

123
LC4H-S
Part names
• 4-digit display type DIP switches

COUNTER
Counter display

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Controlled output indicator

Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
UP
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch SET/ LOCK
Down keys
Set/lock switch LC4H DOWN

(Same for screw terminal type)

• 6-digit display type DIP switches

COUNTER
Counter display

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Controlled output indicator

Set value display
OP.
Reset indicator RST
LOCK

Lock indicator
RESET
Up keys
Reset switch SET/ LOCK

Set/lock switch LC4H

(Same for screw terminal type)

Specifications
Ralay output type Transistor output type
Item
AC type DC/AC type DC/AC type
Rated operating voltage 100 to 240 V 12 to 24 V DC/24 V AC 12 to 24 V DC/24 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 5 A 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA, 30 V DC
Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE)
Input mode
5 modes selectable by DIP switches
Max. counting speed 30 Hz, 5 kHz (selectable by DIP switches)
Counting input (input 1, input 2) 16.7 ms at 30 Hz/0.1 ms at 5 kHz ON time: OFF time = 1:1
Reset input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (selected by DIP switches)
Lock input Min. input signal width: 20 ms
Rating Contact, Open collector input/DC two-wire system sensor Input impedance: 1 kΩ or less, Input residual voltage: 2 V or less,
Input signal
Open impedance: 100 kΩ or less, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Output mode HOLD-A, HOLD-B, HOLD-C, SHOT-A, SHOT-B, SHOT-C, SHOT-D, 7 modes selectable by DIP switches
One shot output time 1 s, 0.5s, 0.2s, 0.1s, 0.05, 0.01s
Indication 7-segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
4-digit display type –999 to 9999 (0 to 9999 for setting)
Digit
6-digit display type –99999 to 999999 (0 to 999999 for setting)
Decimal point Can be set to three digits
Pre-scaling 0.001 to 9.999 (4-digit type), 0.001 to 99.999 (6-digit type)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 ope. or more)
Power for senser 12 V DC (±10%) 100 mA Max. —
Contact arrangement 1 Form C 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Initial contact resistance 100 mΩ (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flush —
Mechanical (contact) 2 × 107 ope. (Except for switch operation parts) —
Life
Electrical (contact) 105 ope. (At rated control voltage) 107 ope. (At rated control voltage)
Operating voltage range 85 to 264 V AC 10.8 to 26.4 V DC, 20.4 to 26.4 V AC
Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (pin type)
Initial withstand voltage
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Electrical
Initial insulation resistance Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 MΩ (pin type)
(At 500 V DC) Between input and output: Min. 100 MΩ
Temperature rise Max. 65° C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10° C to 55° C +14° F to +131° F
Operating
Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions
Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Connection 11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with a rubber gasket)

124
 LC4H-S
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039

Pin type (Flush mount/Surface mount) Screw terminal type: M3.5 (Flush mount)
5.5 70.1 14.5 5.5
.217 2.760 .571 .217
(48 55.6 64.5
(1.890 2.189 2.539
COUNTER

OP.
((44.5)
(48 ((1.752) ((44.5)
(1.890 s ((1.752)
RESET UP

SET/LOCK

LC4H DOWN
7.5
.295 73* 81.9*
2.874* 3.224*
87.5*
2.445*
* With power supply for sensor * With power supply for sensor
(* 6-digit display type has the same dimensions.)

• Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Rubber gasket Mounting frame Rubber gasket Mounting frame
ATC18002 (supplied) Panel for flush mount ATC18002 (supplied) Panel for flush mount
AT8-DA4 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied)

11 pin type
COUNTER COUNTER 11 pins cap:
ATA4861 (sold separately)
(1.752
(44.5
1.890

1.969

2.598

1.969

2.598
1.890

OP. OP.
48

50

66

50

66
48

RST RST
LOCK LOCK

RESET UP RESET

SET/LOCK SET/LOCK

LC4H DOWN LC4H

1
48 .039 63.5 48 1 90
1.890 2.500 1.890 3.543
80.9 104.5
3.185 * With power supply for sensor 4.114
* With power supply for sensor

• Dimensions for front panel installations • Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and
rubber gasket (ATC18002).
1.772-.024

DIN rail terminal block

45-0.6

Min. 80
0
0

11-pin type: AT8-DF11K 3.150

(sold separately) 45-0.6
0
1.772-.024
0
1.772-.024
45-0.6
0
0

A
Device installation rail When n units are attached in a continuous series,
Min. 80

ATA48011 the dimension of (A) is:

3.150

(sold separately) –0.6

A = (48 × n – 2.5) 0
Note 1: The installation panel thickness should be between 1
95.5 (112.9) and 5 mm .039 and .197 inch.
3.760 (4.445) Note 2: For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
* With power supply for sensor
between the unit and installation panel is lost.

125
LC4H-S
Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams
• Pin type * With power supply for sensor
Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset Reset Reset
Input 1 NC Input 1 Input 1 NC Input 1
Input 2 5 6 7 NO Input 2 5 6 7
Input 2 5 6 7 NO Input 2 5 6 7
Lock 4 8 Lock 4 8 Lock 4 8 Lock 4 8
3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9
2 10 2 10 0V 2 10 0V 2 10
1 11 1 11 1 11 1 11
DC 12V DC 12V
– Operating + – Operating + 100mA Max. ~Operating~ 100mA Max. ~Operating~
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~ voltage voltage

• Screw terminal type * With power supply for sensor

Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset Reset Reset
Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1
Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 Input 2
Lock NO Lock Lock NO Lock
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
NC NC
0V 11 0V 11
DC 12V DC 12V
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 100mA Max. 1 2 3 4 5 100mA Max. 1 2 3 4 5

+ Operating – + Operating – ~Operating~ ~Operating ~

~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~ voltage voltage

Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to 5) Transistor output on page 141.

126
 LC4H-S
Setting the operation mode and counter
Setting procedure 1) Setting the operation mode (input mode and output mode)
Set the input and output modes with the DIP switches on the side of the counter.
DIP switches Table 1: Setting the output mode
DIP switch DIP switch No.
Item Output mode
OFF ON 1 2 3
1 ON ON ON SHOT-A
2 Output mode Refer to table 1 OFF OFF OFF SHOT-B
3 ON OFF OFF SHOT-C
4 Minimum reset input signal width 20 ms 1 ms OFF ON OFF SHOT-D
5 Maximum counter setting 30 Hz 5 kHz ON ON OFF HOLD-A
6 OFF OFF ON HOLD-B
7 Input mode Refer to table 2 ON OFF ON HOLD-C
8 OFF ON ON — (See note 1)

Table 2: Setting the input mode

DIP switches (See note 2) DIP switch No.
Input mode
6 7 8
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON ON ON Addition input
OFF OFF OFF Subtraction input
ON OFF OFF Directive input
OFF ON OFF Independent input
ON ON OFF Phase input
(Same for 6-digit, screw-down terminal type) OFF OFF ON — (See note 1)
ON OFF ON — (See note 1)
OFF ON ON — (See note 1)
Notes:1) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err.
Notes:2) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel.
Notes:3) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Notes:4) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.

Setting procedure 2) Setting the set value

Set the set value with the UP and DOWN keys on the front of the counter.
Front display section
• 4-digit display type U DOWN keys
Q Counter display COUNTER Changes the corresponding digit of the set
W Set value display 1
value in the subtraction direction (down-
3
E Controlled output indicator 2 wards)
OP.
R Reset indicator 4 RST
LOCK
I RESET switch
T Lock indicator 5 UP 6 Resets the counting value and the output
Y UP keys 8
RESET

7 O SET/LOCK switch
SET/LOCK
Changes the corresponding 9 This is used to handle pre-scaling values,
digit of the set value in the LC4H DOWN
one-shot times, decimal point position set-
addition direction (upwards) tings, and key lock operations (to disable Up
key, Down key, and Reset key operations).

• 6-digit display type Y UP keys

Q Counter display COUNTER Changes the corresponding digit of the set
1
W Set value display value in the addition direction (upwards)
3
E Controlled output indicator OP.
2 U RESET switch
R Reset indicator 4 RST
LOCK Resets the counting value and the output
T Lock indicator 5 6 I SET/LOCK switch
RESET
7
SET/LOCK
This is used to handle pre-scaling values,
8
LC4H
one-shot times, decimal point position set-
tings, and key lock operations (to disable Up
key, Down key, and Reset key operations).

Setting procedure 3) Setting the input mode

The input mode is set using the key switch in the [Display] section on the front of the counter.
• Decimal point position setting mode
Q Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the second digit to access the decimal point position setting mode.
Example) 6-digit type
Decimal point position setting mode display
(Example shows default value displayed)

W When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key.

127
LC4H-S
E The decimal point is set using the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to specify the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th digits (this applies only to 4-digit
models).(The 1st digit is set using the [UP] key or [DOWN] key in settings where there is no decimal point (this applies
only to 4-digit models).)

Example) 6-digit type

Example shows 2nd digit displayed using [UP] key

R Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed decimal point position and return to normal operation.
• Setting the pre-scaling value
Q Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the first digit to access the pre-scaling value setting mode.
Example) 4-digit type Example) 6-digit type
Pre-scaling value setting mode displayed
(Example shows default values displayed)

W When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key.
E Use the [UP] or [DOWN] key to set the pre-scaling value (this applies only to 4-digit models).
Select either: 0.001 to 9.999 (4-digit) or 0.001 to 99.999 (6-digit)
R Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed pre-scaling value and return to normal operation.
• Setting the one-shot output time
Q Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the third digit to access the one-shot output time setting mode.

Example) 6-digit type

One-shot output time setting mode displayed
(Example shows default value displayed)

W When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key.
E Each time the 1st-digit [UP] key is pressed, the one-shot output time changes in the following sequence, moving to the
right:
→ 1 s → 0.5 s → 0.2 s → 0.1 s → 0.05 s → 0.01 s

(With a 4-digit type, the [DOWN] key can also be used to move to the left.)
R Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed one-shot output time and return to normal operation.

Changing the set value

1. It is possible to change the set
value with the up and down keys (4-
digit type only) even during counting.
However, be aware of the following
points.
1) If the set value is changed to less than
the count value with counting set to the
addition direction, counting will continue
until it reaches full scale (9999 with the
4-digit type and 999999 with the 6-digit
type), returns to zero, and then reaches
the new set value. If the set value is
changed to a value above the count
value, counting will continue until the
count value reaches the new set value.
2) Suppose that thew counter is preset to
count down. Whether a preset count-
down value is smaller or larger than the
count value, the counter counts down to
“0 (zero)”.
2. If the set value is changed to “0,”
the unit will not complete count-up. It
starts counting up when the counting
value comes to “0 (zero)” again.
1) Up-count (addition) input
When counting is set to the addition
direction, counting will continue until full
scale is reached (9999 with the 4-digit
type and 999999 with the 6-digit type),
return to zero, and then complete count-
up.
2) Down-count (subtraction) input
When counting is set to the subtraction
direction, counting will continue until full
scale is reached (-999 with the 4-digit
type and -99999 with the 6-digit type),
and then the display will change to
with the 4-digit type and
with the 6-digit type.
The counting value does not become “0
(zero)” and so the counter does not
count up.
3) Directive, independent, and phase
inputs
The counting value is counted up or
down to any number other than “0” once.
When it comes to “0 (zero)” again, the
counter starts counting up.

CAUTIONS FOR USE

For more information regarding the cautions for use of LC4H series counter, refer to page 140 “PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE
LC4H SERIES”.

128
 LC4H-S
Operation mode
1. Input mode
For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes
• Addition UP
• Subtraction DOWN
• Directive DIR
• Independent IND
• Phase PHASE

Input mode Operation *Minimum input signal width 30 Hz: 16.7 ms; 5 kHz: 0.1 ms
IN1 or IN2 works as an input block • Example where IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the input block (gate).
(gate) for the other input.
H
IN1 L
A A A A
Blocked
Addition H
IN2 L
UP
Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 n-3 n-2 n-1 n

Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 3 2 1 0

Reset Count-up completed

• Example where IN2 is the counting input and IN1 is the input block (gate).
H Blocked Blocked
IN1 L
A A A A

H
IN2
Subtraction L
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n
DOWN Counting (addition)

n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 1 0

Counting (subtraction)
Reset Count-up completed

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the

addition or subtraction directive input.
IN2 adds at L level and subtracts at H IN1
H
L
level. A A A A
Addition Subtraction Addition
Directive IN2
H
L
DIR 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Counting
Reset

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

IN1 is addition input and IN2 is subtrac-

tion input.
IN1 H
L

H
IN2
Independent L

IND Counting 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
Reset

* IN1 and IN2 are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal

timing.

Addition when the IN1 phase advances

beyond IN2, and subtraction when the
IN2 phase advances beyond IN1. IN1 H
L
H
IN2 L
Phase B B
Phase advance Phase retard
PHASE
Counting 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
Reset

* “B” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

129
LC4H-S
2. Output mode
For the output mode, you can choose one of the following seven modes
• Maintain output/hold count HOLD-A
• Maintain output/over count I HOLD-B
• Maintain output/over count II HOLD-C
• One shot/over count SHOT-A
• One shot/recount I SHOT-B
• One shot/recount II SHOT-C
• One shot/hold count SHOT-D

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-3 n-2 n-1 n
count-up completion and until resetting.
Maintain output During that time, the count display does
Counting (subtraction) 3 2 1 0
Hold count not change from that at count-up com-
HOLD-A pletion. Counting able/unable Able Unable

ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until resetting.
Maintain output However, counting is possible despite Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count I completion of count-up.
Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-B
ON
Output control OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion and until the next
Maintain output signal enters. However, counting is Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count II possible despite completion of count-
HOLD-C up. Counting able/unable Able

ON
Output control OFF OFF

* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
count-up completion for one shot output
One shot time. Counting is possible despite com- Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count pletion of count-up.
Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-A
ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 0 1 2
count-up completion for one shot output
One shot time. Counting is possible despite com- Counting (subtraction) 2 1 n n-1 n-2

Recount I pletion of count-up. However, reset Reset (automatic)

occurs simultaneous with completion of Able
SHOT-B count-up. While output is being main- Counting able/unable

tained, restarting of the count is not ON

Output control OFF OFF
possible Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n n+1 0 1
count-up completion for one shot output
One shot time. Counting is possible despite com- Counting (subtraction) 1 0 -1 n n-1

Recount II pletion of count-up. However, reset Reset (automatic)

SHOT-C occurs simultaneous with output OFF. Counting able/unable

Able

ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
Output control is maintained after Counting (addition) n-1 n 0 1
count-up completion for one shot output
One shot time. During that time, the count display Counting (subtraction) 1 0 n n-1

Hold count does not change from that at count-up Reset (automatic)

SHOT-D completion. Reset occurs simultaneous Counting able/unable

Able Unable Able
with output OFF. ON
Output control OFF OFF
Approx. 1s
* n: Set value
130
 LC4H-S
Input connections
• Signal input type

1) Open collector 2) For voltage output

(PC, sensor etc.) (Photoelectric sensor,

+ 12 V DC proximity sensor, etc.) + 12 V DC

Output Output

0V 0V
– –

11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7 1 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7 1

Screw-down Screw-down
terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 11 terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 11
0V Lock Input Input Reset 12 V DC 0V Lock Input Input Reset 12 V DC
input 2 1 input output input 2 1 input output

3) Contact input 4) For a rotary encoder

Relay, switches etc. 12 V DC
A
phase
B
0V phase

11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
Screw-down
terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 11-pin type 3 5 6 1
0V Lock Input Input Reset
Screw-down
input 2 1 input
terminal type 6 8 9 11
0V Input Input 12 V DC
2 1 output

Input 1, input 2, and reset input specifications Lock input specifications

• Impedance during short-circuit: 1 kΩ max.
(At 0 Ω, the outflow current is approximately 12 mA.)
• Residual voltage during short-circuit: 2 V max.
• Impedance when released: 100 kΩ min.
• Max. applied voltage: 40 VDC max.
• Impedance during short-circuit: 1 kΩ max.
(At 0 Ω, the outflow current is approximately 1.5 mA.)
• Residual voltage during short-circuit: 2 V max.
• Impedance when released: 100 kΩ min.
• Max. applied voltage: 40 DVC max.
• The contact relay should be one which can open/close 5 V,
1.5 mA.

* There is no 12 V DC with 12 - 24 V DC/24 V AC types.

5) For a dual-line sensor What is the prescale function?

The prescale function converts the count into an actual
+ value (amount) and displays it.
Example
0V For a device that outputs 500 pulses when 1 m has been fed:
– 1. Set decimal position to the last 3rd place.
2. Set the prescale value to 0.002 (1/500).
11-pin type 3 5 6 7
Screw-down 1m
terminal type 6 8 9 10 3.281ft
0V Input Input Reset
2 1 input

COUNTER

Dual-line sensor specifications

1 pulse
• Leakage current: 1.5 mA max. RESET

SET/LOCK
UP

Can be set to
LC4H DOWN
easy-to-understand
• Breaker capacitance: 5 mA min. unit.
• Residual voltage: 3.0 V max. Prescale value: 0.002
Encoder COUNTER
• Usable voltage: Runs on 10 VDC
500 pulses RESET UP

* If a dual-line sensor is connected to a 12 - 24 VDC/24 VAC type, SET/LOCK

LC4H DOWN

24 VDC (21.6 to 26.4 VDC) and 24 VAC (21.6 to 26.4 VAC)

should be applied to the power supply voltage of the counter.

131
 DIN 48 SIZE
LCD ELECTRONIC
LC4H-W
COUNTER Counters
UL File No.: E122222
C-UL File No.: E122222
Features
1. Two-stage presetting (upper and 5. Conforms to IP66’s Weather
lower limits) Resistant Standards
SET2 The water-proof panel keeps out water

Count
and dirt for reliable operation even in
48
1.890
SET1
poor environments.
6. Screw terminal and Pin Type are
Both Standard Options
Output 1

Output 2
The two terminal types are standard
48
64.5
2.539
options to support either front panel
1.890 2. Bright and Easy-to-Read Display installation or embedded installation.
mm inch A brand new bright 2-color backlight LCD 7. Changeable Panel Cover
display. The easy-to-read screen in any Also offers a black panel cover to meet
location makes checking and setting pro- your design considerations.
cedures a cinch. 8. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.
3. Simple Operation 9. Low Price
Seesaw buttons make operating the unit All this at an affordable price to provide
even easier than before. you with unmatched cost performance.
11-pin type Screw terminal type
4. Short Body of only 64.5 mm 2.539
inch (screw type) or 70.1 mm 2.760
inch (pin type)
RoHS Directive compatibility information
With a short body, it easily installs in
http://www.nais-e.com/ even narrow control panels.

Product types
Output mode Operating Power down
Digit Count speed Output Terminal type Part number
Output 1 Output 2 voltage insurance

11 pins LC4H-W-R6-AC240V
100 to 240 V AC
Screw terminal LC4H-W-R6-AC240VS
• Maintain output/hold
count Relay 11 pins LC4H-W-R6-AC24V
24V AC
• Maintain output/over (1a+1a) Screw terminal LC4H-W-R6-AC24VS
• Maintain output/over
count I
count I 11 pins LC4H-W-R6-DC24V
• Maintain output/over
• Maintain output/over 12 to 24 V DC
30 Hz (cps)/ count II Screw terminal LC4H-W-R6-DC24VS
count II
6 5 KHz (Kcps) • Maintain output/over Available
• Maintain output/over 11 pins LC4H-W-T6-AC240V
switchable count III
count III 100 to 240 V AC
• One shot/over count Screw terminal LC4H-W-T6-AC240VS
• One shot/over count
• One shot/recount I
(4 modes) 11 pins LC4H-W-T6-AC24V
• One shot/recount II Transistor
24V AC
• One shot/hold count (1a+1a) Screw terminal LC4H-W-T6-AC24VS
(8 modes)
11 pins LC4H-W-T6-DC24V
12 to 24 V DC
Screw terminal LC4H-W-T6-DC24VS
* A rubber gasket (ATC18002) and a mounting frame (AT8-DA4) are included.

Part names
Setting value 1/2 selector Counter display UP keys : Used to set the corresponding digits for the
COUNTER
count-up mode.
Controlled output indicator Set value display
OP 1 RESET key : Used to reset counting and its output.
Lock indicator 1 2 2
LOCK Up keys
RESET
Reset switch SET/LOCK key : Used to select between the Setting 1 display
SET/LOCK
and Setting 2 display and to lock the keys
LC4H-W
Set/lock switch (UP and RESET keys not responsive to
Sixth digit First digit
touch). Used also to set and confirm the
input mode.

132
 LC4H-W
Specifications
Ralay output type Transistor output type
Item
AC type DC type AC type DC type
100 to 240 V AC 100 to 240 V AC
Rated operating voltage 12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC
24 V AC 24 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz common — 50/60 Hz common —
Rated power consumption Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W Max. 10 V A Max. 3 W
Rated control capacity 3 A, 250 V AC (resistive load) 100 mA, 30 V DC
Input mode Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE) (5 modes selectable by DIP switch)
Counting speed 30 Hz(cps)/5 KHz(cps) (selectable by DIP switch)
Counting input (Input 1, 2) Min. input signal width: 16.7 ms at 30 Hz(cps)/0.1 ms at 5 KHz(cps) ON time: OFF time = 1:1
Rating Reset input Min. input signal width: 1 ms, 20 ms (selected by DIP switch)
Contact or Open collector input/Input impedance: 1 kΩ or less, Input residual voltage: 2 V or less,
Input signal
Open impedance: 100 kΩ or more, Max. energized voltage: 40 V DC
Output 1. HOLD-B, C, D SHOT-A (4 modes)
Output mode Output 2. HOLD-A, B, C SHOT-A, B, C, D (8 modes)
(selectable by DIP switch)
One shot output time Approx. 1 s
Indication 7-segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED)
Digit –99999 to 999999 (–5 digits to 6 digits) (0 to 999999 for setting)
Memory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 ope. or more)
Contact arrangement 1 Form A + 1 Form A 1 Form A + 1 Form A (Open collector)
Contact Contact resistance (Intial value) 100 mΩ (at 1 A 6 V DC) —
Contact material Ag alloy/Au flush —
Mechanical (contact) Min. 2 × 107 ope. —
Life
Electrical (contact) Min. 105 ope. (At rated control voltage) Min. 107 ope. (At rated control voltage)
Allowable operating
85 to 110 % of rated operating voltage
voltage range
Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min (pin type)
Break down voltage Between live and dead metal parts: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
Between input and output: 2,000 Vrms for 1 min
(Initial value) Between input and output: 2,000 V AC for 1 min
Between open contacts: 1,000 Vrms for 1 min
Electrical
Insulation resistance Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 MΩ (pin type)
Between live and dead metal parts: Min. 100 MΩ (pin type)
(At 500 V DC) (Initial Between input and output: Min. 100 MΩ
Between input and output: Min. 100 MΩ
value) Between open contact: Min. 100 MΩ
Max. 65°C
Temperature rise —
(under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal voltage)
Vibration Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), single amplitude: 0.75 mm (1 h on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Shock Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
resistance Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10°C to 55°C +14°F to +131°F
Operating Ambient humidity Max. 85 % RH (non-condensing)
conditions Air pressure 860 to 1,060 h Pa
Ripple rate — 20 % or less — 20 % or less
Connection 11-pin/screw terminal
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with a rubber gasket)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61812-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

133
LC4H-W
Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
• LC4H-W electrical counter
Screw terminal type Pin type
(Flush mount): M3.5 (Flush mount/Surface mount)
70.1
2.760
48 5.5 64.5 5.5 55.6
1.890 .217 2.539 .217 2.180

COUNTER

OP. 1
1 2 2
44.5
44.5
LOCK
1.752
1.752

RESET

SET/LOCK

LC4H-W
7.5 7.5
.295 .295

• Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed)

Screw terminal type Pin type
Panel Mounting frame Panel Mounting frame
Rubber gasket Rubber gasket
for flush mount for flush mount
ATC18002 (supplied) ATC18002 (supplied)
AT8-DA4 (supplied) AT8-DA4 (supplied)
11P cap
COUNTER COUNTER AT8-DP11
sold separately

OP. 1 OP. 1
48 1 2 2 50 66
44.5 48 1 2 2 50 66
1.890 LOCK 1.969 2.598
1.752 1.890 LOCK 1.969 2.598
RESET RESET

SET/LOCK SET/LOCK

LC4H-W LC4H-W

48 1 63.5 48 1 90
1.890 .039 2.500 1.890 .039 3.543

• Dimensions for front panel installations • Installation panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installations
The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown
DIN rail terminal block below. Use the mounting frame (AT8-DA4) and
AT8-DF11K (sold separately) +0.6
45 0
rubber gasket (ATC18002). 80 min. +.024
1.772 0
3.150
+0.6
45 0
+.024
1.772 0
A
Device installation rail +0.6
AT8-DLA1 (sold separately) 45 0 When n units are attached in a continuous
+.024
1.772 0 series, the dimension of (A) is:
+0.6
A = (48 × n – 2.5) 0
80 min.
3.150 Note 1): The installation panel thickness should be between 1
95.5 and 5 mm .039 and .197 inch.
3.760
Note 2): For connected installations, the waterproofing ability
between the unit and installation panel is lost.

Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams

• Pin type
Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Input 1 Input 1
Input 2 Input 2
5 6 7 NO 5 6 7
NO
4 8 4 8
3 9 3 9
2 10 2 10
1 11 1 11
– Operating + – Operating +
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~

• Screw terminal type

Relay output type Transistor output type
Reset Reset
Input 1 Input 1
Input 2 Input 2
NO NO
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

+ Operating – + Operating –
~ voltage ~ ~ voltage ~

Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to 5) Transistor output on page 141.

134
 LC4H-W
Setting the operation mode and counter
Setting procedure 1) Setting the output mode (output 1, 2)
Set the output 1 and output 2 with the DIP switches on the side of the counter.
The minimum input signal width and maximum counting speed for the reset are set at the same time.
Table 1
DIP switches
DIP swith No. Output mode
Item OFF ON (Output 1)
1 2 3
1
ON ON ON (See note 1)
2 Output mode Refer to table 1
OFF OFF OFF HOLD–B
3 Output 1
ON OFF OFF HOLD–C
4 Minimum reset input signal width 20ms 1ms
OFF ON OFF HOLD–D
5 Maximum counter setting 30Hz 5kHz
ON ON OFF SHOT–A
6
OFF OFF ON (See note 1)
7 Output mode Refer to table 2
ON OFF ON (See note 1)
8 Output 2
OFF ON ON (See note 1)
DIP switches (see note 2) Table 2
DIP swith No. Output mode
6 7 8 (Output 2)
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON ON ON HOLD–A
OFF OFF OFF HOLD–B
ON OFF OFF HOLD–C
OFF ON OFF HOLD–D
ON ON OFF SHOT–A
OFF OFF ON SHOT–B
ON OFF ON SHOT–C
(Same for screw terminal type)
OFF ON ON SHOT–D
Notes:1) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err.
Notes:2) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel.
Setting procedure 2) Setting the set value Notes:3) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once.
Set the set value with the UP keys on the front of the counter. Notes:4) The DIP switches are set as ON before shipping.

Front display section

Q Counter display Y UP keys
W Set value display
COUNTER [Changes the corresponding digit of
1
E Controlled output indi- 4 the set value in the addition direc-
cator 2 tion (upwards)]
OP.
R Setting 1/2 selection 1 2 2
1
U RESET switch
display (*Note) 3 LOCK Resets the counting value and the
T Lock indicator 5 6 output
*Note: RESET I SET/LOCK switch
Pressing the [SET/LOCK] key switches 7
SET/LOCK Used to select between the Setting
the display between the set value 1 and
2 displays.
8 1 display and Setting 2 display, to
Display either set value [1] or [2], and LC4H-W set and confirm the input mode, and
set the value.
to lock the keys (UP and RESET
Sixth digit First digit keys not responsive to touch).
Procedure 3) Setting the input mode
Set the input mode using the key and switch in the front display section on the counter front.
(1) Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key for the first digit. The setting mode is accessed. Example)
(2) Now release the SET/LOCK key. Input mode displayed
(3) Press the UP key for the first digit and the input position changes counterclockwise. (UP: addition mode)

Addition subtraction Directive Independent Phase difference

(4) Press the RESET key and the input mode being displayed is set. The display then goes back to normal.
• Checking the input mode
Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key
for the second digit. The input mode is displayed for
about 2 seconds and then the display goes back to
normal. (During these 2 seconds, all operations
other than the display are being performed.)
• Locking the keys
Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key
for the sixth digit. The keys will lock. This means that
the UP and RESET keys do not respond to touch. To
unlock the keys,hold down the SET/LOCK key and
press the UP key for the sixth digit again.
* The input mode, maximum counting speed and minimum
reset signal width cannot be preset independently for Setting
1 and Setting 2.
• Selecting the Setting 1 or Setting 2 dis-
play
Press the SET/LOCK key and the display changes
between Setting 1 and Setting 2. (This operation
does not affect overall operation.)
• Changing the setting
1. While the counter is working, the UP key can
be used to change the setting. Keep the follow-
ing points in mind, however.
1) Suppose that a preset count-up value is smaller
than the displayed count value. The counter counts
up to the full scale mark (999999), goes back to "0",
and counts up again to the preset number. When the
preset count-up value is larger than the displayed
count value, the counter counts up to the preset
value.
2) Suppose that the counter is preset to count down.
Whether a preset count-down value is smaller or
larger than the count value, the counter counts down
to "0".
2. When the preset value is "0", the counter does
not start in the count-up mode. It starts counting
up when the count value comes to "0" again.
1) Up-count input
The counter counts up to the full scale mark
(999999), goes back to "0" and starts counting up
again.
2) Down-count input
The counter counts down to the full scale mark
(–99999) and the display reads . The
count value does not become "0" and so the counter
does not count up.
3) Direction input, individual input, and phase input
The preset value is counted up or down to any num-
ber other than "0" once. When it comes to "0" again,
the counter starts counting up.

135
LC4H-W
Operation modes
1. Input mode
Q For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes.
• Addition UP
• Subtraction DOWN
• Directive DIR
• Independent IND
• Phase PHASE
W After the counter has been reset, setting 2 is displayed in the count-down mode. "0" appears instead in all other modes.
Input mode Operation *Minimum input signal width 30 Hz: 16.7 ms; 5 kHz: 0.1 ms
IN1 or IN2 works as an input block • Example where IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the input block (gate).
(gate) for the other input.
H
I N 1 L
A A A A

Blocked
Addition H
I N 2
L
UP
Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 n-3 n-2 n-1 n

Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 3 2 1 0

Reset Count UP

• Example where IN2 is the counting input and IN1 is the input block (gate).
H Blocked Blocked
I N 1 L
A A A A

I N 2 H
Subtraction L
Counting (addition) 0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n
DOWN
Counting (subtraction) n n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4 1 0
Reset Count UP

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width. *n: Set value 2

IN1 is the counting input and IN2 is the

addition or subtraction directive input.
IN2 adds at L level and subtracts at H I N 1
H
L
level. Addition
A A
Subtraction
A A
Addition
Directive I N 2 H
L
DIR 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Counting
Reset

* “A” must be more than the minimum input signal width. *n: Set value 2

IN1 is addition input and IN2 is subtrac-

tion input.
H
I N 1 L

I N 2 H
Independent L

IND Counting 0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
Reset

* IN1 and IN2 are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal

timing.

Addition when the IN1 phase advances

beyond IN2, and subtraction when the
IN2 phase advances beyond IN1. I N 1
H
L
H
I N 2 L
Phase B B
Phase advance Phase retard
PHASE
Counting 0 1 2 3 2 1 0
Reset

* “B” must be more than the minimum input signal width.

136
 LC4H-W
2. Output mode
For the set value 1, you can choose one of the following four For the set value 2, you can choose one of the following eight
modes. modes.
• Maintain output/over count I HOLD-B • Maintain output/hold count HOLD-A
• Maintain output/over count II HOLD-C • Maintain output/over count I HOLD-B
• Maintain output/over count III HOLD-D • Maintain output/over count II HOLD-C
• One shot/over count SHOT-A • Maintain output/over count III HOLD-D
• One shot/over count SHOT-A
• One shot/recount I SHOT-B
• One shot/recount II SHOT-C
• One shot/hold count SHOT-D

• Output mode for set value 1

Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until resetting.
However, counting is possible despite
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
completion of count-up.
Maintain output
Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2
Over count I
Able
HOLD-B Counting able/unable

ON
Output control 1 OFF

* n: Set value 1
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until the next
signal enters. However, counting is Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
possible despite completion of count-
Maintain output up. Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2
Over count II
Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-C
ON
Output control 1 OFF OFF

* n: Set value 1
If the count value is greater than or
equal to the preset value when count- Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
ing up, the control output is held. The
count operation is possible anyway. Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2
Maintain output
Over count III Counting able/unable Able

HOLD-D ON
Output control 1 (addition) OFF
ON
Output control 2 (subtraction) OFF

* n: Set value 1
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
despite completion of count-up.
One shot Counting (subtraction) n+2 n+1 n n-1 n-2
Over count Able
Counting able/unable
SHOT-A
ON
Output control 1 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 1

137
LC4H-W
• Output mode for set value 2
Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until resetting.
Counting (addition) n-3 n-2 n-1 n
During that time, the count display does
not change from that at count-up com-
Maintain output Counting (subtraction) 3 2 1 0
pletion.
Hold count
Counting able/unable Able Unable
HOLD-A
ON
Output control 2 OFF

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until resetting.
However, counting is possible despite Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2

completion of count-up.
Maintain output Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Over count I
Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-B
ON
Output control 2 OFF

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion and until the next
Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
signal enters. However, counting is
possible despite completion of count-
Maintain output Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
up.
Over count II
Counting able/unable Able
HOLD-C
ON
Output control 2 OFF OFF

* n: Set value 2
If the count value is greater than or
equal to the preset value when count- Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
ing up, the counter starts counting up
again. The count operation is possible Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
Maintain output
anyway.
Over count III Counting able/unable Able

HOLD-D ON
Output control 2 (addition) OFF
ON
Output control 2 (subtraction) OFF

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 n n+1 n+2
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible
despite completion of count-up. Counting (subtraction) 2 1 0 -1 -2
One shot
Over count Counting able/unable Able

SHOT-A ON
Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time Counting (addition) n-2 n-1 0 1 2
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible
despite completion of count-up. Counting (subtraction) 2 1 n n-1 n-2
One shot Reset (automatic)
However, reset occurs simultaneous
Recount I
with completion of count-up. While out- Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-B put is being maintained, restarting of ON
the count is not possible. Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 2

138
 LC4H-W
Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction)
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time Counting (addition) n-1 n n+1 0 1
(approx. 1 sec). Counting is possible
despite completion of count-up. Counting (subtraction) 1 0 -1 n n-1
One shot
However, reset occurs simultaneous Reset (automatic)
Recount II
with output OFF. Counting able/unable Able
SHOT-C
ON
Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 2
Output control is maintained after
count-up completion for a fixed time Counting (addition) n-1 n 0 1
(approx. 1 sec). During that time, the
count display does not change from Counting (subtraction) 1 0 n n-1
One shot
that at count-up completion. Reset Reset (automatic)
Hold count
occurs simultaneous with output OFF. Able Unable Able
Counting able/unable
SHOT-D
ON
Output control 2 OFF OFF
Approx. 1s

* n: Set value 2

Output mode for set value 1

HOLD-C HOLD-D HOLD-B SHOT-A

As usual As usual
SHOT-A
(this combination unchanged) (this combination unchanged)

Approx. 1s
Output 1 Output 1
Output mode for
SHOT-B Output 1
set value 2
Output 2 Output 2

Approx. 1s Approx. 1s
Output 2

SHOT-C
SHOT-D

Note) When control output 1 is on, the output mode of setting 2 (SHOT-A, B, C, D) is also on and output 1 changes as shown in the above table.

3. Count-up
(1) In control output 1, when the count
value is equal to the preset value 1, it is
counted. (However, if the output mode of
the preset value 1 is HOLD-D, it is count-
ed when the count value is greater than
or equal to the preset value 1, regardless
of the input mode.)
(2) In control output 2, when the count (3) It is not counted even when the
value is equal to 0 in the count-down counting conditions are satisfied right
input mode, it is counted. In the other after resetting. It can be counted from
modes, when the count value is equal to when the count value changes.
the preset value 2, it is counted.
(However, if the output mode of the pre-
set value 2 is HOLD-D, it is counted
when the count value is greater than or
equal to the preset value 2, regardless of
the input mode.)

139
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC4H SERIES
Precautions during usage
1. Terminal wiring If independent power circuitry must be Also, use transistors with a residual volt-
1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the used, keep the input contacts or transis- age of less than 2 V when the transistor
terminal layout and wiring diagrams and tors separate from each other, as shown is on.
be sure to perform the wiring properly in Fig. B.
without errors. Reset input
(Fig. B)
2) When using the instrument with an Input contact
Input 1
or transistor Input 2
flush mounting, the screw-down terminal Lock
type is recommended. For the pin type, Input input
terminal
use either the rear terminal block 3
2 10 Power
(AT78041) or the 8P cap (AD8-RC) for 8-pin type 1 — 5 4 3
supply
the 8-pin type, and the rear terminal 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
Input contact
block (AT78051) or the 11P cap (AT8- or transistor
Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
DP11) for the 11-pin type. Avoid solder- Input
terminal Note: The LC4H-W does not have the lock input
ing directly to the round pins on the unit. 3
R, 7 .
When using the instrument with a front 2 10

panel installation, use the DIN rail termi- * The short-circuit impedance should be
nal block (AT8-DF8K) for the 8-pin type When power circuitry is not independent, less than 1 kΩ.
and the DIN rail terminal block (AT8- one input signal can be fed to two or
DF11K) for the 11-pin type. more counters at once, as shown in Fig. [When the impedance is 0 Ω, the current
3) After turning the counter off, make C. coming from the input 1 and input 2 ter-
sure that any resulting induced voltage (Fig. C) minals is approximately 12 mA, and from
or residual voltage is not applied to Input contact the reset input and lock input terminals is
or transistor
power supply terminals W through U (8- approximately 1.5 mA.]
pin type), W through P (11-pin type) or Input
terminal
1 and 2 (screw terminal type). (If the 3
Also, the open-circuit impedance should
2 10 Power
power supply wire is wired parallel to the be more than 100 kΩ.
supply
high voltage wire or power wire, an
induced voltage may be generated * As shown in the diagram below, from a
between the power supply terminals.) Input non-contact point circuit (proximity
terminal
4) Have the power supply voltage pass 3 switches, photoelectric switches, etc.)
through a switch or relay so that it is 2 10
with a power supply voltage of between
applied at one time. If the power supply 12 and 40 V, the signal can be input
is applied gradually, the counting may 3. Input and output without using an open collector transis-
malfunction regardless of the settings, 1) Signal input type tor. In the case of the diagram below,
the power supply reset may not function, (1) Contact point input when the non-contact point transistor Q
or other such unpredictable occurrence Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. switches from off to on (when the signal
may result. Since the contact point’s bounce time voltage goes from high to low), the sig-
2. Input connections (except LC4H- leads directly to error in the count value, nal is input.
S/AC type) use contacts with as short a bounce time
The power circuit has no transformer as possible. In general, select Input 1 12 to 40V DC
without a transformer (power and input and Input 2 to have a maximum counting
terminals are not insulated). When an speed of 30 Hz and to be reset with a Reset input
input signal is fed to two or more coun- minimum input signal width of 20 ms.
Q
ters at once, do not arrange the power
Reset input
circuit in an independent way. Input 1 8-pin type 1 — 5 4 3
If the counter is powered on and off inde- Input 2
11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7
pendently as shown in Fig. A, the coun- Lock
input Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10
ter's internal circuitry may get dam-
(The above example is for reset input)
aged.Be careful never to allow such cir-
cuitry. (Figs. A, B and C show the circuit- 8-pin type 1 — 5 4 3

ry for the 11-pin type.) 11-pin type 3 4 5 6 7 2) The input mode and output mode
(Fig. A) Screw terminal type 6 7 8 9 10 change depending on the DIP switch set-
Input contact or transistor
Note: The LC4H-W does not have the lock input
tings. Therefore, before making any con-
R, 7 . nections, be sure to confirm the opera-
Input
3
terminal tion mode and operation conditions cur-
10
(2) Non-contact point input rently set.
2 Power
supply
Connect with an open collector. Use
transistors whose characteristics satisfy
the criteria given below.
Input VCEO = 20 V min.
terminal
3
IC = 20 mA min.
2 10
ICBO = 6µA max.

140
 PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC4H SERIES
3) The LC4H series use power supply LC4H counter
• Surge wave form
without a transformer (power and input As NPN output
[± (1.2 × 50) ms uni-polar full wave voltage]
terminals are not insulated). In connect-
{ O I 100
ing various kinds of input signals, there- 90

Surge voltage (%)

fore, use a power transformer in which Load

the primary side is separated from the 50

Peak value

ungrounded secondary side as shown in Load’s power supply 30

Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor
LC4H counter
and other input devices so that short-cir- 0
As PNP output 0 1.2 50
cuiting can be prevented.
Time (µs)
Once the wiring to be used is completely { O I

installed and prior to installing this Load below are considered the noise-resistant
counter, confirm that there is complete voltages. If voltages rise above these
insulation between the wires connected values, malfunctions or damage to the
Load’s power supply
to the power terminals (2 each) and the internal circuitry may result, so take the
Note: With the LC4H 8-pin type and the LC4H-W,
wires connected to each input terminal. If necessary precautions.
there is no diode between points I and O.
the power and input lines are not insulat- Noise wave form (noise simulator)
ed, a short-circuit may occur inside the (2) Use the diode connected to the out- Power supply terminals
Input
counter and result in internal damage. put transistor’s collector for absorbing DC type terminals
AC type
In addition, when moving your equipment the reverse voltage from induced loads. 24V AC type
to a new installation location, confirm (LC4H only) Noise
1,500V 1,000V 600V
that there is no difference in environmen- voltage
LC4H counter
tal conditions as compared to the previ- Rise time: 1 ns
ous location. Pulse width: 1 µs, 50 ns
(except LC4H-S/AC type) Polarity: ±
Inductive load
Cycle: 100 cycles/second
(Fig. A) Good example Diode rating: 5) When connecting the operation power
AC power supply
IF (forward current): 1 A
Insulation transformer
supply, make sure that no leakage cur-
VR (reverse voltage): 600 V Load’s
(+)
Input device
(e.g., sensor)
power supply rent enters the counter. For example,
(–)
when performing contact protection, if
(–)
6) When wiring, use shielded wires or set up like that of diagram A, leaking cur-
Counter metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire rent will pass through C and R, enter the
lengths as short as possible. unit, and cause incorrect operation.
(Fig. B) Bad example Diagram B shows the correct setup.
AC power supply
4. Output mode setting
Insulation transformer

(+)
Input device
The output mode can be set with the DIP
(–)
(e.g., sensor)
switches on the side of the counter. Leakage current

(–)
Make the DIP switch settings before
Operation power supply
Counter installing the counter on the panel. R C C
5. Conditions of usage
AC power supply 1) Avoid locations subject to flammable
Single coil transformer

(+)
Input device
or corrosive gases, excessive dust, oil, (Fig. A)
(–)
(e.g., sensor)
vibrations, or excessive shocks.
2) Since the cover of the unit is made of
(–)

Counter
Alternative
current flow
4) The input signal is applied by the
shorting of each input terminal with the
common terminal (terminal Q for 8-pin
type, terminal E for 11-pin type and ter-
minal 6 for screw terminal types). Never
polycarbonate resin, avoid contact with
or use in environments containing methyl
alcohol, benzene, thinners, and other R
organic solvents; and ammonia, caustic Operation power supply
C
sodas, and other alkaline substances.
C
3) If power supply surges exceed the val-
ues given below, the internal circuits may
become damaged. Be sure to use surge (Fig. B)

connect other terminals or voltages high- absorbing element to prevent this from 6) Long periods of continuous operation
er than 40 V DC , because it may happening. in the count-up completed condition (one
destroy the internal circuitry. 4) Regarding external noise, the values month or more) will result in the weaken-
5) Transistor output ing of the internal electrical components
(1) Since the transistor output is insulat- Operating voltage Surge voltage (peak value) from the generated heat and, therefore,
ed from the internal circuitry by a pho- AC type 6,000V should be avoided. If you do plan to use
tocoupler, it can be used as an NPN DC type the unit for such continuous operation,
1,000V
output or PNP (equal value) output. 24V AC type
use in conjunction with a relay as shown
(The above example is 11-pin type) in the circuit in the diagram below.

R C R R

Receive output
R Relay C Counter from contact
at relay R

141
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LC4H SERIES
6. Self-diagnosis function
If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear.
Display Contents Output condition Restoration procedure Preset values after restoration
or
Minimum value went below –999 Enter reset or RESET
or –99999. See note 1. key.
No change No change
Restart unit (correct DIP
Incorrect DIP switch setting.
switch settings)
The values at start-up before the CPU
Malfunctioning CPU.
Enter reset, RESET key, malfunction occurred.
OFF
Malfunctioning memory. See or restart unit.
0
note 2.
Note 1: When the counter value goes below the minimum value during any of the subtraction, directive, independent, or phase input modes.
Note 2: Includes the possibility that the EEPROM’s life has expired.

7. Compliance with the CE marking
When using in applications to which
EN61812-1 applies, abide by the follow-
ing conditions.
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level
2 • The load connected to the output con-
(for sensor type model with power sup-
ply)
1. Connections between the power sup-
ply and input/output have basic insula-
tion. Use a device with basic insulation
to connect to the I/O terminals.
(for sensor type model without power
supply)
1) This counter employs a power supply
without a transformer, so the power
and input signal terminals are not
insulated.
(1) When a sensor is connected to the
input circuit, install double insulation
on the sensor side.
(2) In the case of contact input, use dual-
insulated relays, etc.
tact should have basic insulation.
This counter is protected with basic
insulation and can be double-insulated
to meet EN/IEC requirements by using
basic insulation on the load.
• Applied voltage should be protected
with an overcurrent protection device
(example: 250 V 1A fuse, etc.) that con-
forms to the EN/IEC standards.
2) You must use a terminal block or
socket for installing the pin-type
counter. Do not touch the terminal
section or other parts of the timer unit
while an electric current is applied.
Before installation or removal, confirm
that there is no voltage being applied
to any of the terminals.
3) Do not use this timer with a safety cir-
cuit. For example, when using a timer
in a heater circuit, etc., provide a pro-
tection circuit on the machine side.

142
DIN SIZE COUNTERS COMMON OPTIONS
Terminal sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ±1 ±.039)
Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
• DIN rail socket (8-pin)
24 .945
19 .748
50 1.969
M3.5
40 1.575 M.138
50
6 5 4 3 1.969

2– φ 4.5
LC4H 24
6 5 4 3
2– φ .177 70
.945 70 2.756
LC4H-L 2.756 2-M4 2-M.157
(8-pin type) 70 35.3 7 8 1 2
screw holes
2.756 1.390 (or 4.2 ±0.1 .165±0.1
70 dia. holes)
50 2.756 40±0.2 The minimum distance
1.969 1.575±.008 13 between the holes which
7 8 1 2 Note: Terminal No. .512 areparallel drilled.

4
on the main body
.157 are identifical to
those on the termi-
ATC180031 nal socket.

• DIN rail socket (11-pin)

50 1.969 30.5
M3.5 1.201
40 1.575 29.5
M.138
1.161 50
8 7 6 5 1.969
4
8 7 6 5
2- φ 4.5
LC4H 2- φ .177
LC4H-L 30.5 4 70
1.201 2.756
LC4H-S 70 35.3 9 3 2-M4 2-M.157
2.756 1.390 screw holes
LC4H-W 70
10 11 1 2 (or 4.2 ±0.1 .165±0.1
9 3 dia. holes)
(11-pin type) 50 2.756 40±0.2 The minimum distance
1.969 1.575±.008 13 between the holes which
.512
10 11 1 2 Note: Terminal No. areparallel drilled.

on the main body

4 are identifical to
.157 those on the termi-
ATC180041 nal socket.
Note: The terminal numbers on the counter are identifical to those on the terminal socket.

Sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ±1 ±.039)

Terminal wiring
Type Appearance Dimensions Mounting hole dimensions
(Top view)
• Rear terminal socket 21
M3.5 38 .827 3 4 5 6
M.138 1.496 16
21 .630
.827
3 4 5 6 —
1.614
41

38 41 2 1 8 7
1.496 1.614 2 1 8 7
LC4H AT78041
LC4H-L
(8-pin type) • 8P cap 34.6
1.362
φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30
φ 1.236 φ .551 φ 1.181
4 5
3

φ 31.4 φ 30
6

φ 1.236 φ 1.181 8
—
2

.315 1 8
8.6 26
.339 1.024
φ 32.5
(34.6)
AD8-RC φ 1.280 (1.362)

5
• Rear terminal socket .197 21
M3.5 .827 4 5 6 7 8
45 1.772
M.138 16
21 .630
.827
4 5 6 7 8
11 —
45 43.4 43.4 11
1.772
LC4H 1.772 1.709
3 2 1 10 9 3 2 1 10 9
LC4H-L AT78051
LC4H-S
LC4H-W • 11P cap
34.6
(11-pin type) 1.362 φ 31.4 φ 14 φ 30
φ 1.236 φ .551 φ 1.181 6 5
7
4 3 2

9 8

φ 31.4 φ 30 8 —
φ 1.236 φ 1.181 .315
10

8.6 26 1 11
φ 32.5 .339 1.024
(34.6)
AT8-DP11 φ 1.280
(1.362)

Note: The terminal numbers on the counter are identifical to those on the socket.

143
DIN SIZE COUNTERS COMMON OPTIONS
Mounting parts
• Rubber gasket • Mounting frame

Applicable for LC4H

50.0
series
1.969
48 Applicable for LC4H
1.890
50.0 1.0 series
1.969 .039
ATC18002
48 1.890
AT8-DA4 68 2.677

The rubber gasket is enclosed in the LC4H

series.

1,000 ± 1 39.37 ± .039

• Mounting rails (Applicable for 5.5
• Fastening plate 50
1.969
DIN and IEC standards) .217 12 M4
2.75R .108R .472 M.157
5 15 10 15 15 10 15 5 10
.394
.197 .591 .394 .591 .591 .394 .591 .197
Oval hole, 40-5.5×15 40-.217×.591

35 24 27 10

UP
AT8-DLA1 1.378 .945 1.5
.059
1.063 ATA4806 .394
ATA4806
Length: 1 m
aluminum 7.5 For holding DIN rails
.295

• Protective cover for DIN 48 size

Flexible type
11 50
.433 1.969

50
1.969

AQM4803

Accessories
• Panel cover (Black)
LC4H Panel cover (4 digits) LC4H Panel cover (6 digits) LC4H-S Panel cover (4 digits) LC4H-S Panel cover (6 digits) LC4H-W Panel cover

COUN COUN COUN COUN COUN

TER TER TER TER TER

RESE RESE RESE RESE RESE

T T T T T
UP UP
SET/L SET/L SET/L
LOCK LOCK OCK OCK OCK

LC4H LC4H
DOWN DOWN
LC4H LC4H LC4H
-W

AEL58011 AEL58012 AEL58013 AEL58014 AEL68011

The black panel cover is also available so that you can change the appearance of the panel by changing the panel cover.
The color of the standard panel cover is ash gray.

144
INSTALLING DIN SIZE COUNTER
Installation methods
1. Surface mount
1) For the counters of LC4H series, use
the pin type counter.
2) Put the terminal socket on the board
directly or put it on the DIN rail (Fig. 1).
3) Insert the counter into the terminal
2) How to mount the counter
From the panel front, pass the counter
through the square hole. Fit the mount-
ing frame from the rear, and then push it
in so that the clearance between the
mounting frame and the panel surface is
minimized. In addition, lock the mount-
ing frame with a screw.
• LC4H series
Panel cover
Mounting flame
5) Correctly connect the terminals while
seeing the terminal layout and wiring
diagram.
6) If the pin type is used, the rear pin-
bracket (AT8-RR) or the 8P cap (AD8-
RC) is necessary to connect the pins.
For the 11-pin type, use the 11P cap
(AT8-DP11) and avoid directly soldering
the round pins on the counter.
7) Panel cutout dimensions
The standard panel
+0.6
cutout dimensions are
45
0

socket and fix it with clip (Fig. 2) +.024

1.772
0 shown in the left fig-
PUSH
4) On DIN rail mounting, mount the ure. (Panel thickness:
+0.6

counter on the DIN rail tightly to get the 45 0

1.772
+.024
0
1 to 5 mm .039 to .197
proper dimension (Fig. 3). inch)
(Fig. 1) (Fig. 2)
8) Although the Min. 80
3.150
Screw counters can be 45
+0.6
0
+.024
Rubber 1.772 0

gasket mounted adja-

3) Caution in mounting the counter cent to each 45
+0.6
0
+.024
1.772 0

Terminal socket • LC4H series other in this

a If the LC4H series are used as the case, it is rec- Min. 80
3.150

waterproof types (IEC IP66), tighten the ommended to

reinforcing screws on the mounting arrange the
frames so that the counters, the rubber mounting holes
(Fig. 3)
gaskets, and the panel surfaces are as shown in the
tightly contacted with each other. figure to facili-
(Tighten the two screws with uniform tate attaching 45
+0.6
0
+.024
DIN rail 1.772
force and make sure that there is no rat- and detaching 0

tling. If the screws are tightened too the mounting

5) 8-pin type should be connected with
terminal socket AT8-DF8K. 11-pin type
should be connected with terminal sock-
et AT8-DF11K.
6) DIN rail (AT8-DLA1) is also available
(1 m).
excessively, the mounting frame may
come off.)

b If the counter is installed with the
panel cover and the rubber gasket
removed, the waterproofing characteris-
tic is lost.
4) Removal
Loosen the screws on the mounting
A
frame.
9) Adjacent mounting
Although the counters can be mounted
adjacent to each other, remember that
the panel surface of LC4H series counter
will lose its water-resistant effect. (Panel
thickness: 1 to 5 mm .039 to .197 inch)
A = (48 × n – 2.5) +0.6
+0

frame, spread the edge of frame and When lining up the counters horizontally,
2. Flush mount
remove it. set the frames in such a position so the
1) For the counters of LC4H series, it is
formed spring areas are at the top and
recommended to use the built-in screw
bottom.
terminal type for flush mount. (Mounting
When lining up
frame and rubber gasket are provided
the counters
when counter is shipped.)
vertically, set
the frames in
such a position Formed spring
Pull the mounting 1
as the formed
frame backward
spring areas
while spreading out
are at the right
its hooks with your
and left.
thumbs and index
2
fingers.
Formed spring

145
HOUR METERS SELECTOR CHART
Types DIN 48 × 48 size Hour Meters
Name of product TH14 Hour Meters TH24 Hour Meters TH40 Hour Meters TH50 Hour Meters TH70 Hour Meters

Appearance

TH14 series TH24 series TH40 series TH50 series TH70 series
Reset side
0 to 9999.9 hours
Counting range 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 min 0 to 99999.9 hours
Without reset side
0 to 99999.9 hours
Composite function for total
With zero reset function
For controlling total accumulated hours Zero reset for minute unit For monitoring accumulated
Features For controlling measured
integrated hours monitoring and measuring time monitoring hours on DC line
integrated hours
each zero reset
Driving method AC motor AC motor AC motor AC motor DC quartz motor
Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP)
12 V AC, 24 V AC, 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 12 V AC, 24 V AC,
48 V AC, 100 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC,
Voltage 12 V DC, 24 V DC
Power 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC,
200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Frequency 50/60Hz (common) 50/60Hz (common) 50/60Hz (common) 50/60Hz (common) —
Counting integral/ Synchronizing with power Synchronizing with power Synchronizing with power Synchronizing with power
According to quartz
Counting max. speed supply frequency supply frequency supply frequency supply frequencyoscillation frequency
Min. counting unit 0.1 h 0.1 h 0.1 h 0.1 min 0.1 h
Reset input — Manual reset Manual reset Manual reset —
Max. power consumption Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W
Weight 145 g 5.115 oz 150 g 5.291 oz 160 g 5.644 oz 150 g 5.291 oz 170 g 5.997 oz
The unit with a reset
The TH50 series displays function is also available.
— — —
time in minute. (Manufacturing after
Remarks receiving an order)
The TH14, 24, 40, 50, 63, and 64 series have numbers at the end of the part number that indicate the voltage required as follows:
1:100 V, 2:200 V, 3:12 V, 4:24 V, 5:48 V, 6:110 V, 7:115 to 120 V, 8:220 V, 9:240 V,
Ex.) The part number of the TH24 series with 220 V is TH248. When “S” is specified at the end of the part number, a silver panel is equipped at the front.
Page P. 168 P. 168 P. 170 P. 172 P. 176

Types DIN 24 × 48 size Hour Meters DIN 24 × 48 size Hour Meters

Name of product TH63 Hour Meters TH64 Hour Meters LH2H Hour Meters LH2H Preset Hour Meters

Appearance

Front section of part Panel PC board

number TH63 series TH64 series mounting type mounting type ATH3
Flush mounting type: 0 to 999999.9 hours/
0 to 999999.9 hours/0 to 3999 days 23.9 hours (selectable) 0 to 3999 days 23.9 hours (selectable)
Counting range 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours 0 to 999 hours 59 min 59 sec/0 to 9999 hours 59.9 min (selectable)
PC board mounting type: 0 to 999 hours 59 min 59 sec/
0 to 999999.9 hours/9999 hours 59.9 min (different type) 0 to 9999 hours 59.9 min (selectable)
Big 7-digit display, 8.7 mm tall display
With zero reset function
For controlling total integrated Bright, 2-color back light (voltage input type) Preset function equipped in half
Features For controlling measured integrated
hours Plenty of input methods size
hours
• Non-voltage input, Voltage input, free voltage input
Driving method AC motor AC motor Quartz oscillation type Quartz oscillation type
Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition or subtraction
12 V AC, 24 V AC, 12 V AC, 24 V AC, Flush mounting type: Unnecessary
48 V AC, 100 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, (Built-in battery)
Voltage 24 V DC
Power 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, PC board mounting type: 3 V DC
200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC (Battery is externally installed.)
Frequency 50/60Hz (common) 50/60Hz (common) — —
Counting integral/ Synchronizing with power supply Synchronizing with power supply ±0.01% ±50 ms in case of power on start
±100 ppm (25°C)
Counting max. speed frequency frequency ±0.01% ±30 ms in case of input signal start
Min. counting unit 0.1 h 0.1 h 0.1 h, 0.1 min, 1 s 0.1 h, 0.1 min, 1 s
Reset input — Manual reset Push button and external reset input terminal Push button and external reset input terminal
Max. power consumption Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W — Max. 1.5 W
Flush mounting type: 55 g 1.940 oz
Weight 80 g 2.822 oz 90 g 3.174 oz 50 g 1.764 oz
PC board mounting type: 15 g .529 oz
The numbers at the end of the part number indicate voltage.
Remarks — —
(See the remarks above.)
Page P. 174 P. 174 P. 148 P. 156

146
 HOUR METERS SELECTOR CHART
Types DIN 52 × 52 size Hour Meters TH Hour Meter: Round type
Name of product TH13 Hour Meter TH23 Hour Meter DC Hour Meter

Appearance

TH13 series TH23 series TH8 series

Counting range 0 to 99999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours 0 to 9999.9 hours
With zero reset function
Features For controlling total integrated hours Driven on DC power
For controlling measured integrated hours
Driving method AC motor AC motor Ceramic oscillation + AC motor
Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP)
100 V AC, 200 V AC, 110 V AC, 100 V AC, 200 V AC, 110 V AC,
Voltage 12 V DC, 24 V DC
115 to 120 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC 115 to 120 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Power
Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz —
Counting integral/
Synchronizing with power supply frequency Synchronizing with power supply frequency ±0.2% (25°C)
Counting max. speed
Min. counting unit 0.1 h 0.1 h 0.1 h
Reset input — Manual reset —
Max. power consumption Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.5 W
Weight 130 g 4.586 oz 135 g 4.762 oz 170 g 5.997 oz
Both the TH13 and 23 series have numbers at the end of the part number that indicate the voltage
and frequency required.
Remarks The third number from the front of the part number indicates the required voltage as follows: 4:100
V, 5:200 V, 6:110 V, 7:115 V (for 50 Hz only) or 115 V to 120 V (for 60 Hz only), 8:220 V, 9:240 V —
The fourth number from the front of the part number indicates the required frequency as follows:
5:50 Hz, 6:60 Hz
Ex.) The part number for the TH13 series of 220 V & 50 Hz specification is TH1385.
Page P. 166 P. 166 P. 178

147
LH2H

DIN HALF SIZE LH2H

HOUR METER
Hour Meters

Panel mounting type
One-touch installation type
Panel mounting type
Installation frame type
PC board mounting type
RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/
Features
1. 8.7 mm Character Height
(previously 7 mm .343 inch)
Easy-to-read character height increased
from 7 mm to 8.7 mm .276 inch to .343
inch.
8.7mm
.343inch
2. Plenty of Digits
7 digits
3. Select by switch between two time
ranges in a single meter.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable
4. Panel Mounting Type Features 2
Installation Methods
Comes with very easy one-touch
installation type and also installation
frame type that uses the frame on the
timer/counter. Choose a method that
suits the application.
5. Battery Replacement Easy on
Environment
To replace battery simply remove body
for the one-touch installation type, and
remove battery lid for the installation
frame type.
6. Screw Terminals Designed for
Safety
Built in finger protection.
7. Panel Covers Replacable
(Standard color is ash gray.)
Change the panel design by replacing
with a black panel cover.
8. Conforms to IP66 Protective
Construction (Only installation frame
type.) (Front panel surface)
9. Input Methods
1) Non-voltage input method
2) Voltage input method
3) Free voltage input method
10. Backlight Type Added to Series
and Now 2-color Switchable (green/
red)
Easy viewing even in dark places and
switchable between green and red
(Voltage input type).
11. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE
marking.

Product chart
Type Standard type Backlight type
Voltage input type Free voltage input type Voltage input type
Installation type Non-voltage input type
(4.5 to 30 V DC) (24 to 240 V AC/DC) (4.5 to 30 V DC)
Panel One-touch installation type




mounting
type Installation frame type




PC board mounting type
— — —

Product types
1. Panel mounting type
1) One-touch installation type
1 Standard type
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK
Non-voltage input type
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-FE-HMK
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK-DL
7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-FE-HMK-DL
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK-FV
Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-FE-HMK-FV

148
 LH2H
2 Backlight type
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-FE-DHK-DL-B
7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-FE-HMK-DL-B

2) Installation frame type

1 Standard type
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK
Non-voltage input type
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK-DL
7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK-DL
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK-FV
Free voltage input type (24 to 240 V AC/DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK-FV

2 Backlight type
No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h switchable LH2H-F-DHK-DL-B
7 digits Yes Voltage input type (4.5 to 30 V DC)
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m switchable LH2H-F-HMK-DL-B

2. PC board mounting type

No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No.
0 to 999999.9h LH2H-C-H-N
7 digits No Non-voltage input type
0 to 9999h59.9m LH2H-C-HM-N

Specifications
1. Panel mounting type
Type Standard type Backlight type Standard type
Item Non-voltage input Voltage input Free voltage type
No. digits 7 digits
External power supply Not required (built-in battery)
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h (Switchable by switch)
Measurement time range
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m (Switchable by switch) Separate product type
Min. input signal width 200 ms
High level:
Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC Low level:
connection
Start 0 to 2.4 V AC/DC
input When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Approx. 4.7 kΩ —
When open:
Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V — —
Min. input signal width 100 ms
Non-voltage input using Non-voltage input using
High level: 4.5 to 30 V DC
Input method (signal) contacts or open collector contacts or open collector
Low level: 0 to 2 V DC
connection connection
Reset
input When shorted: When shorted:
Max. 10 kΩ Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance Appox. 4.7 kΩ
When open: When open:
Max. 750 kΩ Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max 0.5 V — Max. 0.5 V
7-segment LCD
Display method 7-segment LCD 7-segment LCD
With green/red backlight
Between charged and
Breakdown voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute. uncharged parts:
2,000 V AC for 1 minute.
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.
Backlight power — 24 V DC (±10%) —
Protective construction (Note) IEC Standard IP66 (only panel front: when using rubber gasket)
Accessories (Note) Rubber gasket, mounting bracket
Battery life 10 years (at 25°C 77°F)
Note) Only for installation frame type.

149
LH2H
2. PC board mounting type
Type
PC board mounting type
Item
Input method Non DC voltage input
No. digits 7 digits
Rated operation voltage 3 V DC
Allowable operation voltage range 2.7 to 3.3 V DC
Current consumption Max. 20 µA (max. 200 µA during reset input)
Measurement time range 0 to 999999.9h 0 to 9999h59.9m
Min. input signal width 200 ms
Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
Start
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual voltage Max. 0.5 V
Min. input signal width 10 ms
Input method Non-voltage input using contacts or open collector connection
Reset
input When shorted: Max. 10 kΩ
Input impedance
When open: Max. 750 kΩ
Residual power Max. 0.5 V
Break down voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 1,000 V AC for 1 minute.
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ (measured at 500 V DC) Measurement location same as for break down voltage.

3. Common
Type
Panel mounting/PC board mounting types
Item
Time accuracy ±100 ppm (25°C 77°F)
Functional 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 min. on 3 axes)
Vibration resistance
Destructive 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.), single amplitude: 0.375 mm (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Operation temperature –10 to +55°C +14 to +131°F (without frost or dew)
Storage temperature –25 to +65°C –13 to +149°F (without frost or dew)
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)

Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category III
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
EMC 8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (90 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

150
 LH2H
Part names
1. Front reset button HOUR METER Time range switch
Reset the elapsed time. It does not work
when the lock switch is ON. Be aware
that battery life will decrease if this switch RESET h m s
LH2H
is used frequently.
2. Lock switch (Refer to chart on
Front reset button Time unit seal
right.)
Disable the front reset button. Lock switch
Note) Turn ON at the LCD side (reset disabled) and
OFF at the terminal block side (reset enabled).
3. Time range switch (See chart on
right).
Switch the time range. 0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h 0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m
Note) Always press the front reset button when
operating the time range switch. (Terminal block side) OFF❇
4. Time unit sticker
Lock switch
Unit seals are included in the package. (Unit display 1)
Affix them in accordance with the time
(LCD side) ON
range.

(Terminal block side) 0 to 999999.9h❇ (Terminal block side) 0 to 9999h59.9m❇

Count speed
switch
(Unit display 2)
(LCD side) 0 to 3999d23.9h (LCD side) 0 to 999h59m59s

Notes) 1. ❇Default setting when shipped.

2. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
1. Panel mounting type
• External dimensions • Panel installation diagram
1) One-touch installation type
44.8
1.764 M3.5
M.138

Panel (1 to 4.5mm
54.4 .039 to .177inch
2.142 Rubber spacer
thickness)

Note) When installing to a 4.5 mm .177 inch thick panel, remove the rubber spacer
first.

When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure

10.4 (44) 5 48 that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
.409 (1.732) .197 1.890
To prevent the installation spring
HOUR METER from pinching the rubber gasket:
22 24 1. Set the rubber gasket on both
.866 .945 RESET
ends of the installation spring
LH2H
(left and right).
7
.276 Reset button 2. Confirm that the installation
spring is not pinching the rubber
gasket, and then insert and fix the
installation spring in place from the
rear of the timer unit.

151
LH2H
2) Installation frame type • Panel mounting diagram
44.8 Mounting screws Mounting frame
1.764 M3.5 (found on mounting bracket) ATH3803 (included)
M.138

54.4 37
2.142 1.457

Rubber gasket
Panel ATH3804 (included)
(1 to 4.5mm .039 to .177inch thickness)

10.4 44 5 48
.409 1.732 .197 1.890

HOUR METER

22 24
.866 .945 RESET

LH2H

7
.276 Reset button

• Panel cut-out dimensions • For connected installation (sealed installation)

The standard panel cut-out is shown below. (Only installation frame type.)
Use the mounting frame (ATH3803) and the rubber packing (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type.)

22.2+0.5
0
.874+.020
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0
A=(1.890×n-.098)+.039
0
60 min.
2.362 min.
45+0.5
0
1.772+.020
0
Notes) 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm .039 to .177 inch.
2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
+0.5
22.2 0
+.020
.874 0

• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

1) Standard type
Non voltage input type Voltage input type Free voltage input type

Start input Reset input Start input Reset input Start input Reset input
+V +V

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 4

0V 0V
W-R are connected internally.

2) Backlight type
Voltage input type

Backlight
<When green> <When red>
0V +V
Start input Reset input
+V +V
5 5 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
6 6 6
0V 0V

0V +V

152
 LH2H
2. PC board mounting type General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039 mm inch
• External dimensions
PC board pattern (BOTTOM VIEW)
33.02±0.3
5.08±0.3 1.300±.012 5.08±0.3
2.54 Mounting area
.200±.012 .200±.012
0.6±0.1 .100 1.9
.024±.004 DIP switch × 8 .075

2.54
3.3±0.3 .100 15.24 Connection sockets
.130±.012 .600 28 pin DIP terminal
8-0.8 dia.
8-.031 dia.
1.9
43.4 17.3 0.5±0.3 5.08 5.19 .075
1.709 .681 .020±.012 .200 .204
5.19 5.08
.204 .200
19 15.24±0.3 33.02
.748 .600±.012 1.300
HOUR METER LH2H

0.3±0.1
General tolerance: ±0.1 ±.004
.012±.004
Note: The AXS212811K is recommended as a compatible connection socket.
• Terminal layout and wiring diagrams

15 17 26 28
Start input Reset input
14 12 3 1

Q-E, }-w, e-t and S-F are connected internally.

An external power supply is required.

Input method
1. Standard type
Non-voltage input type
Panel mounting type PC board mounting type
Transistor input Transistor input
Contact input Contact input
NPN transistor NPN transistor

15 17 26 28 15 17 26 28
Start Reset Start 1 2 3 4 Reset Start Reset Start Reset
1 2 3 4 input input input input
input input input input 14 12 3 1 14 12 3 1

0V 0V
(W and R are connected internally.) (W and R are connected internally.) 3V DC 3V DC

Notes) 1. When using contact input, since current flow is small from terminals 1 and 3 on the panel mounting type and terminals e to t and S to F on the PC board
mounting type, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability.
2. When using transistor input, use the following as a guide for which transistors (Tr) to use for inputting. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)

Voltage input type

Transistor input Free voltage input type
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor
+V +V +V +V
Start Reset
input input Start Reset
Reset input
1 2 3 4
Start input

input input
1 2 3 4 Start Reset 1 2 3 4
input 1 2 3 4 input
or or or

Notes) 1. 2 and 4. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
2. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
3. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

153
LH2H
2. Backlight type
Voltage input type
Transistor input Backlight connection
Contact input
NPN transistor PNP transistor

+V +V Green Red
+V +V
Start Reset
24V DC
input input Start 1 2 3 4 Reset
input input 5 5
5 Start 5 Reset
1 2 3 4 input 1 2 3 4 input 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
6 6 6 6

24V DC

Notes) 1. Do not reverse the polarities when connecting the DC voltage for the backlight.
2. 2 and 4. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.)
3. When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand voltage Q 50 V, leakage current < 1 µA)
4. Be aware that the application of voltage that exceeds the voltage range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of voltage to the reset input
terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

Explanation of operation
1. Time measuring takes place when the
ON ON
start input is ON.
Start input
2. When the elapsed (measured) time OFF

reaches full scale it returns to “0”, and ON

then measuring starts again from “0”. Reset input OFF
3. When reset input is ON, the display
becomes “0”. You cannot measure during Full scale
reset input.
For PC board mounting type the display
disappears while the reset input is ON; PC board type
however, the display reads “0” when the
Elapsed time
reset input turns OFF.
4. Press the front reset button if you want 0

to perform a manual reset (for panel

installation type)

154

Cautions for use
1. Non-voltage input type
For both panel mounting and PC
board mounting types
1) Never apply voltage to the non-voltage
input type. This will damage the internal
elements.
2) Since the current flow is very small
from the start input and reset input
LH2H
3) When wiring, try to keep all the input 5. Backlight luminance
lines to the start and reset inputs as short To prevent varying luminance among
as possible and avoid running them backlights when using multiple Backlight
together with high voltage and power types, please use the same backlight
transmission lines or in a power conduit. power supply.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires
5 5
exceeds 500 pF (10 m 32.808 ft. for 24V DC 2 2 2
6
2
6
24V DC

terminals (1 and 3 on the panel parallel wires of 2 mm2). Green Red

mounting type and terminals e to t and
S to F on the PC board mounting type)
please use relays and switches with high
contact reliability. When inputting with an
open collector of a transistor, use a
transistor for small signals in which ICBO
is 1 µA or less and always input with no
voltage.
3) When wiring, try to keep all the input
lines to the start and reset inputs as short
as possible and avoid running them
together with high voltage and power
transmission lines or in a power conduit.
Also, malfunctions might occur if the
floating capacitance of these wires
exceeds 500 pF (10 m 32.808 ft. for
parallel wires of 2 mm2). In particular,
when using shielded wiring, be careful of
the capacitance between wires.
PC board mounting type
1) For external power supply use
manganese dioxide or lithium batteries
(CR type: 3V).
2) Always reset after external power is
applied and confirm that the display
reads “0”.
3) Make the wiring from the battery to the
hour meter unit as short as absolutely
possible. Also, be careful of polarity.
4) Calculate battery life with the following
formula.
t = A/I
t: battery life [h]
I: LH2H current consumption [mA]
A: battery capacity until minimum
operation voltage is reached [mAh]
5) Hand solder to the lead terminal. Do
not dip solder. With the tip of the
soldering iron at 300°C 572°F perform
soldering within 3 seconds (for 30 to 60
W soldering iron).
2. Voltage input type
1) Be aware that applying more than 30 V
DC to start input terminals 1 and 2, and
3. Free voltage input type
1) Use start input terminals 1 and 2 for
free voltage input and reset terminals 3
and 4 for non-voltage input.
2) Be aware that the application of
voltage that exceeds the voltage range of
the H level to the start input terminal, and
the application of voltage to the reset
input terminal, can cause damage to the
internal elements.
3) Since the current flow is very small
from reset input terminal 3, please use
relays and switches with high contact
reliability.
4) When inputting a reset with an open
collector of a transistor, use a transistor
for small signals in which ICBO is 1 µA or
less and always input with no voltage.
5) To reset externally, short reset input
terminals 3 and 4 on the rear.
6) Input uses a high impedance circuit;
therefore, erroneous operation may occur
if the influence of induction voltage is
present. If you plan to use wiring for the
input signal that is 10 m or longer (wire
capacitance 120 pF/m at normal
temperature), we recommend the use of
a CR filter or the connection of a bleeder
resistor.
4. How to reset multiple panel
mounting type counters all at once
(input is the same for count)
Non-voltage input type
D D D
Tr
3 4 3 4 3 4
Notes) 1. Use the following as a guide for choosing
transistors used for input (Tr).
Leakage current < 1 µA
2. Use as small a diode (D) as possible in the
forward voltage so that the voltage between
terminals 3 and 4 during reset input meets
the standard value (0.5 V).
( At IF = 20 µA, forward voltage 0.1 and
higher.)
6. Acquisition of CE marking
Please abide by the conditions below
when using in applications that comply
with EN 61010-1/IEC 61010-1
1) Ambient conditions
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
• Indoor use
• Acceptable temperature and humidity
range: –10 to +55°C, 35 to 85%RH (with
no condensation at 20°C)
• Under 2000 m elevation
2) Use the main unit in a location that
matches the following conditions.
• There is minimal dust and no corrosive
gas.
• There is no combustible or explosive
gas.
• There is no mechanical vibration or
impacts.
• There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
• Located away from large-volume
electromagnetic switches and power
lines with large electrical currents.
3) Connect a breaker that conforms to
EN60947-1 or EN60947-3 to the voltage
input section.
4) Applied voltage should be protected
with an overcurrent protection device
(example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse)
that conforms to the EN/IEC standards.
(Free voltage input type)
7. Terminal connection
Tighten the terminal screws with a torque
of 0.8 N·cm or less.
or

reset input terminals 3 and 4 will cause Voltage input type

damage to the internal elements. R
+V +V

2) For external resetting use H level 3 4 3 4 3 4

Tr
or 3 4
(application of 4.5 to 30 V DC) between
reset terminals 3 and 4 of the rear
terminals. In this case, connect + to Note) Make sure that H (reset ON) level is at least 4.5
V.
terminal 3 and – to terminal 4. This is
the valid polarity; therefore, the hour
meter will not work if reversed.

155
LH2H

PRESET HOUR METER

LH2H
Hour Meter

Features
1. Preset function equipped in half 3. 8.7 mm 0.343 inch Character Height
size (24 × 48 mm 0.945 × 1.890 inch). (previously 7 mm 0.276 inch)
2. Display has backlight for instant Easy-to read character height increased
recognition. from 7 mm to 8.7 mm 0.276 inch to 0.343
inch.
Time counting Timing up
Red or (Green) 8.7mm
(backlight)
.343inch

Green or (Red) 4. Plenty of Digits

(backlight) (Lit or Flashing)

Red or (Green) 7 digits

(backlight)
Green or Red can
be selected at setup. 5. Select by switch between two time
ranges in a single meter.
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h
(Lit or Flashing) Selectable
Lit or Flashing can 0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m
be selected at setup.
Selectable
6. Conforms to IP66 Protective
Construction (Front panel surface)
Weatherproofing supported by using
optional mounting bracket and rubber
gasket
7. Includes reassuring lock mode and
lock switch to prevent erroneous
operation.
8. Screw terminals are constructed to
protect fingers to ensure safety.
RoHS Directive compatibility information
9. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE
http://www.nais-e.com/ marking.

Product types
Measurement time
No. digits Operation mode Output Operating voltage Part No.
range
0 to 999999.9h/
0 to 3999d23.9h G (Totalizing ON delay) LH2HP-FEW-DHK-B-DC24V
selectable B (Signal ON delay)
7 digits Transistor (1a) 24 V DC
0 to 999h59m59s/ F (Signal flicker)
0 to 9999h59.9m E (Pulse ON delay) LH2HP-FEW-HMK-B-DC24V
selectable
Mounting frame ATH3803
Options Use for waterproofing (front panel surface)
Rubber gasket ATH3804
Note: Mounting frame and rubber gasket are not included.

156
 LH2H
Specifications
Item Descriptions
Rated operating voltage 24 V DC
Rated power consumption Max. 1.5 W
Rated control output 100 mA 30 V DC
Time counting direction Addition or Subtraction (selectable by front switch)
0 to 999999.9h/0 to 3999d23.9h (selectable by slide switch on side)
Measurement time range
0 to 999h59m59s/0 to 9999h59.9m (selectable by slide switch on side)
Start input Min. input signal width: Min. 30 ms
Rating Reset input Min. input signal width: Min. 30 ms
• Non-voltage input using contacts or open-collector connection
Input signal • Input impedance; when shorted: Max. 1 kΩ, when open: Min. 100 kΩ
• Residual voltage: Max. 2 V
Totalizing ON delay, Signal ON delay, Signal flicker, Pulse ON delay
Operation mode
(selectable by front switch)
7-segment LCD
Display method
(Switch between red and green for backlight, and between lit and flashing for time up.)
Power failure emory EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: 105 operations or more)
Operating time fluctuation
Voltage error
±0.01% ±50 ms  Rated operating voltage: 
Time in case of power on start  85 to 110% 
accuracy Temperature error ±0.01% ±30 ms  Ambient temperature: 
Setting error
in case of input signal start  –10 to +55°C +14 to +131°F 
Contact arrangement 1 Form A (Open collector)
Electrical life (contact) 107 operations (at rated control voltage)
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated operating voltage
Electrical Break down voltage (Initial value) Between input and output: 1,500 V AC, for 1 min.
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Between input and output: 100 MΩ (at 500 V DC)
Functional vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.15 mm (10 min. on 3 axes)
Destructive vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min), Single amplitude: 0.375 mm (1 hr. on 3 axes)
Mechanical
Functional shock resistance Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times on 3 axes)
Destructive shock resistance Min. 294 m/s2 (5 times on 3 axes)
Operation temperature –10 to 55°C +14 to +131°F (without frost or dew)
Operating
Storage temperature –25 to +65°C –13 to +149°F (without frost or dew)
conditions
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with mounting bracket and rubber gasket)
* The factory default preset value is set to 0.1.

Applicable standard
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
EMC
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
1 kV (signal line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

157
LH2H
Part names
1. Front reset key 7 6
This key resets the elapsed value. It does
not work when the lock switch is ON. HOUR METER

2. Mode key
Use to set preset values or to switch
RESET

between each mode. MODE SET

LH2H
3. Setting key 1 2 3 4 5
Used to set digits of preset values or set
each mode.
4. Set key
Use to set preset values or to switch
between modes. ❇: Default setting when shipped.
5. Time unit seal
LH2HP-FEW-DHK-B-DC24V LH2HP-FEW-HMK-B-DC24V
Unit seals are included in the package.
Affix them in accordance with the time (Terminal block side) OFF❇
Lock
range. switch
6. Lock switch 6
(unit
Disable the operation of the front panel display 1) (LCD side) ON
reset key and the mode key. With the lock
switch on, is displayed for about
two seconds when the reset key or mode Time (Terminal block side) 0 to 999999.9h❇ (Terminal block side) 0 to 9999h59.9m❇
range
switch is operated. 7 switch
7. Time range switch (unit
Switch the time range. display 2) (LCD side) 0 to 3999d23.9h (LCD side) 0 to 999h59m59s

Notes: 1. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.

2. Please turn the power off if you change the setting of the time range switch when the power is on. The
setting will become valid when the power is turned back on.

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
• External dimensions
44.8 M3.5
1.764
M.138 When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure
that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket.
To prevent the installation spring
54.4 from pinching the rubber gasket:
2.142
1. Set the rubber gasket on both
ends of the installation spring
(left and right).
2. Confirm that the installation
spring is not pinching the rubber
10.4 44 5 48
.409 1.732 .197 1.890 gasket, and then insert and fix the
HOUR METER
installation spring in place from the
22 24
.866 .945 rear of the timer unit.
RESET

MODE SET LH2H

7
.276

• Panel cut out dimensions • For connected installation (sealed installation)

The standard panel cut out is shown below. (Only installation frame type)
Use the mounting frame (ATH3803) and the rubber gasket (ATH3804).
(Only installation frame type)

22.2+0.5
0
.874+.020
0

A
A=(48×n-2.5)+1.0
0
A=(1.890×n-.098)+.039
0
60 min.
2.362 min.
45+0.5
0
1.772+.020
0
Notes: 1. Suitable installation panel thickness is 1 to 4.5 mm 0.39 to 0.177 inch.
2. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation).
22.2+0.5
0
.874+.020
0

158
 LH2H
How to set
1. Preset value setting mode 2) The display reads “Un-Lock” after 4) The backlight changes from flashing
This is the mode for setting preset values. entering the lock mode (initial setting). green to flashing red to lit green and to lit
red with each press of the setting key.
Display after entering lock mode
(Example showing “Un-Lock”.)
5) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
Press the MODE key. Set the digit. Set the value. the current backlight color and returns
3) Pressing the setting key changes the you to regular operation mode.
1) Pressing the MODE key takes you to display between “ Lock” and “Un- Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
the preset value setting mode. lock”. mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.
Sample display in preset value
setting mode (Example showing “ Lock”.)
4. Time counting direction setting
(when preset value is 100.0h) mode
* The factory default preset value is set to 1.0. 4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets This is the mode for setting addition or
2) Pressing the setting key moves the the content displayed and returns you to subtraction.
flashing digit left by one. Following the regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
+
highest digit it returns to the lowest digit Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
and each time the digit setting key is key.
the MODE key.

pressed it moves one to the left.
3) Pressing the set key increases the
value by one. (After 9 it returns to 0 and
then changes to 1, 2, 3, etc.)
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the displayed preset value and returns
you to the regular operation mode.
5) In the preset value setting mode if you
do not operate the digit setting key or the
set key for ten seconds or more you will
be returned to regular operation. In this
case the preset value will not change.
2. Lock mode
This mode prohibits everything except
the preset value setting mode.
+
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock
the MODE key.
1) Pressing the set key while holding
down the mode key takes you to the lock
mode.
5) When the lock mode display reads
“ Lock”, you will not be able to move
to the backlight setting mode, the time
counting direction setting mode, or the
operation setting mode.
3. Backlight setting mode
This is the mode for setting the backlight
during time up.
+ (Example showing “UP”)
Press the SET key while pressing Lit red
the MODE key. Lit green
1) Pressing the SET key two times while
holding down the MODE key takes you to
the backlight setting mode.
2) The display in the backlight setting
mode reads “ LEd”
Lock
Display after entering
the backlight setting mode.
3) The LED backlight will be red (initial
setting).
1) Pressing the SET key three times
while holding down the MODE key takes
you to the time counting direction setting
mode.
2) The display after entering the time
counting direction setting mode reads
“ UP” (initial setting).
Display after entering time counting
direction setting mode
Flashes green
Flashes red 3) Pressing the setting key changes the
display to “dn” (subtraction) and pressing
it again changes it to “UP” (addition). The
display alternates between “dn” and “UP”.
(Example showing “dn”)
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
the content displayed and returns you to
regular operation mode.
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation
mode if you do not press the front panel reset
key.

159
LH2H
5. Operation mode
This sets the operation mode.
2) Lock mode
+ +
Press the SET key while pressing OP-G OP-B
Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock Lock
the MODE key. OP-E OP-F
the MODE key.
When the lock is set, you cannot enter modes other than
1) Pressing the SET key four times while backlight setting mode.
holding down the MODE key takes you to 3) Backlight setting mode
the operation setting mode. +
2) The display reads “OP-G” (Totalizing Press the SET key while pressing Lit red Flashes green
the MODE key. Lit green Flashes red
ON delay) after entering the operation
Front panel reset key
setting mode.
4) Time counting direction setting mode
+
Regular operation mode
Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction
the MODE key.
3) Pressing the setting key causes the
display to change as follows:
OP-B (Signal ON delay) 5) Operation setting mode
+
Press the SET key while pressing OP-G OP-B
the MODE key. OP-E OP-F

OP-F (Signal flicker)

Mode changes as follows by pressing the SET key while holding down the MODE key.
Lock mode Backlight setting mode
Operation setting mode Time counting direction setting mode

OP-E (Pulse ON delay) Please be aware that after doing a front Preset Output
Elapsed value
panel reset key and returning to regular value change
operation mode, the preset values, Lock mode × × ×
elapsed value and output will be as Backlight
OP-G (Totalizing ON delay) setting × × ×
shown in this table. mode
4) Pressing the front panel reset key sets
Time
the display content and returns you to counting Addition: “0”
regular operation mode. direction × Subtraction: ON➝OFF
Note: You will not be returned to regular operation setting “Preset value”
mode if you do not press the front panel reset mode
key. Operation Addition: “0”
setting × Subtraction: ON➝OFF
mode “Preset value”
Note: “×” sign: No change

Changing the set time (preset value)

1. It is possible to change the set time
even during time delay with the timer.
However, be aware of the following
points.
1) If the set time is changed to less than
the elapsed time (elapsed value) with the
time delay set to the addition direction,
time delay will continue until the elapsed
time reaches full scale, returns to “0
(zero)”, and then reaches the new set
time.
If the set time is changed to a time above
the elapsed time, the time delay will
continue until the elapsed time reaches
the new set time.
2) If the time delay is set to the
subtraction direction, time delay will
continue until “0 (zero)” regardless of the
new set time.
2. If the set time is changed to “0 (zero)”,
the hour meter will operate differently
depending on the operation mode.
In the G (Totalizing ON delay), B (Signal
ON delay), and E (Pulse ON delay)
modes, the output turns ON when the
start input is ON. However, the output will
be OFF while reset is being input.
In the F (Signal flicker) mode, the flicker
operation will not work even if start input
is turned ON.

160
 LH2H
Operation mode
Operation mode Explanation Time chart
• Elapsed value does not clear at power ON. ON
Power supply OFF
(Power outage countermeasure function) T=t1+t2 T>ta
Totalizing ON delay • The output remains ON even after the ON
Output OFF
power is OFF and restarted. T t1 t2 ta
G ON
Reset OFF

ON
Start OFF

• Clears elapsed value at power ON. ON

Power supply OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON and output
T T
Signal ON delay resets at start OFF. ON
Output OFF
• Time delay starts at reset OFF and power
B ON while start is ON.
ON
Reset OFF

ON
Start OFF

• Clears elapsed value at power ON. ON

Power supply OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON. T>ta
Signal Flicker • After timer completion, control output ON
Output OFF
reverses, elapsed value clears, and time T T T ta
F delay starts.
ON
Reset OFF

• Ignores start input during time delay. ON

Start OFF

• Clears elapsed value at power ON. ON

Power supply OFF
• Time delay starts at start ON.
Pulse ON delay • After timer completion, control output is ON
Output OFF
ON. T T T
E • Ignores start input during time delay.
ON
Reset OFF

ON
Start OFF

161
LH2H
Cautions for use
1. Input and output connection Also, use transistors with a residual 2) Output connection
1) Input connection voltage of less than 2 V when the Since the transistor output of hour meter
(1) Contact input transistor is on. is insulated from the internal circuitry by a
Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. * The short-circuit impedance should be less photo-coupler, it can be used as an NPN
Since the contact’s bounce time leads than 1 kΩ. output or PNP (equal value) output.
directly to error in the timer operating (When the impedance is 0 Ω, the current As NPN output
time, use contacts with as short a bounce coming from the start input terminal is
Load
time as possible. approximately 5 mA and from the reset
5 Load’s power
input terminal is approximately 1.5 mA.) 1 2
6
3 4
supply

Start 5 Reset Also, the open-circuit impedance should

input 1 2 3 4 input
6 be more than 100 kΩ. As PNP output
5
(2) Non-contact input (Transistor input) Start
input 1 2 3 4
Reset
input 1 2
5
3 4
Load’s power
6 supply
Connect with an open collector. Use 6
Load
transistors whose characteristics satisfy
the criteria given below. (3) Input wiring
VCEO = Min. 20 V When wiring, use shielded wires or
IC = Min. 20 mA metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire
ICBO = Max. 6 µA lengths as short as possible.

2. Self-diagnosis function 4. Terminal connection

If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. 1) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and
Output Restoration Preset values after wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly
Display Contents
condition procedure restoration without errors.
Preset value at Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of 0.8 N·cm or less.
Malfunctioning Enter front start-up before the The screws are M3.5.
Err-00
CPU reset key or CPU malfunction An external power supply is required in order to run the main
OFF
restart hour occurred unit.
Malfunctioning meter
Err-01 0 Power should be applied between
memory* 5
terminals (1) and (2). Terminal (1) acts 1 2 3 4
* Includes the possibility that the EEP-ROM’s life has expired. 6
as the positive connection and terminal
3. Power failure memory
(2) as the negative.
The EEP-ROM is overwriting with the following timing. Operating voltage
Operation mode Overwrite timing 2) After turning the hour meter off, make sure that any resulting
G (Totalizing ON delay) Change of preset value or when power is induced voltage or residual voltage is not applied to power
mode OFF after start and reset input turns ON
supply terminals (1) through (2). (If the power supply wire is
When power is OFF after changing preset wired parallel to the high voltage wire or power wire, an induced
Other modes
value
voltage may be generated at the power supply terminal.)
3) Have the power supply voltage pass through a switch or relay
so that it is applied at one time.

Compliance with the CE marking

• EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
The LH2H Preset Hour Meter conforms
to the EMC Directive as a simple hour
meter.
Applicable standards: EN61000-6-4,
EN61000-6-2

162

PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE LH2H SERIES
Cautions for use
1. Insulation sheet
Before using a panel mounting type,
please pull and remove the insulation
sheet in the direction of the arrow.
In consideration that the product might be
stored for long periods without being
used, an insulation sheet is inserted
before shipping. Remove the insulation
sheet and press the front reset button.
• LH2H hour meter (one-touch
installation type)
Reset button
Insulation sheet
• LH2H hour meter (installation frame
type)
Reset button
Insulation sheet
2. Waterproof construction
• LH2H hour meter (installation frame
type)
The operation part of the panel
installation type (installation frame type)
is constructed to prevent water from
entering the unit and a rubber gasket is
provided to prevent water from entering
the gap between the unit and the panel
cutout.
There must be sufficient pressure applied
to the rubber gasket to prevent water
from entering.
Be sure to use the mounting screws
when installing the mounting frame
(ATH3803).
Note: The one-touch installation type is
not waterproof.
Mounting frame
(ATH3803)
• LH2H preset hour meter
1) When using the waterproof type (IP66:
panel front only), install the hour meter to
the front plate with mounting frame
ATH3803 (sold separately) and rubber
gasket ATH3804 (sold separately). Be
sure to tighten using mounting screws.
Mounting frame
(ATH3803)
Rubber gasket (ATH3804)
When installing the mounting frame
and rubber gasket please remove the
pre-attached o-ring.
2) Panel installation order
(1) Remove o-ring.
(2) Place rubber gasket.
(3) Insert hour meter into panel.
(4) Insert mounting frame from the
rear.
(5) Secure with mounting screws (two
locations)
3. Do not use in the following
environments
1) In places where the temperature
changes drastically.
2) In places where humidity is high and
there is the possibility of dew.
(When dew forms the display may vanish
and other display errors may occur.)
4. Conditions of use
1) Do not use on places where there is
flammable or corrosive gas, lots of dust,
presence of oil, or where the unit might
be subject to strong vibrations or shocks.
2) Since the cover is made of
polycarbonate resin, do not use in places
where the unit might come into contact
with or be exposed to environments that
contain organic solvents such as methyl
alcohol, benzene and thinner, or strong
alkali substances such as ammonia and
caustic soda.
LH2H
5. Cautions regarding battery
replacement
1) Remove wiring before replacing the
battery. You may be electrocuted if you
come into contact to a part where high
voltage is applied.
2) Make sure you are not carrying a static
electric charge when replacing the
battery.
3) Battery replacement procedure
For LH2H hour meter (one-touch
installation type)
(1) Remove the up/down hook of the
case using a tool.
(2) Pull the unit away from the case.
(3) Remove the battery from the side of
the unit. Do not touch the display or
other parts.
(4) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(5) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(6) After replacing the battery, return
the unit to the case. Verify that the
hook of the case has properly
engaged.
(7) Before using, press the reset button
on the front.
Tool
1
2
1
3
6
163
LH2H
For LH2H hour meter
1
(installation frame type)
(1) Remove the battery cover from the
case.
(2) Remove the battery from the side of
the case. The battery will come
loose if you put the battery side face
down and lightly shake the unit.
(3) Before inserting wipe clean the
surface of the new battery.
(4) Insert the new battery with the “+”
and “–” sides in the proper position.
(5) After replacing the battery, return 2
the battery cover to the case. Verify “+” side
that the hook of the battery cover is
properly engaged.
(6) Before using press the reset button
5
on the front. “−” side

Options
1. Accessories (for LH2H hour meter) 2. Lithium battery (3 V) 3. Installation parts
Panel cover (black) Mounting frame
Pa
CR2n4asonic Suitable for installation frame type LH2H
3V 77
JAPA
N
HOUR METER
hour meter and LH2H preset hour meter

RESET Part No.: ATH3802

LH2H
Part No.: ATH3801
You can change the design of the front
panel by replacing it with this black panel
cover. The counter comes with an ash
gray panel cover as standard.
Note: No panel cover option (black) is available for the
LH2H preset hour meter.
Packaged with the LH2H (excluding the
PC board mounting type).
Warning
• Make sure the “+” and “−” polarities are
positioned correctly. Part No.: ATH3803
Packaged with the mounting bracket type
• Do not throw the old battery into a fire,
short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to LH2H hour meter
come into contact with heat.
• The battery is not rechargeable. Rubber gasket
Suitable for installation frame type LH2H
hour meter and LH2H preset hour meter

Part No.: ATH3804

Packaged with the mounting bracket type
LH2H hour meter

164
PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE HOUR METERS
1. Frequency setting 5. Reset-type hour meter
Frequency is specified for AC motor-driven hour meters. Before • Precautions for use
installing, be sure to check your local power frequency. If the number indications are off before use, press the reset
2. Connections button and confirm that all zeroes ("0") are displayed.
• TH13,23,14,24,40,50,63,64 • Resetting caution
Exercise due caution as an insufficient amount of pressure on
For measuring energized time of load For measuring operation time of load
the reset button may result in abnormal readings.
Hour meter Hour meter
Switch (Linked 6. Acquisition of CE marking
Single with clutch)
phase Load Load
Please abide by the conditions below when using in applica-
tions that comply with EN 61010-1/IEC 61010-1
1) Ambient conditions
Hour meter Hour meter
Switch (Linked
with clutch)
• Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2
Three
phases Load Load • Indoor use
• Acceptable temperature and humidity range: -10 to +55°C,
Note) Make the connection with the accompanying flat connector first and then 35 to 85%RH (with no condensation at 20°C)
with the hour meter's terminal (#187). In such case, be sure to cover the connec- • Under 2000 m elevation
tion with the accompanying insulating sleeve. 2) Use the main unit in a location that matches the following
• TH70, TH8 conditions.
Lead wire DC motor type hour meter • There is minimal dust and no corrosive gas.
• There is no combustible or explosive gas.
DC power source Load • There is no mechanical vibration or impacts.
Note) Solder the lead wires in position. • There is no exposure to direct sunlight.
• Located away from large-volume electromagnetic switches
3. Safety precautions and power lines with large electrical currents.
Do not use the hour meters in the following places. 3) Connect a breaker that conforms to EN60947-1 or EN60947-
• Where ambient temperature is below –10° or above +50°C 3 to the voltage input section.
• In wet, dusty or gaseous environments 4) Applied voltage should be protected with an overcurrent pro-
• Where exposed to vibrations and shocks tection device (example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse) that
• Outdoors, or where exposed to rain or direct sunlight conforms to the EN/IEC standards. (Free voltage input type)
4. Compliant with CE.
• LH2H
Ambient conditions:
Overvoltage category III, contamination factor 2, indoor use.
Ambient temperature and humidity –10 and +55°C and 35%
to 85%RH respectively.
• TH13, 23, 14, 24, 40, 50, 63, 64
Ambient conditions:
Overvoltage category II, contamination factor 2, indoor use.
Ambient temperature and humidity –10 and +50°C and below
85%RH respectively.

165
 HOUR METER
TH13·TH23
Hour Meters
52
2.047
UL File No.: E42876
CSA File No.: LR39291
Features
52 1. High-performance compact synchronous motor
2.047
The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer period of measurement.
2. Compact and stylish
3. Easier wiring
The flat terminals (#187) are quick and easy to connect.
54
2.126 mm inch 4. Rotary indicator
TH23 series (with reset function) The rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 minutes for monitoring.
5. Compliant with UL, CSA and CE.

Typical applications
Maintenance management of machine tools, automated machines, control panels,
forming machines, medical equipment, generators, compressors, water treatment facil-
ities, presses, motors, etc.

TH13 series (without reset function)

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 100V AC, 200V AC, 110V AC, 115 to 120V AC, 220V AC, 240V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz (other model)
0 to 99999.9 hours (TH13 series)
Counting range
0 to 9999.9 hours (TH23 series)
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 MΩ, Between live and dead metal parts (At 500V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to 122°F
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 135 g 4.76 oz 130 g 4.59 oz

Product types
Part number Part number
Type Operating voltage Operating voltage
50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz
100V AC TH1345 TH1346 115V AC (115 to 120V AC) TH1375 TH1376
TH13 types
200V AC TH1355 TH1356 220V AC TH1385 TH1386
(without reset button)
110V AC TH1365 TH1366 240V AC TH1395 TH1396
100V AC TH2345 TH2346 115V AC (115 to 120V AC) TH2375 TH2376
TH23 types
200V AC TH2355 TH2356 220V AC TH2385 TH2386
(with reset button)
110V AC TH2365 TH2366 240V AC TH2395 TH2396
Note) The 115 to 120V AC, 220V AC and 240V AC types are UL-recognized and CSA-certified. For those products, specify “U” at the end of the part
number when ordering.

166
 TH13·TH23
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039

Mounting
Case bracket (supplied)
• TH13 series • TH23 series
Decorative nut
Reset button
46.8
1.843

RESET
6

52
52 .236

2.047
2.047 No.187 quick
5 4.75 connect terminal
.197 .187 (4.75 × 6.0 × 0.5)
54 (.187 × .236 × .020)
2.126
Rotary Rotary 72
indicator indicator 2.835

(TH13 and TH23 series common)

Wiring digram Panel mounting

• Panel cutout dimensions
Panel
Mounting
Case bracket (supplied)

+0.5
47 −0.1
+.020
Decorative 1.850 −.004
M nut

Operating power supply

5 67
.197 2.638

Replacing the TH13/23 series with the TH14/24 series

The TH13/TH23 series hour meter are interchangeable with the
TH14/24 series hour meter. Use the specified mounting frame because
of a different setup method. It is advisable to introduce the TH14/24
series hour meters for the first time.

DIN48 size and mounting frame setup

Panel
Mounting frame
(sold separately):
TH1400020

48

52

45

47

Mounting flame

167
 DIN48 SIZE TH14·TH24
HOUR METER
Hour Meters
UL File No.: E42876
CSA File No.: LR39291
80.5
3.169
Features
1. High-performance compact syncronous motor
The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer
48
1.890 period of measurement.
2. Common for 50/60 Hz power frequency
A lever is used to select 50 Hz or 60 Hz. There is no need to
rearrange the control panel and other signal destinations.
48
1.890 mm inch 3. Dimensions as per DIN 43700 standard
Silver panel Black panel The units are in the 48 × 48 DIN standard size. They can be fit-
ted in panels and give refined metallic appearance.
TH24 series (with reset button)
4. Easier wiring
The flat terminals (#187) are quick and easy to connect.
5. Rotary indicator
The rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 minutes for moni-
toring.
6. Compliant with UL, CSA and CE.

Typical applications
Maintenance management of machine tools, automated
Silver panel Black panel machines, control panels, forming machines, medical equip-
ment, generators, compressors, water treatment facilities,
TH14 series (without reset button)
presses, motors, etc.

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)
0 to 99999.9 hours (TH14 series)
Counting range
0 to 9999.9 hours (TH24 series)
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 MΩ; Between live and dead metal parts (At 500V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 145 g 5.11 oz (TH14 series) 150 g 5.29 oz (TH24 series)

Product types
Operating Part number Operating Part number Operating Part number
Type
voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel
TH14 series 100V AC TH141S TH141 24V AC TH144S TH144 115 to 120V AC TH147S TH147
(without reset 200V AC TH142S TH142 48V AC TH145S TH145 220V AC TH148S TH148
button) 12V AC TH143S TH143 110V AC TH146S TH146 240V AC TH149S TH149
TH24 series 100V AC TH241S TH241 24V AC TH244S TH244 115 to 120V AC TH247S TH247
(with reset 200V AC TH242S TH242 48V AC TH245S TH245 220V AC TH248S TH248
button) 12V AC TH243S TH243 110V AC TH246S TH246 240V AC TH249S TH249
Note) Only the black-panel type is UL-recognized and CSA-certified. For this type, specify “U” at the end of the part number when ordering.

168
 TH14·TH24
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions (TH14 and TH24 series common) mm inch

General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
No.187 quick
connect terminal
Mounting (4.7 × 6.0 × 0.5)
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative (.185 × .236 × .020)
nut

48 50 60Hz 44.8

1.890 1.969 1.764

50Hz
Rotary
indicator
5.5 75
.217 2.953 Frequency setting switch
94
3.701

Wiring diagram Panel mounting mm inch

• Panel cutout dimensions

Panel Mounting
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
nut

+0.6
M 45 0
+.024
1.772 0
50
1.969

Operating power supply 5.5 88.5

.217 3.484

169
 DIN48 DUAL INDICATOR TH40
HOUR METER
Hour Meters
80.5
3.169

Features
1. Upgraded composite function
48
Specified-period measurement and total-time measurement can
1.890 be monitored on a single hour meter.
2. High-performance compact syncronous motor
The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer
period of measurement.
48
1.890 mm inch 3. Common for 50/60 Hz power frequency
Silver panel A lever is used to select 50 Hz or 60 Hz. There is no need to
rearrange the control panel and other signal destinations.
4. Dimensions as per DIN 43700 standard
The units are in the 48 × 48 DIN standard size. They can be fit-
ted in panels and give refined metallic appearance.
5. Easier wiring
The flat terminals (#187) are quick and easy to connect.
6. Rotary indicator
The rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 minutes for moni-
toring.
Black panel 7. Compliant with CE.

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)
0 to 9999.9 hours (upper side) ... with reset indicator
Counting range
0 to 99999.9 hours (lower side) ... without reset indicator
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 MΩ; Between live and dead metal parts (At 500V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 160 g 5.64 oz

Product types
Operating Part number Operating Part number Operating Part number
Type
voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel
100V AC TH401S TH401 24V AC TH404S TH404 115 to 120V AC TH407S TH407
TH40 series 200V AC TH402S TH402 48V AC TH405S TH405 220V AC TH408S TH408
12V AC TH403S TH403 110V AC TH406S TH406 240V AC TH409S TH409

170
 TH40
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039

No.187 quick
Accumulated connect terminal
hours indicator Mounting (4.7 × 6.0 × 0.5)
Reset button (with reset indicator) Case bracket (supplied) Decorative (.185 × .236 × .020)
Total nut
accmulated
hours indicator
(without reset
indicator)

48 50 60Hz
44.8

1.890 1.969
1.764

50Hz
Rotary
indicator
5.5 75
.217 2.953 Frequency setting switch
94
3.701

Wiring diagram Panel mounting mm inch

• Panel cutout dimensions

Panel Mounting
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
nut
+0.6
45 0
M +.024
1.772 0

50
1.969

Operating power supply 5.5 88.5

.217 3.484

171
 DIN48 MINUTES INDICATOR TH50
HOUR METER
Hour Meters
80.5
3.169
Features
1. Measurement and management in units of minutes
Unlike conventional hour meters, the time can be measured and
48
1.890 managed in minutes.
2. Reset button
The hour meters can be reset to zero for repeated measure-
48
ment.
1.890 mm inch 3. High-performance compact syncronous motor
Silver panel The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer
period of measurement.
4. Common for 50/60 Hz power frequency
A lever is used to select 50 Hz or 60 Hz. There is no need to
rearrange the control panel and other signal destinations.
5. Dimensions as per DIN 43700 standard
The units are in the 48 × 48 DIN standard size. They can be fit-
ted in panels and give refined metallic appearance.
6. Easier wiring
The flat terminals (#187) are quick and easy to connect.
7. Rotary indicator
Black panel The rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 seconds for moni-
toring.
8. Compliant with CE.
RoHS Directive compatibility information
http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)
Counting range 0 to 9999.9 min
Minimum time display 0.1 min (6 sec)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 MΩ, Between live and dead metal parts (At 500 V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min. 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min. 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight 150 g 5.29 oz

Product types
Operating Part number Operating Part number Operating Part number
Type
voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel voltage Silver panel Black panel
100V AC TH501S TH501 24V AC TH504S TH504 115 to 120V AC TH507S TH507
TH50 series 200V AC TH502S TH502 48V AC TH505S TH505 220V AC TH508S TH508
12V AC TH503S TH503 110V AC TH506S TH506 240V AC TH509S TH509

172
 TH50
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039

No.187 quick
connect terminal
Mounting (4.7 × 6.0 × 0.5)
Reset button Case bracket (supplied) Decorative (.185 × .236 × .020)
nut

48 50 60Hz
44.8

1.890 1.969
1.764

50Hz
Rotary
indicator
5.5 75
.217 2.953 Frequency setting switch
94
3.701

Wiring diagram Panel mounting mm inch

• Panel cutout dimensions

Panel Mounting
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
nut
+0.6
45 0
M +.024
1.772 0

50
1.969

Operating power supply 5.5 88.5

.217 3.484

173
 DIN HALF SIZE TH63·TH64
HOUR METER
Hour Meters
UL File No.: E42876
57.5 CSA File No.: LR39291
2.264
2. Reset button
mm inch The hour meters can be reset to zero (TH64 series).
24 3. Wide-ranging measurement display
.945
The measurement can be displayed from 0.1 hour up to
99999.9 hours (TH63 series). The dial size is the same as that
48
of 48 × 48 DIN size hour meters (TH14 and TH24 series).
1.890 4. Easy to install
The flat terminals (#187) are used for easier wiring. There is no
TH64 series (with reset button)
need to undo the lock spring.
5. High-performance sync motor with 50/60 Hz selector
The noise-resistant, accurately turning motor is employed to
TH63 series (without reset button) provide for longer period of measurement. The power frequency
can be selected for 50 or 60 Hz.
6. Rotary indicator
RoHS Directive compatibility information The rotary indicator makes one turn every 72 seconds for moni-
http://www.nais-e.com/ toring.
7. Compliant with UL, CSA and CE.

Features Typical applications

1. Compact to save panel space Management of small generators and food processing
The 24 × 48 mm hour meters are just half the DIN 48 × 48 stan- machines; hour counting for leased equipment; maintenance
dard size. They help save the panel space. management of various equipment, etc.

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V AC, 24 V AC, 48 V AC, 100 V AC, 110 V AC, 115 to 120 V AC, 200 V AC, 220 V AC, 240 V AC
Allowable operating voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)
0 to 99999.9 hours (TH63 series)
Counting range
0 to 9999.9 hours (TH64 series)
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 MΩ, Between live and dead metal parts (At 500 V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Weight Approx. 80 g 2.82 oz

Product types
Type Operating voltage Part number Operating voltage Part number Operating voltage Part number
100V AC TH631 24V AC TH634 115 to 120V AC TH637
TH63 series
200V AC TH632 48V AC TH635 220V AC TH638
(without reset button)
12V AC TH633 110V AC TH636 240V AC TH639
100V AC TH641 24V AC TH644 115 to 120V AC TH647
TH64 series
200V AC TH642 48V AC TH645 220V AC TH648
(with reset button)
12V AC TH643 110V AC TH646 240V AC TH649
Notes) 1. Only the metallic-looking (silver) panel mounting type is available.
2. Standard products are UL-recognized as well as CSA-certified. There is no need to add “U” at the end of the part number. Just specify the
standard part number when ordering.

174
 TH63·TH64
Applicable standard
Safety standard EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage Category II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)
EMC
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)
Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)
100 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage)
5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020

Reset button (only for TH64 type)

Rotary indicator
Frequency selector lever

No.187 quick
connect terminal
HOUR METER
24
.945

48 4.5 53
1.890 .177 2.087
66
2.598

Wiring diagram mm inch

• Panel cutout dimensions

Panel (thickness:
1 to 9 mm .039 to .354 inch)
+0.6
45 0
+.024 For panel thickness of
1.772 0
5 to 9 mm .197 to .354 inch)
M
+0.3 R0.5 or less
22.2 0
+.012
.874 0

Operating power supply Mounting spring

(included)

Mounting
1. Cut a 22.2 +0.3
0 × 45 +0.6
0 mm (.874 +.012
0 × 3. Swing the mounting spring to the front Unfasten
1.772 +.024
0 inch) opening in the panel. of the hour meter to secure the hour Fasten
2. Swing the mounting spring to the rear meter to the panel.
of the hour meter and fit the hour 4. Wire the supplied quick connectors
meter into the panel opening. (There and connect to the hour meter. Be
is no need to detach the mounting sure to use the supplied insulating
spring from the hour meter.) If the sleeves to cover the connectors.
panel is 5 to 9 mm .197 to .354 inch
thick, move the mounting spring to the
other hole toward the rear of the hour
meter.

175
 DIN48 DC TYPE TH70
HOUR METER
Hour Meters
80.5
3.169
Features
1. Driven on DC power
The hour meters can be built in DC-powered control panels.
48
Machine tools and similar machinery are monitored from the
1.890 control panel for added safety.
2. High-performance compact sync motor with ultra-accu-
rate quartz oscillator
48 mm inch The quartz oscillator helps keep the monthly error shorter than
1.890
15 seconds (for 720 hours). The accurately turning motor is
Silver panel employed to provide for longer period of measurement.
3. Dimensions as per DIN 43700 standard
The units are in the 48 × 48 DIN standard size. They can be fit-
ted in panels and give refined metallic appearance.
4. Rotary indicator
The rotary indicator makes one turn every 2 minutes for moni-
toring.

Black panel

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Specifications
Rated operating voltage 12 V DC, 24 V DC
Allowable operating voltage range 80 to 120% of rated operating voltage
Counting range 0 to 9999.9 hours
Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)
Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W
Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. 100 MΩ Between live and dead metal parts (At 500 V DC)
Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms Between live and dead metal parts
Max. temperature rise 55°C 131°F
Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)
Functional Min 98 m/s2 {10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)
Shock resistance
Destructive Min 980 m/s2 {100 G} (5 times on 3 axes)
Ambient temperature –10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F
Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)
Power supply ripple Approx. 48% or less (single phase all-wave rectification)
Weight 170 g 6.00 oz

Product types
Part number
Type Operating voltage
Silver panel Black panel
12V DC TH703S TH703
TH70 series
24V DC TH704S TH704

176
 TH70
Dimensions mm inch
General tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039

Mounting
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
nut

48 50 44.8
1.890 1.969 1.764

Rotary
indicator
5.5 75 Lead wire ( =200)
.217 2.953 UL wire
94
3.701 Red
Blue

Wiring diagram Panel mounting mm inch

• Panel cutout dimensions

Panel Mounting
Case bracket (supplied) Decorative
nut

+0.6
45 0
M +.024
1.772 0

50
1.969

Red Blue
Operating power supply 5.5 88.5
.217 3.484

177
TH8

DC HOUR METER
TH8
Hour Meter

Features
1. IP66 waterproof construction
The front panel surface keeps water and
dust out. Perfect for use in rough
conditions.
2. Includes operation light (LED)
The operation LED illuminates so you
can quickly verify operation status.
3. Compliant with UL, c-UL and CE.

RoHS Directive compatibility information

http://www.nais-e.com/

Product type
Installation Measurement time Operation light Rated voltage Part No.
12 V DC TH833C
Panel installation 0 to 9999.9 hours LED illuminates while operating.
24 V DC TH834C
Note: Products are UL and c-UL certified as standard. (Suffix “U” is not required ON part numbers when ordering.)

Specifications
Type
TH833C TH834C
Item
Rated voltage 12 V DC 24 V DC
Usage voltage range 10.2 to 15.6 V DC 20.4 to 31.2 V DC
Rating Measurement time 0 to 9999.9 hours
Min. measurement time 0.1 hour (6 min.)
Power consumption Approx. 1.5 W (With rated voltage applied at 25°C 77°F)
Insulation resistance (initial) Min. 100 MΩ between charged and uncharged parts (measured at 500 V DC)
Electrical
Breakdown voltage (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts: 2,000 V AC for 1 minute.
characteristics
Temperature rise Max. 55°C 131°F (measured at rated voltage and resistance law)
10 to 55 Hz (1 cycle/min.)
Functional vibration resistance
Mechanical Single amplitude: 0.35 mm (10 min. ON 3 axes)
characteristics Functional shock resistance Min. 98 m/s2 (4 times ON 3 axes)
Destructive vibration resistance Min. 980 m/s2 (5 times ON 3 axes)
Operation temperature –20°C to +60°C –4°F to +140°F (Without due and frost)
Usage conditions Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (relative humidity) (non-condensing)
Power supply ripple Approx. 48% or less (single phase, all-wave rectification)
Protective construction IP66 (front panel with a rubber gasket)

Applicable standard
(EMI)EN61000-6-4
Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Group1 ClassA
Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA
(EMS)EN61000-6-2
Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact
EMC
8 kV air
RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)
EFT/B immunity EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz)
Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz)

178
 TH8
Dimensions and part names (unit: mm inch) Wiring diagram
Tolerance: ±1.0 ±.039
10.5 88.5 3.484
.413 75 2.953 31
M
68.5 2.697 1.181
Mounting bracket

R. 5.5
7
21
R
Red Black
HOUR METER
35.4
0 0 0 0 .0 h 1.394 Operation voltage
Power supply Installation
LED display screw
When the power is
turned ON the green Unit Spring washer 44
lamp illuminates 1.732

Panel installation diagram

Panel cutout dimensions

Lead wire
0.1N·m to 0.2N·m screw torque

φ 62
φ 2.441

φ 53 ±0.5
φ 2.087 ±.020
Rubber gasket Installation panel
(Unit: mm inch)

179
DISCONTINUED MODELS AND RECOMMENDED SUBSTITUTES
Timers
Discontinued models Recommended substitutes Attachment Discontinued models Recommended substitutes Attachment
MHP-NS Exposed type MHP-N Exposed type Terminal base AT8-RFD CHP-NF Exposed type PM4H-F Attachment frame
Square plug-in/ Round plug-in/ should be used. Round plug-in/ AT7821 should be used.
horizontal type vertical type vertical type * External dimensions,
however, differ. In
addition, the reset method
changes from voltage
input to non-voltage input.

MHP-NS- MHP-N- CHP-NF PM4HF-

MHP-M Exposed type MHP-NM Exposed type Terminal base AT8-RFD CHP-SD PM4H-SD With exposed attachment,
Round plug-in/ Round plug-in/ should be used. terminal base ATC180041
horizontal type vertical type should be used.
* External dimensions and
contact capacity, however,
differ. In addition, with the
PM4H-SD:
1) (1) to (8) have no internal
connection, and
2) the input (star) changes
MHP-M- MHP-NM- CHP-SD- PM4HSD- to 1a.
MHP-YC Embedded type MHP-N Exposed type Attachment frame PM48A PM4H-A With exposed
With attachment Without AT7821 should be used. attachment, terminal
frame attachment frame base ATC180041 should
be used.

MHP-YC- MHP-N- PM48A- PM4HA-

MHP-YM Embedded type MHP-NM Exposed type Attachment frame PM48 PM4H-S With exposed
With attachment Without AT7831 should be used. attachment, terminal
frame attachment frame base ATC180031 should
be used.

MHP-YM- MHP-NM- PM48 PM4HS-

CHP-N Exposed type PM4H-S The external dimension PM48M PM4H-M With exposed
with attachement PMH and contact capacity are attachment, terminal
frame type different. base ATC180031 for F8
type and F8R type
ATC180041 for F11R type.

PM4HS-
CHP-N- PMH- PM48M- PM4HM-
CHP-N Exposed type PM4H-S The external dimension PM48F PM4H-F With exposed
without attachment PMH and contact capacity are attachment, terminal
frame type different. base ATC180031 for F8
type and F8R type
ATC180041 for F11R type.

PM4HS-
CHP-N- PMH- PM48F- PM4HF-
CHP-NF Exposed type PM4H-F * External dimensions, PM48SD PM4H-SD With exposed
without attachment however, differ. In attachment, terminal
frame type addition, the reset method base ATC180031 should
changes from voltage be used.
input to non-voltage input.

CHP-NF- PM4HF- PM48SD PM4HSD

180
 Timers
Discontinued models Recommended substitutes Attachment Discontinued models Recommended substitutes Attachment
PM48W PM4H-W With exposed LT48 (8-pin) LT4H (8-pin)
attachment, terminal
base ATC180031 should
be used.

LT4H
PM48W PM4HW- LT48 LT4H-L
PMH-M PM4H-M/PM4S The external dimension LT48W (8-pin) LT4H-W (8-pin)
and contact capacity are
different.

PMH-M- PM4HM-/PM4S- LT48W LT4HW

CDX Time relay S1DXM-A Timer/ DIN rail socket (8-pin) DIN rail socket (8-pin)
S1DX Timer

CDX S1DXM-/S1DX- ATC18003 ATC180031

PDX Timer S1DXM-A Timer/ DIN rail socket (11-pin) DIN rail socket (11-pin)
S1DX Timer

PDX S1DXM-/S1DX- ATC18004 ATC180041

VHP digital high-power timer QM4H digital timer The size is different.
Compact size

DIN48

VHP QM4H
QM48S (8-pin) QM4H (8-pin)

QM48S QM4H
QM72S (Screw terminal) QM4H (8-pin) The size is different.

72

48

QM72S QM4H

In some cases, the specifications of the recommended substitutes are not exactly the same as those of the discontinued model. Please confirm the specifications before using the
recommended substitutes.

181
 Counters Hour meters
Discontinued models Recommended substitutes Attachment Discontinued models Recommended substitutes Attachment
MC electromagnetic LC4H The size and Body
counters attachment method
are different. Round type
The input method is (attachment hole φ 45)
different.
(Voltage input →
non-voltage input) Square type
(attachment hole
45)
LC4H TH11* TH141S
MC6 LC4H-L TH12* TH142S
LC48 Relay type: 8-pin LC4H Relay type: 8-pin Body
Tr type: 11-pin Tr type: 11-pin
Square type
(attachment hole
47)

Square type
(attachment hole
45)
LC4H TH21* TH241S
LC48 LC4H-L TH22* TH242S
LC48W (11-pin) LC4H-W (11-pin) TH30 LT4H (~999.9 h) The size and
attachment method
are different.
The input method is
different.
(Voltage input →
non-voltage input)

LC48W LC4H-W TH30 LT4H

EM48S (8-pin) LC4H (8-pin) LT4H-W (~9999 h)

LC4H
EM48S LC4H-L LT4HW
EM72S (Screw terminal) LC4H (Screw terminal) The size is different. LH24 LH2H The both one-touch

72 Panel-mounting type Panel-mounting type installation type and
installation frame type
are available.

48

• One-touch installation • One-touch installation

LC4H type type
EM72S LC4H-L
LH24
LC24 LC2H The both one-touch
Panel-mounting type Panel-mounting type installation type and
installation frame type
are available.
• Installation frame type
LH2H

LH24 LH2H
• One-touch installation • One-touch installation PC board mounting type PC board mounting type
type type
LC24

• Installation frame type

LC2H LH24 LH2H
LC24 LC2H
PC board mounting type PC board mounting type

LC24 LC2H

In some cases, the specifications of the recommended substitutes are not exactly the same as those of the discontinued model. Please confirm the specifications before using the
recommended substitutes.

182
FOREIGN SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW
1. International Standards
IEC standard
International Electrotechnical Commission
By promoting international cooperation toward all
problems and related issues regarding
standardization in the electrical and electronic
technology fields, the IEC, a non-governmental
organization, was started in October, 1908, for the
purpose of realizing mutual understanding on an
international level. To this end, the IEC standard
was enacted for the purpose of promoting
international standardization.
2. North America
UL (Underwiters Laboratories Inc.)
This is a non-profit testing organization formed in
LISTING MARK
1894 by a coalition of U.S. fire insurance firms,
which tests and approves industrial products
(finished products). When electrical products are
marketed in the U.S., UL approval is mandated in
many states, by state law and city ordinances. In
Fig. 1
order to obtain UL approval, the principal parts
contained in industrial products must also be UL-
RECOGNITION MARK
approved parts.
UL approval is divided into two general types. One
is called “listing” (Fig. 1), and applies to industrial
products (finished products). Under this type of
Fig. 2 approval, products must be approved
unconditionally. The other type is called
“recognition” (Fig. 2), and is a conditional approval
which applies to parts and materials.
Certification CSA (Canadian Standards Association)
This was established in 1919 as a non-profit, non-
governmental organization aimed at promoting
standards. It sets standards for industrial products,
parts, and materials, and has the authority to judge
Fig. 3 electrical products to determine whether they
conform to those standards. The CSA is the ultimate
authority in the eyes of both the government and the
Component Acceptance
people in terms of credibility and respect. Almost all
states and provinces in Canada require CSA
approval by law, in order to sell electrical products.
As a result, electrical products exported from Japan
to Canada are not approved under Canadian laws
Fig. 4 unless they have received CSA approval and
display the CSA mark. Approval is called
“certification”, and products and parts which have
been approved are called “certified equipment”, and
display the mark shown in Fig. 3. The mark shown
in Fig. 4 is called the “Component Acceptance”
mark, and indicates conditional approval which is
applicable to parts. The C-UL mark shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 5
(finished products) and Fig. 6 (parts) indicates that
the product has been tested and approved in UL
laboratories, based on UL and CSA standards,
through mutual approval activities.
Fig. 6
3. Europe
EN standard
European Standards/Norme Europeennee
(France)/Europaishe Norm (Germany)
Abbreviation for European Standards. A unified
standard enacted by CEN/CENELEC (European
Standards Committee/European Electrical
Standards Committee). EU and EFTA member
nations employ the content of the EN standards into
their own national standards and are obligated to
abolish those national standards that do not agree
with the EN standards.
(1) Germany
VDE (Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker)
The VDE laboratory was established mainly by the
German Electric Technology Alliance, which was
formed in 1893. It carries out safety experiments
VDE and passes approval for electrical devices and
parts. Although VDE certification is not enforced
under German law, punishment is severe should
electrical shock or fire occur; therefore, it is, in fact,
like an enforcement.
TÜV (Technischer Überwachungs-Verein)
TÜV is a civilian, non-profit, independent
organization that has its roots in the German Boiler
Surveillance Association, which was started in 1875
for the purpose of preventing boiler accidents. A
major characteristic of TÜV is that it exists as a
combination of 14 independent organizations (TÜV
Rheinland, TÜV Bayern, etc.) throughout Germany.
TÜV carries out inspection on a wide variety of
industrial devices and equipment, and has been
entrusted to handle electrical products, as well, by
the government. TÜV inspection and certification is
based mainly on the VDE standard.
TÜV certification can be obtained from any of the 14
TÜV Rheinland
TÜVs throughout Germany and has the same
effectiveness as obtaining VDE certification.
4. Shipping Standards
(1) Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
Standards from the Lloyd’s Register shipping asso-
ciation based in England. These standards are
safety standards for environmental testing of the
temperature and vibration tolerances of electrical
components used for UMS (unmanned machine
rooms in marine vessels) applications. These stan-
dards have become international standards for
control equipment in all marine vessel applications.
No particular action is taken to display the confor-
mation to these standards on the products.
183
5. Pilot Duty
One of the specifications in the “UL508
Industrial Control Equipment” regulations at
UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.), has to
do with the grade of contact control capacity
by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers
Association) standards. By obtaining both UL
and CSA approval for this grade, the product
becomes authorized publicly.

Pilot Duty A300

AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA]
voltage current power power During During
[V] [A] [A] [A] input breaker
120 60 6 7,200 720
10
240 30 3 7,200 720

Pilot Duty B300

AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA]
voltage current power power During During
[V] [A] [A] [A] input breaker
120 30 3 3,600 360
5
240 15 1.5 3,600 360

Pilot Duty C300

AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA]
voltage current power power During During
[V] [A] [A] [A] input breaker
120 15 1.5 1,800 180
2.5
240 7.5 0.7 1,800 180

184
FOREIGN SPECIFICATIONS
TIMER
Products Recognized by UL Standards Certified by CSA Standards Lloyd’s Register Standards
Remarks
Name File No. Recognized rating File No. Certified rating File No. Certified rating
E43149 5A250VAC E43149 5A250VAC
PM4S — —
PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
PM4H-A E122222 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC
PM4H-S PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
5A 250V AC
PM4H-M 98/10004
(resistive)
PM4H-SD
PM4H-W
E122222 3A250VAC LR39291 3A250VAC 3A 250V AC
PM4H-F 98/10004
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300 (resistive)
E122222 5A250VAC E122222 5A250VAC
PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
LT4H
LT4H-L — —
LT4H-W
100mA30VDC 100mA30VDC

E43149 5A250VAC E43149 5A250VAC

QM4H — —
PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
E59504 7A1/6HP125VAC LR39291 7A1/6HP125VAC 88/10123 125V3.5A (COS φ]0.4) “The standard models conform to
7A1/6HP250VAC 7A1/6HP250VAC 250V2A (COS φ]0.4) the UL/CSA standard.
3A30VDC 3A30VDC 250V7A(COS φ]1.0) (To place an order, you do not
PMH PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300 need to specify the tailing charac-
ter □
9 of each item number.)”
The standard models conform to
the LLOYD standard.
MHP E59504 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC 88/10123 250V5A (COS φ]1.0) “The standard models conform to
MHP-M the UL/CSA standard.
(To place an order, you do not
need to specify the tailing charac-
ter □
9 of each item number.)”
E122222 7A125VAC LR39291 7A125VAC
6A250VAC 6A250VAC 7A 250V AC
S1DXM- 2C 1/6HP125, 250VAC 1/6HP125, 250VAC
98/10004
(resistive)
A/M PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
(Relay
output) E122222 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC
5A 250V AC
4C 1/10HP125, 250VAC 1/10HP125, 250VAC 98/10004
(resistive)
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
E122222 7A125VAC LR39291 7A125VAC
6A250VAC 6A250VAC 7A 250V AC
2C 98/10004
S1DX 1/6HP125, 250VAC 1/6HP125, 250VAC (resistive)
(Relay PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
output) E122222 5A250VAC LR39291 5A250VAC
5A 250V AC
4C 1/10HP125, 250VAC 1/10HP125, 250VAC 98/10004
(resistive)
PILOT DUTY C300 PILOT DUTY C300
PM5S-A E59504 5A250VAC E59504 5A250VAC
PM5S-S (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300 — —
PM5S-M

Accessories
Recognized by UL Standards Certified by CSA Standards Lloyd’s Register Standards
Products Name Remarks
File No. Recognized rating File No. Certified rating File No. Certified rating
E59504 10A250VAC LR39291 10A250VAC
AT8-RFD (AT78039) AT8-RFD (AT78039)
7A250VAC 7A250VAC
AT8-DF8L (ATA48211) AT8-DF8L (ATA48211) — —
Common mount- 8P cap was an approved 8P cap was an approved
ing tracks for as an option. as an option.
timers AD8-RC (AD8013) AD8-RC (AD8013)
E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031) E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031)
AT8-DF11K (ATC180041) (C-UL) AT8-DF11K (ATC180041)
— —
AT8-R8K (AT78041) AT8-R8K (AT78041)
AT8- R11K (AT78051) AT8- R11K (AT78051)

185
FOREIGN SPECIFICATIONS

Counters
UL recognized CSA certified
Product name Remarks
File No. Approved ratings File No. Approved ratings
LC4H E122222 5A250V AC E122222 5A250V AC
LC4H-L PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
LC4H-S 100mA 30V DC 100mA 30V DC
E122222 3A250V AC E122222 3A250V AC
LC4H-W PILOT DUTY C300 (C-UL) PILOT DUTY C300
100mA 30V DC 100mA 30V DC
E122222 24-240 V AC/DC E122222 24-240 V AC/DC
LC2H 4.5-30 V DC (C-UL) 4.5-30 V DC
3 V DC 3 V DC
E122222 24-240 V AC/DC E122222 24-240 V AC/DC
LC2H preset 4.5-30 V DC (C-UL) 4.5-30 V DC
3 V DC 3 V DC

Hour Meters
UL recognized CSA certified
Product name Remarks
File No. Approved ratings File No. Approved ratings
E42876 115-120, 220, LR39291 115-120, 220, • For UL-recognized and CSA-certified products, specify “U” at
TH13 · TH23 series
240V AC 240V AC the end of the part No.
E42876 12, 24, 48, 100, LR39291 12, 24, 48, 100, • Only black panel-mounting type UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
110, 115-120, 200, 110, 115-120, 200, • For UL-recognized and CSA-certified products, specify “U” at
TH14 · TH24 series
220, 240V AC 220, 240V AC the end of the product code.
• Panel-mounting silver type not UL-recognized nor CSA-certified.
E42876 12, 24, 48, 100, LR39291 12, 24, 48, 100, • Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
TH63 · 64 series 110, 115-120, 200, 110, 115-120, 200,
220, 240V AC 220, 240V AC
E122222 24-240 V AC/DC E122222 24-240 V AC/DC • Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
LH2H 4.5-30 V DC (C-UL) 4.5-30 V DC
3 V DC 3 V DC
E122222 24-240 V AC/DC E122222 24-240 V AC/DC • Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
LH2H preset 4.5-30 V DC (C-UL) 4.5-30 V DC
3 V DC 3 V DC
E42876 12 V DC E42876 12 V DC • Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified.
TH8 series 24 V DC (C-UL) 24 V DC

Accessories
UL-recognized CSA certified
Product name Remarks
File No. Rating File No. Rating
E59504 10A250V AC LR26550 10A250V AC
AT8-RFD (AT78039) AT8-RFD (AT78039)
7A250V AC 7A250V AC
AT8-DF8L (ATA48211) AT8-DF8L (ATA48211)
8P cap CSA-certified as 8P cap UL-listed as option.
Common counter fixtures option. AD8-RC(AD8013)
AD8-RC (AD8013)
E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031) E148103 AT8-DF8K (ATC180031)
AT8-DF11K (ATC180041) (C-UL) AT8-DF11K (ATC180041)
AT8-R8K (AT78041) AT8-R8K (AT78041)
AT8- R11K (AT78051) AT8- R11K (AT78051)

186
CE MARKINGS OVERVIEW
Counter, Hour Meter conforming to CE markings and EC
EN/IEC standards directives
The Timer, Counter, Hour Meter shown below conform to both EN and IEC standards, The world’s largest single market, the
and may display the CE markings. European Community (EC) was born on
1 January 1993 (changing its name to
Product EU in November 1993. It is now always
Product name EMC directives Low-voltage directives
classification expressed as EU, apart from EC direc-
LT4H EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 tives.) EU member country products
LT4H-L EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 have always had their quality and safety
LT4H-W EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 guaranteed according to the individual
PM4H EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 standards of each member country.
Timers S1DX EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 However, the standards of each country
S1DXM-A/M EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 being different prevented the free flow of
PM4S EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 goods within the EU. For this reason, in
PM5S EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 order to eliminate non-tariff barriers due
QM4H EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 to these standards, and to maximize the
A-TB72 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 merits of EU unification, the EC direc-
Time Switch
A-TB72Q EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 tives were issued concomitant to the
LC4H EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 birth of the EU.
LC4H-L EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 The EN standards were established as
LC4H-S EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 universal EU standards in order to facili-
Counters
LC4H-W EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61812-1 tate EU directives. These standards
LC2H EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 were merged with the international IEC
LC2H preset EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 — standards and henceforth reflect the
TH13 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 standards in all countries. Also, the CE
TH23 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 markings show that products conform to
TH14 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 EC directives, and guarantee the free
TH24 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 flow of products within the EC.
TH40 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1
Hour Meters TH50 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1
TH63 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 Appropriate
TH64 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1 EC directives for control
LH2H EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 EN 61010-1
LH2H preset EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 — equipment products
TH8 EN 61000-6-4/EN 61000-6-2 — The main EC directives that are to do
with machinery and electrical equipment
are the machinery directive, the EMC
What are EN standards? directive, the low voltage directive, and
An abbreviation of Norme Europeenne If the relevant EN standard does not the telecom directive. Although these
(in French), and called European exist, it is necessary to obtain approval directives have already been issued, the
Standards in English. Approval is by vote based on the relevant IEC standard or, if date of their enactment is different for
among the CEN/CENELEC member the relevant IEC standard does not exist, each one. The machinery directive was 1
countries, and is a unified standards the relevant standard from each country, January 1995. The EMC directive was 1
limited to EU member countries, but the such as VDE, BS, SEMKO, and so forth. January 1996, and the low voltage direc-
contents conform to the international tive was enacted from 1 January 1997.
ISO/IEC standards. The telecom directive was established by
the separate CTR (Common Technology
References.)

187
INDEX
Product types
A-TB72-D- A-TB72 Time switches AC motor type 88
A-TB72-Q- A-TB72Q Time switches Quartz power-failure compensation type 88
LC2H LC2H DIN half size LCD display counter 98
LC2H LC2H Preset counter 106
LC4H LC4H DIN 48 size LCD electronic counter 115
LC4HL LC4HL DIN 48 size LCD electronic counter 116
LC4H- LC4H-S Electronic counter 123
LC4H-W- LC4H-W DIN 48 size LCD electronic counter 132
LH2H LH2H DIN half size LCD display hour meter 148
LH2H LH2H Preset hour meters 156
LT4H LT4H DIN48 size digital timer 34
LT4HL LT4H-L DIN48 size digital timer 35
LT4HW LT4H-W DIN48 size digital timer 41
MHP-N MHP Compact size power ON-delay motor timers 82
MHP-NM MHP-M Compact size power ON-delay motor timers 82
PM4HA-H- PM4H-A DIN48 size MULTI-RANGE analog timer 17
PM4HF11R- PM4H-F11R Power OFF-delay (with instantaneous reset) 27
PM4HF8- PM4H-F8 Power OFF-delay (without reset) 26
PM4HF8R- PM4H-F8R Power OFF-delay (with instantaneous reset) 26
PM4HM-H- PM4H-M DIN48 size MULTI-RANGE analog timer 17
PM4HS-H- PM4H-S DIN48 size MULTI-RANGE analog timer 17
PM4HSD-S- PM4H-SD STAR ( )-DELTA (
) switching 24
PM4HSDM-S- PM4H-SDM STAR ( )-DELTA (
) switching (Instantaneous contact) 24
PM4HW-H- PM4H-W Twin timer Cyclic (OFF-start, Twin) 30
PM4S-A- PM4S Multi-range analog timer 13
PM5S-A- PM5S-A DIN48 size MULTI-RANGE analog timer 73
PM5S-M- PM5S-M DIN48 size MULTI-RANGE analog timer 73
PM5S-S- PM5S-S DIN48 size MULTI-RANGE analog timer 73
PMH PMH Compact size high precision power ON-delay timers 80
QM4HS- QM4H DIN48 size digital timer 50
QM4HG- QM4H DIN48 size digital timer 50
S1DX- S1DX Power ON-delay 63
S1DX- S1DX Power Flicker 64
S1DX- S1DX Power One-shot 64
S1DX- S1DX Power One-cycle 64
S1DXM-A- S1DXM-A Multi-range timer 57
S1DXM-M- S1DXM-M Multi-range timer 58
TH13 TH13 Hour meter (without reset button) 166
TH14 TH14 DIN48 size hour meter (without reset button) 168
TH23 TH23 Hour meter (with reset button) 166
TH24 TH24 DIN48 size hour meter (with reset button) 168
TH40 TH40 DIN48 dual indicator hour meter 170
TH50 TH50 DIN48 minutes indicator hour meter 172
TH63 TH63 DIN half size hour meter (without reset button) 174
TH64 TH64 DIN half size hour meter (with reset button) 174
TH70 TH70 DIN48 DC type hour meter 176
TH8 TH8 DC type hour meter 178

Options
AD68002 Leaf holding clip S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
AD8-RC 8P cap DIN size timers 54
AD8-RC 8P cap Compact size timer 85
AD8-RC 8P cap DIN size counters 143
ADX18001 Leaf holding clip S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18002 Mounting frame S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18003 Socket S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18004 Cap S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18006 Mounting frame S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18007 Mounting frame S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18008 Protective cover S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18011 Cap block S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX18012 Leaf holding clip S1DX/S1DXM timer accessory 69
ADX28005 Socket line holding clip S1DXM timer accessory 69
AEL3801 Panel cover DIN half size LCD counter LC2H 114

188
 INDEX
AEL58011 LC4H panel cover (4 digits) DIN size counters accessories 144
AEL58012 LC4H panel cover (6 digits) DIN size counters accessories 144
AEL58013 LC4H-S panel cover (4 digits) “Accessories, DIN size counters” 144

Options (continued)
AEL58014 LC4H-S panel cover (6 digits) “Accessories, DIN size counters” 144
AEL68011 LC4H-W panel cover DIN size counters accessories 144
AT78041 Rear terminal socket DIN size timers 54
AT78041 Terminal socket at the back Compact size timer 85
AT78041 Rear terminal socket DIN size counters 143
AT78051 Rear terminal socket DIN size timers 54
AT78051 Rear terminal socket DIN size counters 143
AT7808 Holding clip for stand-up GT pipe Compact size timer 86
AT7811 Flush type mounting frame Type K Compact size timer 84
AT7812 Flush type mounting frame Type K Compact size timer 84
AT7813 Flush type mounting frame Type K Compact size timer 84
AT7821 Flush type mounting frame Type MHP Compact size timer 84
AT7822 Flush type mounting frame Type MHP Compact size timer 84
AT7823 Flush type mounting frame Type MHP Compact size timer 84
AT7831 Flush type mounting frame Type MHP-M Compact size timer 84
AT7841 Flush type mounting frame Type S Compact size timer 84
AT7851 Flush type mounting frame Type H Compact size timer 84
AT7852 Flush type mounting frame Type H Compact size timer 84
AT7853 Flush type mounting frame Type H Compact size timer 84
AT8-DA4 Mounting frame DIN size timers mounting parts 55
AT8-DA4 Mounting frame DIN size counters mounting parts 144
AT8-DLA1 Mounting rails DIN size timers mounting parts 55
AT8-DLA1 Mounting rail Compact size timer 86
AT8-DLA1 Mounting rails DIN size counters mounting parts 144
AT8-DP11 11P cap DIN size timers 54
AT8-DP11 11P cap DIN size counters 143
AT8-RFD DIN terminal socket Compact size timer 86
AT8-RFV Round terminal Compact size timer 86
ATA4806 Fastening plate DIN size timers mounting parts 55
ATA4806 Fastening plate Compact size timer 86
ATA4806 Fastening plate DIN size counters mounting parts 144
ATC18001 Set ring DIN size timers accessories 55
ATC18002 Rubber gasket DIN size timers mounting parts 55
ATC18002 Rubber gasket DIN size counters mounting parts 144
ATC180041 DIN rail socket (11-pin) DIN size timers 54
ATC180041 DIN rail socket (11-pin) DIN size counters 143
ATC180031 DIN rail socket (8-pin) DIN size timers 54
ATC180031 DIN rail socket (8-pin) DIN size counters 143
ATC18011 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories PM4H-A 55
ATC18012 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories PM4H-S 55
ATC18013 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories PM4H-M 55
ATC18014 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories PM4H-W 55
ATC18015 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories PM4H-SD 55
ATC18016 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories PM4H-F 55
ATH3801 Panel cover DIN half size hour meter LH2H 164
ATH3802 Lithium battery (3 V) 114, 164
ATH3803 Mounting frame DIN half size counters accessories 114, 164
ATH3804 Rubber gasket DIN half size counters accessories 114, 164
ATL58011 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories LT4H 55
ATL68011 Panel cover DIN size timers accessories LT4H-W 55
AW68102 GT pipe socket Compact size timer 86
HC2-SF-K Terminal socket, HC 2-pin S1DX/S1DXM timer 70
HC2-SFD-K DIN high terminal socket, HC2 S1DX/S1DXM timer 70
HC2-SFD-S Slim DIN terminal socket, HC2 S1DX/S1DXM timer 70
HC2-SS-K Socket, HC 2-pin S1DX/S1DXM timer 72
HC4-HSF-K High terminal socket, HC 1-, 2- and 4-pin S1DX/S1DXM timer 70
HC4-SFD-K DIN high terminal socket, HC4 S1DX/S1DXM timer 70
HC4-SS-K Socket, HC 4-pin S1DX/S1DXM timer 72
HJ2-SFD/-S Terminal socket, HJ2 S1DX/S1DXM timer 71
HJ4-SFD/-S Terminal socket, HJ4 S1DX/S1DXM timer 71
N-TC Protective cover Compact size timer 85

189